Blog

Ex Halo devs speak out on alleged Helldivers 2-style ODST game pitch Microsoft / SonyFormer Halo developers have spoken up amid the shocking surge in popularity of Helldivers 2. They claim to have pitched dozens of ideas to no avail, with one being an ODST title in the same vein as the latest PlayStation smash hit. There’s no two ways about it, Helldivers 2 has skyrocketed well above anyone’s expectations. With hundreds of thousands of players jumping in all at once, devs have been rushing to expand server capacity and accommodate the rapidly growing fanbase. Evidently, not even those in the studio or at Sony predicted such a monumental rate of engagement for a sequel nearly a decade in the making. Its popularity is so widespread even Xbox owners are petitioning for a port, including Phil Spencer himself. Given its impact on the industry, many have been outspoken in recent days. With its clear similarities to Microsoft’s Halo franchise, especially the ODST installment with its near-identical hot drop sequences, it’s attracted the attention of former Halo devs too. One particular tweet caught fire on February 18, as one player claimed to learn of a Helldivers-inspired pitch from 343 Industries, one leaning heavily into the ODST label, putting players back in the armor of Orbital Drop Shock Troopers. This post quickly garnered over a million impressions on the platform before it caught the eye of former Halo devs with experience working under the 343 banners. While one simply replied with an eyes emoji, refusing to elaborate, Ex Lead Designer Kevin Schmitt chimed in with some proper insight. During his nearly 12-year tenure, Schmitt claimed to have pitched “20-30 game ideas that would have totally worked in the Halo universe.” “Many [singleplayer] & [multiplayer] ODST-themed ones. Some galaxy-spanning, some more intimate…and one that was really dark.” So while not explicitly confirming the Helldivers-esque pitch, there’s every chance it was among the few dozen Schmitt and others at 343 were eager to get across the line. For now, Halo fans simply have to imagine a world where ODST got a little more love. It’s been 15 years since Xbox owners dropped into combat ODST-style, but all this time later, it may now be Helldivers 2 delivering the “perfect” experience in that regard.

Ex-GTA dev reveals futuristic open-world rival Last Sentinel at The Game Awards 2023 LightSpeed LALast Sentinel is a thrilling futuristic open-world game revealed at The Game Awards 2023, one that comes from a studio led by an ex-GTA developer. Last Sentinel was announced by ex-GTA 5 developer and head of LightSpeed LA, Steve C. Martin. Among other projects, Martin has also worked on Red Dead Redemption and Bully. Set in a dystopian Tokyo, Last Sentinel focuses on protagonist Hiromi Shoda. She leads an “enthralling narrative steeped in dystopian science fiction lore”, according to a studio spokesperson. The gripping trailer for Last Sentinel captivated audiences at The Game Awards 2023 and Martin took some time to publish a statement that should only get those interested even more excited. In the Statement, Martin gave an outline of his hopes for the game and expressed immense pride in what his team has put together so far. “Last Sentinel epitomizes the vision of LightSpeed LA—a commitment to immersive storytelling and player-centric design,” he said. “We aim to redefine gaming narratives by prioritizing creativity and leveraging our expertise to offer players rich and rewarding experiences.” President of LightSpeed Studios Jerry Chen released a separate statement that explains how Last Sentinel aligns with the company’s vision as a whole. Similarly to Martin, Chen seems confident in the upcoming title. “Last Sentinel is a testament to our commitment to innovation in gaming. As an independent studio under our global umbrella, Lightspeed LA encapsulates our dedication to pushing boundaries and captivating gamers worldwide,” Chen explained. LightSpeed Studios and LightSpeed LA are a division of gaming giant Tencent. Aside from Martin, the team features experienced developers who worked on games like The Last of Us, Jedi: Fallen Order, Uncharted, and more. There’s no release window set for Last Sentinel as of yet but we’ll be following the game closely and will update you with any information as it emerges.

Ex-EA CEO responds to backlash after calling devs “f**king idiots” over microtransactions Flickr: Web SummitControversial comments from Unity CEO John Riccitiello incited a negative reaction from the public and he has now reacted to his “crude” choice of words. Monetization in gaming has been a sore point for players for many years now with the controversial business model becoming commonplace in the industry. With NFTs proving to be the latest craze affecting gaming, the idea of having to spend more money on top of the base fee for games has never been fully accepted. So it was quite startling when Unity’s CEO not only encouraged the notion of monetization but chastised people for not incorporating them more into their games. Unity CEO John Riccitiello’s thoughts went down like a lead balloon and he has performed a u-turn on his comments. Unity CEO apologizes for monetization comments In an interview with PocketGamer, the former EA CEO, Riccitiello, said: “Ferrari and some of the other high-end car manufacturers still use clay and carving knives. It’s a very small portion of the gaming industry that works that way, and some of these people are my favourite people in the world to fight with – they’re the most beautiful and pure, brilliant people. They’re also some of the biggest f**king idiots.” The comments pertained to a potential merger between Unity and ironSource, a company that specializes in app monetization and distribution, to expand the company’s scope and vision. Unity has proved to be a successful game engine used for plenty of well-liked names including the mega-popular Pokemon Go. The gaming community was unanimously outraged at Riccitiello’s comments, so much so that the CEO addressed his comments in a Tweet. The apology pushed back some of the criticism, but it wasn’t enough to undo the severity of his comments. “I have never seen so many people in the community seriously considering switching engines after having used Unity for years, because of everything that has been happening,” said one disgruntled user. Due to the overwhelmingly negative reaction, Riccitiello issued a full apology: “I’m going to start with an apology. My word choice was crude. I am sorry. I am listening and will do better.” The CEO goes on to say that he has respect for game developers and they “work incredibly hard and want people to play their game.” Riccitiello surmises near the end: “If I had been smarter in choosing my words I would have said just this…we are working to provide developers with tools so that they can better understand what their players think, and it is up to them to act or not, based on this feedback.” It’s commendable that an apology was issued, but you have to wonder how much damage has been done already. We’ll have to wait and see if there’s any reaction and fallout to Riccitiello’s apology.

Ex-CoD dev Michael Condrey forms 2K studio to make new game L: 31st Union R: Wikimedia CommonsFormer Sledgehammer Games and Call of Duty developer Michael Condrey is helming a new studio with 2K Games called 31st Union, and he’s already gotten to work on a game. Since his departure from the Sledgehammer, Condrey has been rather outspoken about the popular series. In the months leading up to the release of Modern Warfare, he claimed Activision made Modern Warfare “controversial” so they would make headlines. Following the release of the game, Condrey has maintained a lower profile, with a new studio to run. On February 11, news broke that his new company was named 31st Union and they are already developing a title. According to a job listing, it sounds like this title could actually end up being a direct competitor to the Call of Duty franchise. The San Francisco based company is looking for somebody who has a “strong passion for online multiplayer action games.” It sounds as though his studio will be gearing up to make something in the same vein as CoD, but details are unclear. It will be a hard task to take on if this is indeed what he has planned, since Activision said back in December that Modern Warfare has become the most-played CoD this console generation. With that said, Condrey remains excited about his “ambitious” new title. “31st Union is off to an incredible start with a passionate and talented team, an intentioned culture that champions inclusivity and greater representation, and an ambitious and inspired new IP that we’re extremely excited about,” he said in a press release. However, just because a new company has the backing of a big-name developer, it doesn’t necessarily mean whatever they are making will be successful. When Cliff Bleszinski split from Epic Games to found his own studio, Boss Key Games, he also had set high goals for himself. Under this umbrella, he released both Radical Heights and Lawbreakers, the latter of which actually received positive reviews from critics. Neither game was able to find much of an audience and the company ended up folding in just under four years. That doesn’t mean Condrey’s company is doomed to the same fate, but it will definitely be interesting to keep an eye on. We don’t know much about the IP in development, but in Take Two’s investor call, the publisher confirmed we’ll be learning more about the project in the next couple of months.

Ex-Blizzard President calls out Xbox for lack of hit games & “$18 skins” XboxFormer Blizzard President Mike Ybarra is calling out Xbox for a lack of exclusive titles, while urging both Sony and Microsoft to cut it out with expensive skins and battle passes. Xbox’s lack of hit games has proven to be one of the main drawbacks in the console wars, with the Sony PlayStation winning out through its exclusivity deals. Following news that Black Myth: Wukong’s delay on Xbox is due to a Sony exclusivity deal, Blizzard’s ex-president Mike Ybarra chimed in, saying that if he was PlayStation, he’d double down, sensing “blood in the water.” “If your strategy is to win the living room, you need exclusive hits because winning is both a platform and games perspective. Sony knows how to make hits, and how to pick the hits from others to be exclusive,” he said in response to an X post about exclusivity. If your strategy is to win the living room, you need exclusive hits because winning is both a platform and games perspective. Sony knows how to make hits, and how to pick the hits from others to be exclusive. If I was them I would double down right now because the blood in the… — Mike Ybarra (@Qwik) August 30, 2024 This resulted in others suggesting that Sony fumbled by focusing on live-service games such as Concord. The hero shooter failed to break 700 players on launch day after being in development for eight years. Ybarra urged Sony to “stop the all in approach on this” and further added that players are growing sick of some of the trends associated with live-service games, pointing specifically to how the titles are monetized. “Players are tired of battle passes and $18 skins,” he added. Microsoft notably bought Activision-Blizzard in a $68B deal, picking up franchises that have featured battle passes and expensive skins such as Call of Duty and Overwatch. Players have often voiced their displeasure at how skins are priced, frequently calling out “scummy” cosmetic costs on social media and beyond. The former president left Blizzard in January 2024 following Microsoft’s acquisition of the company and its decision to lay off around 1,900 members of staff.

Ex-Blizzard employee exposes unfair treatment in viral TikTok amid lawsuit controversy TikTok: PureBullFitA former Blizzard employee has posted a now-viral TikTok talking about some of his experiences with the company, not long after it was revealed that the State of California was taking legal action against Activision Blizzard over unfair work practices. On July 21, it became public knowledge that Activision Blizzard are being sued by the California Department of Fair Employment and Housing (DFEH) for their “pervasive frat boy culture.” The lawsuit mentions instances of misogyny, sexual harassment and, in one disturbing case, a woman who committed suicide following harassment from her colleagues. While the entire gaming industry looks on at Activision Blizzard and some of the truly depressing stories coming out of the company, one former employee is going viral with a TikTok speaking of things he witnessed and experienced. Shared to the various relevant subreddits of AB games, including Call of Duty, World of Warcraft and more, PureBullFit — better known as Kevin Meier, a former Personnel Manager at Blizzard — has exposed some of the harrowing things he saw at the company. “In their response, they said this does not represent who Activision Blizzard is,” Meier explained. “Yes it does. And it has for a long time, since my first day back in 2012. I was sexually harrassed, the women had it way worse. “One of my employees was told by a technical director, to her face in front of witnesses during one of these ‘cube crawls’ that he didn’t like her because she wasn’t giving him head. When an employee was sexually assaulted at a holiday party, we had to fight tooth and nail with HR to get them to take any action, through which they victimized her and blamed her.” He finalized by mentioning the late employee who took her own life, telling the company that “It is real. It’s you. Do better.” Meier follows a string of streamers, creators and those closely involved with Blizzard calling out the company. One WoW dev admitted that “no work is being done” while the lawsuit takes headline, while Asmongold has spoken out about the “shameful” news frequently.

Ex-Blizzard devs reveal new RTS Stormgate at Summer Game Fest Frost Giant StudiosFrost Giant Studios revealed its first game at Summer Game Fest, Stormgate, and it’s coming in 2023. Frost Giant games, formed by former Blizzard developers, revealed its first game is a new free-to-play RTS called Stormgate at Summer Game Fest. The game, which studio co-founder Tim Morten stressed will not be “pay to win” and will feature “no NFTs”, will launch in 2023. New RTS Stormgate revealed at Summer Game Fest You can check out the trailer below: The cinematic shows off two of the game’s factions: The human resistance, and the Infernal Host. The former is comprised of technologically advanced archaeologists, while the latter’s demonic look gives off big Diablo vibes — perhaps fittingly. The cinematic shows the two battling over an artefact, with a mech suit facing off against a huge demon. The developer’s Twitter account notes that incoming traffic has crashed the Frost Giant Studios site, suggesting plenty of fans are looking for their RTS fix. Wow, our servers were NOT ready for that many visitors. We’re working as fast as we can to get the site and our beta signups back online. In the meantime, please visit https://t.co/BV3mER27EJ and sign up for our newsletter to receive the latest updates on Stormgate! — Frost Giant Studios (@Frost_Giant) June 9, 2022 Frost Giant Studios’ team is made up of developers that have worked on StarCraft, Command & Conquer, Diablo, and Warcraft, and was formed in 2020.

EVO Japan 2024: Dates, games, prize pool Bandai NamcoEVO Japan, one of the biggest and most prestigious fighting game tournaments, is set to return in 2024. Here is everything you need to know, including the dates, games, and prize pool. EVO Japan is a smaller version of the popular fighting game tournament EVO held annually in the United States of America. However, even though it is a bit smaller in scale, the competition is fierce and only the best players can clinch the trophies across multiple titles. However, EVO Japan 2024 will be a lot more exciting than the one in 2023 as this year most of the lineup for the featured games has been revamped. The top titles such as Street Fighter and Tekken will feature their latest editions. This is bound to bring forth new competitors who will lock horns against the old Gods, thereby creating an atmosphere that fans across the world are bound to enjoy. As such, here is all you need to know about EVO Japan 2024. Contents EVO Japan 2024 Dates EVO Japan 2024 will begin on April 27, 2024, and conclude on April 29, 2024. Registration for the event has already begun and will continue till March 15, 2024. This is valid for both players as well as spectators. Additionally, if you are a competitor, you need to register to Start.gg as well. This step is important as otherwise you will not be considered for the tournament. The final date for this registration is March 22, 2024. EVO Japan 2024 games The games that will be featured as part of the main lineup for EVO Japan 2024 are as follows: Street Fighter 6 – Tekken 8 – Granblue Fantasy Versus Rising – King of Fighters XV – Street Fighter III Third Strike – Guilty Gear Strive – Under Night In Birth II Sys: Celes – EVO Japan 2024 prize pool The prize pool across all games at EVO Japan 2024 has been listed in the following table (the currency for the prize pool is Japanese Yen): This is all you need to know about EVO Japan 2024 for now. We will update this section with further details once they become available in the future. In the meantime, you can check out our coverage some of the other top games. Marvel’s Spider-Man 2 | Assassin’s Creed Mirage | The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | | Wolverine | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman | DokeV | Dragon Age 4 | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Metal Gear Solid 3 Remake | Counter-Strike 2 | Mortal Kombat 1 | AEW: Fight Forever | Starfield | EA Sports FC | Alan Wake 2

EVO competitors recreate iconic Dragon Ball Z moment with audience Two EVO competitors managed to recreate an iconic moment from Dragon Ball Z and even got the audience involved during the DBFZ tournament. The Dragon Ball series has been around since the 1980s, with its fanbase remaining very active to this day. Dragon Ball Z, the series that propelled Dragon Ball to one of the most popular series in the world, has its fair share of iconic moments. A historic matchup Of those moments, Cell’s fight with Goku’s son, Gohan, is among those that have been remembered by fans for decades. Pitting Cell and Gohan against each other on a certain map in DBFZ will prompt an in-game cutscene recreating the start of these two characters’ epic clash. Audiences get involved with this cutscene and scream along with the characters, something that’s been termed the “Cell Yell”. The yell that shook EVO 2022 For those unaware, Cell has fallen out of favor as more and more fighters have been included in DBFZ, but Joan ‘Shanks’ Namay, the player who locked in Cell, was determined to make this moment happen. He could be seen communicating with his opponent, Eric ‘LegendaryyPred’ Bonilla, to make sure the two of them could make this moment happen for the audience. The crowd erupted the moment Shanks locked in Cell. They were ready for the Cell Yell. Until one of the competitors accidentally skipped the cutscene. So, they went out of their way to remake the game and give it another try. What followed was a yell that shook the area, a yell that was almost louder than the characters in-game. The casters joined in on hyping the audience up, quoting the scene themselves and bringing some of that hype to the broadcast. Unfortunately for Shanks, choosing Cell didn’t work out. It’s hard to say whether or not the outcome would have been different if he chose a different team composition, but Shanks was determined to bring the audience together through this iconic scene. In a tweet from Shanks where he was considering playing Cell to initiate this moment, Shanks said that “It might be our last chance to yell together”. Shanks may not have won this set, but his sportsmanship and love for the audience gave us one of EVO 2022’s best moments.

Evo attendees may have been exposed to measles: report Fighting game players in Las Vegas for Evo might well have been exposed to the measles while at the event. According to a report by Polygon, on Thursday, August 15, the Southern Nevada Health District confirmed that a visitor at the Mandalay Bay and Luxor Hotel had a case of the measles. The guest had been at the hotel from August 1 to August 6 and Evo ran between August 2-4. While the event took place at the Mandalay Bay Convention Center, warmups and meetups were at Luxor, making it possible that the infected party could have spread the disease to fighting game competitors. It’s unclear if the infected party was attending the world’s largest fighting game tournament or just so happened to be at the hotels during the event. The Convention Center is not listed in the report by the SNHD. However, that doesn’t mean that the disease could have spread. As SNHD warns in its findings, “because measles can be highly contagious, the Health District is advising people who may have been exposed to review their immunization status and contact their health care providers if they are not fully immunized against measles or have not already had the disease.” People infected can begin to see symptoms up to 21 days after exposure. Normally, 10 days after exposure, an infected patient can develop a fever that can last up to four days and can peak as high as 105 F. Additionally, people can develop a runny nose, cough and red eyes. Evo is the biggest fighting game tournament of the year with over 9,000 attendees competing in multiple fighting games. Over 3,500 people alone registered to compete in Super Smash Brothers Ultimate and close to 2,000 played Street Fighter V. With so many bodies close together, having an infected person in the crowd could be extremely dangerous. The SNHD recommends that, “people who may have been exposed should also contact their health care providers if they develop a rash with fever or other symptoms consistent with measles within 21 days after their visit to these locations.” Dexerto will keep you posted on new developments in this story.

EVO 2020 game lineup revealed: Smash Ultimate, Marvel vs. Capcom 2, more EVOMarvel vs. Capcom 2 is making a surprise return to the fighting game mecca, Evolution Championship Series (EVO), in 2020, with Smash Ultimate, Tekken 7, and Street Fighter V headlining the major event. Fighting game fans rejoice, fan favorite franchise Marvel vs. Capcom will be making a return to EVO alongside a host of usual mainstays in 2020. The popular franchise was announced as a major event at EVO 2020 during the game lineup presentation on February 4, alongside eight other titles. This is the #Evo2020 game lineup! Which games will you be competing in this year? pic.twitter.com/OgmaO9bUgG — Evo (@Evo) February 5, 2020 Smash Ultimate will once again be appearing at EVO, as well as Tekken 7, Street Fighter V, and Dragon Ball FighterZ. While these tournaments shouldn’t be a surprise to anyone, players can now stop holding their breath in case something completely crazy was on the cards. The 22nd rendition of the major fighting game event will also see the return of Soulcalibur VI, Samurai Shodown, and Under Night In-Birth from 2019’s event. Marvel vs. Capcom’s inclusion after a three-year absence comes as a surprise to the game’s most dedicated players, including Justin Wong. “Wait MVC2,” he said on Twitter. “They didn’t tell me I’m in this tourney until just now.” The franchise will be making a return as a special eight-player invite-only tournament, Wong included, and it will be the Marvel vs. Capcom 2’s first appearance at EVO since 2010. WHAT THEY DIDNT TELL ME IM IN THIS TOURNEY UNTIL JUST NOW LMFAO — Justin Wong (@JWonggg) February 5, 2020 Its inclusion does mean that one other major franchise was snubbed from EVO 2020 — Mortal Kombat 11. After the series made a return to EVO in 2019, it will be gone just as quickly as it came, with the game not included in the final list of nine. BlazBlue Cross Tag Battle has also been removed from the games list, with the franchise not featuring at EVO 2020. It’s the first time a BlazBlue game won’t be at EVO since 2016. Instead, it will be replaced by the yet-to-be-released Granblue Fantasy: Versus. The latest game in the Granblue Fantasy franchise will be released in North America on March 3, giving players around five months to prep for the big event. #Evo2020 will be the first event to host a preview GUILTY GEAR STRIVE tournament! Taking place the Friday of Evo 2020… we’re excited to see how this upcoming title rocks the competition. Stay tuned to @ArcSystemWorksU & @ARCSY_Event for more details in the near future. pic.twitter.com/CY1o7TcSWM — Evo (@Evo) February 5, 2020 While not listed on the official event line-up, EVO will also play host to the opening tournament of Guilty Gear Strive. The latest release in the franchise is expected to hit shelves later in the year, but fans can get their first taste of the title at EVO 2020 in a preview tournament. EVO 2020 will kick off in Las Vegas on July 31 and will run until August 2. EVO 2020 game line-up Dragon Ball FighterZ – Granblue Fantasy: Versus – Guilty Gear Strive (Preview) – Marvel vs. Capcom 2: New Age of Heroes – Samurai Shodown – Soulcalibur VI – Street Fighter V: Champion Edition – Super Smash Bros. Ultimate – Tekken 7 – Under Night In-Birth Exe: Late[cl-r] –

Is Evil Dead: The Game single player? Story missions and more Saber InteractiveWant to play Evil Dead: The Game but prefer to explore single player? Here are all the options Saber Interactive has included for playing Evil Dead: The Game solo. Evil Dead: The Game brings Sam Raimi’s unique and masterful vision to life, as players can team up to thwart horrifying Deadites. While there is plenty of multiplayer fun to be had, you may be wondering if Evil Dead: The Game has single player options too. Thankfully, Saber Interactive has included a few different options to play Evil Dead: The Game solo. Contents Does Evil Dead: The Game have single player? Aside from its thrilling multiplayer options, Evil Dead: The Dead also has a story mode that can only be played solo. Entitled ‘Missions’, each of them aims to recreate iconic moments across the Evil Dead franchise, beginning with the dreaded trip to Knowby Cabin. Players can also experience the Survivor vs. Demon mode on their own too, with A.I stepping in to fill up your squad and control the Kandarian demon. How to play Evil Dead: The Game single player If you’re keen to give the single player options in Evil Dead: The Game a try, we recommend starting with the ‘Missions’ first. Follow these steps to access them: Go to the Main Menu – Scroll down to ‘Missions’ – Select which mission you’d like to play – Alternatively, if you’d like to try out the Survivor vs. Demon mode with A.I teammates, you can start playing by carrying out the following steps: Go the Main Menu – Click Survivor vs. Demon – Scroll over to ‘Play Solo’ – This mode will treat you to the same thrills as traditional multiplayer, so make sure you’ve prepared your classes beforehand to survive to the end. That’s all you need to know for playing single player in Evil Dead: The Game. Be sure to check out our other guides too: Evil Dead: The Game classes – All Survivor & Demon characters, abilities, skills | Why is Evil Dead: The Game not working on Xbox? Devs address system error issue | How to unlock Evil Dead: The Game characters – Amanda Fisher, Pablo Simon Bolivar & more |Is Evil Dead: The Game crossplay? How to play cross-platform on PlayStation, Xbox, Switch & PC | How to add and invite friends in Evil Dead: The Game

Evil Dead The Game: Release date, platforms, trailers, gameplay Saber InteractiveEvil Dead: The Game looks to be an action-packed, blood-soaked good time with everyone’s favorite horror icon Ash Williams. This is all the latest news on the game’s release date, available platforms, and trailers. Despite the cancellation of the Ash vs the Evil Dead TV series, the hit horror name continues on. The next movie Evil Dead Rise is set for a release in 2022, and Evil Dead: The Game will allow fans to have a proper first-hand experience of the world’s crazy nature. Ash never got to finish his newest story due to the show’s abrupt end, however, fans of the show will be pleased to know that Ash is back, along with some familiar friends from other adventures in Evil Dead’s Deadite-infested universe. Contents Evil Dead: The Game release date – Evil Dead: The Game platforms – Evil Dead: The Game trailers – Evil Dead: The Game gameplay – Evil Dead: The Game release date After an initial delay pushed it back, developers Saber Interactive have confirmed that Evil Dead: The Game will release on May 13, 2022. The team needed some extra time to fine-tune the game and even add some extra content to it. As the game has been delayed more than once, we’ll continue to monitor its progress and any potential updates from the devs if they pertain to further delays. https://twitter.com/EvilDeadTheGame/status/1491093156318027779 Evil Dead: The Game platforms Evil Dead: The Game is currently shaping up to be released on every major platform: PS4, PS5, Xbox One, Xbox Series X, Nintendo Switch, and PC. The Switch release is arguably the most surprising one of them all, given the violent and gory nature of the franchise. However, Nintendo is known for embracing violent games. The game’s performance will naturally vary across different formats with PS5, Xbox Series X, and PC expected to be the best-playing experiences. Evil Dead: The Game trailers So far, Evil Dead: The Game has had quite a few trailers to show off to fans and newcomers to the series so that they can get excited. The Game Awards 2020 was the official debut of the game, and the first trailer featured nods to both past and present Evil Dead. Here it is in all its glory. To keep hopeful buyers afloat of the game’s development, a further gameplay trailer was released during Summer Game Fest 2021. Since then, the devs have remained steadfast in their vision to keep players afloat with the game and its development. On March 9, we got to see a brief look into the life of a Kandarian Demon and what it will be like to control one. And with the three previous trailers leaning towards being a mixture of gameplay and cinematic trailer footage, we got a juicy look at the Evil Dead: The Game’s core gameplay for a few minutes on April 12, 2022. Evil Dead: The Game gameplay The game was originally announced as a multiplayer-only game utilizing co-op and PvP elements. However, as part of the game’s delay, Saber Interactive said that the game’s delay “is also allowing us to implement a single-player option that will let you enjoy the game when you are without your co-op compadres.” Read More: Did the official GTA 6 logo just leak? – Fans of the TV show will be pleased to know that Bruce Campbell, Dana DeLorenzo, and Ray Santiago are all reprising their roles as Ash, Kelly, and Pablo. The characters will work together using an array of deadly weapons to pull off slick executions on the undead. Not only that, as we saw in the Kandarian Demon demo, but controlling the undead will likewise produce some scintillating and brutal gameplay opportunities too! The Necronomicon continues to haunt and harass the living, and it won’t be too long until players can fight as, or alongside, Ash. For more news on some of the absolute hottest, upcoming games, check these hubs out below: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Overwatch 2 | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | God of War: Ragnarok | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Forspoken | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Sonic Frontiers | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Breath of The Wild sequel | The Witcher 3 next-gen patch | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Haunted Chocolatier

Evil Dead: The Game classes – All Survivor & Demon characters, abilities, skills Saber InteractiveIf you’re wondering which character or class to play as in Evil Dead: The Game, here’s everything you need to know about each Survivor and Demon’s unique abilities and skills. Evil Dead: The Game boasts over 15 playable characters to play as while you try to banish the Kandarian Demons as Survivors (or alternatively, to resist defeat from the living), and each one falls into a different class — with plenty of different passive and active abilities available to choose from. With each of the classes, there’s truly something for everyone, with unique skills changing the way that you can approach a match through a myriad of abilities and upgrades as you try to take home the win. Contents All classes in Evil Dead: The Game – Survivor classes, abilities & skills in Evil Dead: The Game – Kandarian Demon boss classes, abilities & skills in Evil Dead: The Game – Skill trees and Skill points in Evil Dead: The Game – All classes in Evil Dead: The Game In total, there are seven classes available to pick from in Evil Dead: The Game, which are broken down into the Survivor and Kandarian Demon categories. The game’s seven classes are: Leader (Survivor) – Warrior (Survivor) – Hunter (Survivor) – Support (Survivor) – Warlord (Demon) – Puppeteer (Demon) – Necromancer (Demon) – Each class has a variety of different characters that can be played — from Cheryl Williams through to Henry the Red — each of which has its own special active and passive abilities. Some of these characters will need to be unlocked by completing Missions first, however, so you’ll need to put some time into the game if you want to play as the likes of Amanda or Pablo Simon Bolivar. Evil Dead: The Game Survivor classes, skills & abilities Below, we’ve listed all of the available characters along with each of their unique abilities. Leader The Leader class characters, Annie Knowby, Lord Arthur, and Ash Williams (Ash vs Evil Dead) take familiar buff gameplay elements from RPG and MMO games like World of Warcraft, wherein they are able to boost their own stats (and those around them) through the use of their auras. Read More: Is Evil Dead: The Game crossplay? – On top of that, they’re also slightly more resistant to Fear than everyone else — meaning the likelihood of you getting possessed by an enemy Kandarian Demon is somewhat reduced if you play your cards right. Warrior If you’re looking for a tanky, pure damage dealer, you’ll need to look no further than characters of the mighty Warrior class (Ash Williams from Army of Darkness, Scotty, and Henry the Red). They have more health than the other Survivor classes overall and, given their tanky capabilities, deal more melee damage to those pesky Kandarians. Hunter Hunter class characters — Ash Williams (Evil Dead 2), Ed Getley, Kelly Maxwell, and Amanda Fisher — are best suited to taking down a demon from afar with a well-placed shot to the head and other extremities. Hunters inflict more ranged damage than the other Survivor classes, can carry more ammo, and are on the whole, much more efficient at managing their stamina levels. Support As the name suggests, Support class characters Ash Williams (The Evil Dead), Cheryl Williams, and Pablo Simon Bolivar lend more of a focus on keeping themselves and others alive. They’ll be able to start the match with a Shemp’s Cola and an amulet rather than needing to find one, and when you use one, your party members will also gain the positive effects. What’s more, they can carry more of both, too! Evil Dead: The Game Kandarian Demon boss classes, skills & abilities Those playing Demons in Evil Dead: The Game won’t have three teammates to rely on for support, and will instead be playing the game completely solo as they try to prevent banishment from the living — that is, except for your two trusty units. Read More: Is Evil Dead: The Game coming to Game Pass? – Each of the three Demon classes has its own unique Boss to play as, and each class also has unique units that can be controlled. Below, we’ve outlined each Boss’ skills and abilities to help you understand the focus of their playstyle. Necromancer If you’re a fan of Army of Darkness, the Necromancer class will be exactly the right pick for you. As Evil Ash — the character that (in a campy yet grotesque mental image that is burned into our minds) grows out of Ash’s very own shoulder — you’ll have the ability to summon a skeleton flautist that increases outgoing (and reduces incoming) damage to units that hear it. Puppeteer If you’re wanting to try your hand at some skilled possession, you’ll need to look no further than Eligos, the Puppeteer boss. Here, you’re able to control both the minds of the living and your fellow evil foes to up the ante and cause those Survivors to cower in fear. Warlord Finally, we have the Warlord. As powerful as it sounds, this boss’ main focus is to bestow buffs onto its units to increase their damage output, while simultaneously reducing any incoming attacks. As Henrietta, you’ll be the overseer of the battlefield as you use everything at your disposal to push back those pesky humans. Skill trees & skill points in Evil Dead: The Game While each and every character has its own unique abilities and skills, each class also has its own skill tree. As you play the game and level up, you’ll earn skill points that can be spent on things like decreasing cooldowns, reducing the amount of Infernal Energy needed for possessions, and increasing how much of an item you can carry. Read More: What is today’s Heardle? – Each character will need to progress through their particular class skill tree separately, though — so if you’re looking to power everyone up as much as possible, you’ll likely need to sink a considerable amount of time into gameplay. So, there you have it — that’s everything there is to know about each class and its skills in Evil Dead: The Game. For more guides and other gaming content, make sure to check out our main page.

Evil Dead 1.05 patch notes (May 26 update): Everything that’s changed Saber InteractiveSaber Interactive has released patch 1.05 for Evil Dead to fix issues and bugs plaguing their horror-based game. Here’s everything we know. Evil Dead: The Game has become rather popular with its community as the horror-based multiplayer game has given the Sam Raimi franchise fans their spin on Dead by Daylight. With abundant references to the iconic movies, Evil Dead: The Game has proved to be a true love story of the horrific. But with the fun and fan service, the game has its fair share of bugs. Saber Interactive has released its latest update, patch 1.05, to fix the horror-based multiplayer experience’s issues and bugs. Evil Dead: The Game patch 1.05 fixes major bugs and nerfs Cheryl Saber Interactive released the official list of patch notes on May 26, 2022, as the devs look to answer the cries of their fan base by fixing combat cheats that have almost made the game unplayable such as speed hacks and glitchy health regeneration. Patch 1.05 also fixes the long-standing issue of the game crashing after closing the pause menu, specifically on the “Find a way out of the pit” objective in Mission 5. One of the most significant changes from the latest update comes in Cheryl being nerfed as the character received a significant “balancing to her healing abilities.” Evil Dead: The Game update 1.05 full patch notes Here is everything included in Evil Dead: The Game’s patch 1.05: Stability / Quality of Life Implemented various fixes to combat cheats such as speed hacks, health regeneration, fake nicknames, and character model changing. A larger anti-cheat update is also forthcoming in another update soon. – Addressed an exploit where players could cancel animations to perform actions faster than intended – Improved server stability – Various bug fixes and improvements – Missions Fixed crashing after closing the pause menu on “Find a way out of the pit” objective in Mission 5 – Demon Fixed loss of input bug when a possessed unit dies – Survivors Updated balancing to Cheryl’s healing attributes – Updated balancing to Evil Dead 1 Ash’s healing attributes – Adjusted values to Amanda’s Weapon Master: Pistol Skill – Fixed an issue causing loss of input when Survivors are possessed by Demon, exit vehicles, or try to pick up full stacks of items – Fixed an issue that caused a Survivor to be immortal at death or when using a healing item in the storm – Fixed an issue where Survivors can deal 1M damage to Demon and deadites – Miscellaneous Fixed Playstation 4 Trophies not synchronizing –

Everything you missed during the PS5 reveal event: All games SonyPlayStation’s “The Future of Gaming” event was chock-full of surprises, including the reveal of what the PS5 looks like. In addition, there was a wide variety of new game reveals as well. The PlayStation 5’s library of games is looking more impressive by the minute, just like the actual console. Sony put on a fantastic showing during its livestream on Thursday, June 11, with games like Gran Turismo 7, Resident Evil: Village, and Horizon Forbidden West taking center stage. There was something for just about everyone, from fantastical open-world adventures to wacky kid-centric games. If you had to miss the stream for some reason, however, you might not be up on how weird Pragmata looks, or humming that absolutely adorable Bugsnax song. No worries, as we’ve got you covered with a recap of every game and announcement that took place during the event. Without further ado, let’s get right into it! Grand Theft Auto V and Grand Theft Auto Online Grand Theft Auto V is making its way to PlayStation 5 with an “expanded and enhanced” version of the open-world game. Right now, PlayStation 4 owners can also snag $1 million in GTA Cash every month until the PlayStation 5 version of GTA V hits store shelves in 2021. Read More: PlayStation 5 officially revealed – Additionally, GTA Online is going to be released as a standalone game separate from that of Grand Theft Auto V in the second half of 2021. For the first three months the standalone game is on the market, it will be available for free to all PlayStation 5 players. After that, it may no longer be free – it currently is to anyone who owns a copy of Grand Theft Auto V. Gran Turismo 7 The latest entry in Polyphony Digital’s photorealistic racing series looks the best it’s ever looked. The trailer shown off during the PS5 event showed off some particularly fantastic vehicles, but it was bereft of a release date. It’s been three years since Gran Turismo Sport debuted on the PlayStation 4, and seven years since Gran Turismo 6 was released on PlayStation 3 back in 2013. Players have been revving their engines at the starting line for some time, so it’s high time for a new game. Marvel’s Spider-Man: Miles Morales https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gHzuHo80U2M The universe of Marvel’s Spider-Man is growing ever larger with the addition of the standalone title Marvel’s Spider-Man: Miles Morales. Developed by Insomniac, this adventure stars, as you might have guessed, Miles Morales instead of Peter Parker as Spidey himself. The trailer shows off something of a quick sizzle reel of Morales swinging through the city and using a variety of electric powers, reflecting on his place as a hero with words imparted to him by Peter Parker himself. This hotly-anticipated follow-up to the original Spider-Man adventure is set to debut in holiday 2020. Ratchet & Clank: Rift Apart Ratchet and Clank are returning for another colorful platforming adventure. In Ratchet & Clank: Rift Apart, the pair spend time in a new area called Rift World, as it introduces travel through different dimensions. Ratchet has an interesting ability that allows him to latch onto different dimensions and travel into them. The 3D platformer is without a release window just yet, but it’s certainly good to see a new adventure in this action-packed, yet family-friendly universe instead of another remake. It’s been far too long since we spent time with these characters, and they should bring some much-needed platform representation to the PS5. Project Athia Square Enix may have impressed with Final Fantasy VII Remake earlier in 2020, but it’s right onto the next project with Project Athia, which is currently in development. It’s been designed from the ground up for PS5, and it looks absolutely breathtaking, at least from the short bit revealed in its trailer. The game appears to potentially be set in a modern world not unlike our own with fantasy elements, or perhaps something like an isekai anime series much like we’d see with series like Sword Art Online. We don’t know much about the game, and it won’t be debuting any time in the near future, but we’re keeping an eye on it. Stray Ever want to see the world through the eyes of a kitty cat? Stray is a neon-drenched adventure that lets you do just that as you take on the form of a cat exploring a colorful urban center. There wasn’t much by way of gameplay in the trailer, but it looks like an inventive spin on the typical adventure game, especially since you don’t often get the opportunity to play as an animal in typical adventure games. Stray is set to arrive in 2021. Returnal Housemarque, the developer that brought us Resogun for PlayStation 4, is back with the ambitious Returnal. This third-person shooter has an interesting roguelike twist that finds you “rebooting” and coming back to life every time you die, only to return to a different world when you do. There are still plenty of details we don’t know about with Returnal, but it appears to follow some sort of narrative where you’re trying to break this cycle of death and figure out how to seek peace – or something like that, anyway. Sackboy: A Big Adventure https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mUwI6e-em3o LittleBigPlanet is getting some representation on the PS5 with the introduction of Sackboy: A Big Adventure. This cute and colorful platform lets Sackboy break out and have some time in the spotlight. Admittedly, it doesn’t look too much different than what we’ve come to expect from LittleBigPlanet, but it’s the first time we’ve spent time with Sackboy in some time. Like most of the games showcased during the PlayStation 5 reveal, Sackboy: A Big Adventure doesn’t have a set release date just yet either, but it could likely be a launch title, given how accessible it is. Destruction AllStars Destruction AllStars looks like a fun, raucous twist on Rocket League, only there’s no ball. It’s a destruction derby positively rife with mayhem with a variety of colorful, flashy combatants as well as their vehicles. This could potentially be a fun option for multiplayer on PS5, and it’s a different take on the genre than what we typically see, so it’s definitely one to watch. Kena: Bridge of Spirits Among some of the triple-A titles on offer during the PlayStation 5 reveal, Sony peppered in some very cool indie games, such as Kena: Bridge of Spirits. Reminiscent in many ways of a Pixar movie or something of that ilk, the Ember Lab-developed game is a gorgeous, story-driven adventure. There will be fast-paced combat as well as plenty of exploration as you work to enhance a team of spirits called the Rot, have them learn new abilities, and ultimately use them to enhance your character. It definitely looks unique, but there’s no release date for the game as of yet. Goodbye Volcano High Goodbye Volcano High is a colorful, 2D animated “cinematic narrative” that explores anthropomorphic, queer characters who find themselves in complex relationships throughout high school. It’s a coming of age story that will no doubt leave cheeks stained with tears. Read More: 4 things we now know about Project Athia – It will include adventure game-like mechanics as well as cinematic mini-games and “difficult choices,” which lends an interesting Life is Strange-like vibe to what we’re expecting. It’s set for a 2021 release. Oddworld: Soulstorm Oddworld: Soulstorm is the latest adventure to follow the Oddworld series, and this time it’s continuing on after the game New ‘N’ Tasty. It will mark the second game in the series’ timeline and will star series favorite Abe. According to the official blurb, it “retains the core gameplay that fans have loved, while expanding with smart new features such as Scavenger’s Economy System and Crafting in a way that is relevant to Abe as a character.” There’s no word on an official release. GhostWire: Tokyo Bethesda and Tango Gameworks’ GhostWire: Tokyo may be one of the oddest games to come out of Sony’s reveal stream. The supernatural thriller follows a bizarre timeline in which 99 percent of the city of Tokyo has disappeared, or has otherwise been whisked away into nothingness. Read More: Everything we know about Godfall – “After a devastating occult event leads to the disappearance of 99 percent of the city’s population, only you stand between the loss of this great city and its salvation,” Tango Gameworks said of the title. “After the vanishing, a strange encounter causes your own supernatural abilities to take shape.” It’s slated for a 2021 arrival on PS5, and should let you punch all the ghosts you want. Jett: The Far Shore Get ready for a trip to outer space with Jett: The Far Shore. From the creators of Superbrothers: Sword & Sorcery EP, it resembles a harrowing journey into space with Soviet-esque origins. There’s space travel and an eventual landing on a bleak world. According to its official description, it’s “a new cinematic action-adventure game that invites you on an interstellar trip to carve out a future for a people haunted by oblivion.” That sounds like just the thing we need to balance out all the fun and happy games in the PS5 lineup, right? Godfall https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HRS9463W20U Gearbox Publishing’s Godfall is an intriguing mix of looting and hack-and-slash mechanics in tandem with role-playing goodness. From the trailer shown off during Sony’s PS5 reveal, we can ascertain there will be plenty of weapon combos and enemies to try them out on. The game will support multiplayer sessions with up to three players looting and cutting through their enemies at one time in a single session, though crossplay has yet to be confirmed. Godfall will be a limited time console exclusive and will release this holiday season. Solar Ash Solar Ash is the latest game from Heart Machine, the studio that brought us Hyper Light Drifter. Developer Alex Preston has stated that it’s about “reflection and progress in many ways.” “Our ambitions are bigger and the team has grown to match. The story still remains personal, but evolves to be something beyond just the weight of the struggle into something more hopeful,” Preston said of Solar Ash, and we should see it releasing sometime in the next year. Hitman III It’s time to reunite with Agent 47 for a third time with Hitman 3, as it’s slated to arrive in January 2021. You’re likely already familiar with the game series, but if not, you’re tasked with being exactly what the title implies: being a hitman. There will be six new locations to explore as well as the ability to carry over old locations as well as progression earned throughout Hitman 2, to make use of the World o Assassination trilogy lore. It’s poised to me the “ultimate palace to play any game from the trilogy.” Astro’s Playroom There’s nothing cuter than a happy little robot, and Astro’s Playroom lets you hang out with one the most adorable there is. You’ll get to spend some time with Astro, the same bot from VR hit Astro Bot: Rescue Mission as you play around with Astro and his robot friends. Oddly enough, this particular iteration of Astro didn’t mention anything about VR, but neither did Sony’s presentation. It looks like we’ll have to wait a bit longer for more information about both things. In the meantime, just look at how cute these little guys are. Little Devil Inside Out of all the games shown off during Sony’s PlayStation 5 livestream, Little Devil Inside had one of the most exciting art styles. It looks like a comfortable and warm return to form for old-school RPG fans and those who love to explore. There are definitely some hints of Zelda within, too. Unfortunately, there weren’t many details to go on based on what we saw during the presentation. This pleasant little adventure games definitely struck all the right chords with us, though. NBA 2K21 The PlayStation 5 has already proven this early on that it can definitely get sweat right. Our first look at NBA 2K21 gave us a look at Zion Williamson practicing in a gym as well as how absolutely drenched he was after the activity. And it looked absolutely fantastic. Read More: GTA Online confirmed as free-to-play on PS5 – Supposedly, this vision of the popular basketball game will have some “unrecognizable” load times, according 2K – meaning they’ll be pretty much undetectable. That’s a ball game we can’t wait to attend. Bugsnax What’s cuter than bugs that just happen to be part food? Nothing, or at least that’s how the Bugsnax trailer makes you feel. From Young Horses, the folks that brought us Octodad, this adorable game lets you hang out with these tiny creatures and, well, snack on them. Chowing down on the bug creatures will turn characters’ limbs and other body parts into the food they resemble. The trailer showed a nature guide eating a strawberry bug and curly fry bug and her limbs transforming into food. Yeah, we’re not sure what happened either, but it’s awesome. Demon’s Souls FromSoftware’s cult PlayStation 3 classic Demon’s Souls is finally getting a remaster, and this time it will “completely rebuilt from the ground up.” Bluepoint Games is taking point on the project, and it’s set to completely revitalize the game in a manner that makes it consistent with modern games. It will still be the same old Demon’s Souls you know and love, however, with plenty of opportunities to die, die again, and die again from there – unless you’re a pro, and in that case you can probably give us a few pointers. Deathloop Arkane Studios brought us games like Prey and Dishonored, and now we’ll see the inventive Deathloop as it hits PlayStation 5. You play the role of Colt, a man who just can’t die. He wakes up again and again on the same beach each day with a hangover – and will continue to do so until he kills the eight individuals responsible for keeping him in a loop. “ake the knowledge you gain from each day to try different paths and playstyles as you navigate the treacherous backstreets and hidden lairs of Blackreef,” Bethesda’s press release beckons. We can’t wait to try and solve the mystery when Deathloop launches this holiday season on PS5. Resident Evil 8: Village The numbered entries in Resident Evil continue as Resident Evil Village debuts, the eighth ordinal entry in the survival horror series. It’s also the newest original game (not a remake) since 2017. Set for release in 2021, it’s actually more like a sequel to Resident Evil 7 than anything else. As the game’s title implies, it looks to take place in a spooky old village as players take on the role of Resident Evil 7’s Ethan Winters. It appears he and wife Mia have begun a new life together…until Chris Redfield returns. Then, the game follows “a chain of events that sees a distraught Ethan seeking answers to Chris’s shocking actions… and ultimately finding him in a mysterious village.” That can’t be good. We can barely wait until 2021. Pragmata Out of all the games revealed during the PlayStation 5 stream, it seems that Pragmata may very well be the most obtuse. It also has a very Hideo Kojima-like quality to it. The trailer felt quite difficult to parse, but there’s likely plenty of meaning in it as it follows a man in a spacesuit interacting with what looks like the specter of a young girl. The two explore an abandoned city center, though it’s unclear if the two are in some sort of simulation or not as the end of the trailer finds them looking down on the earth and marveling on it. Looks like there will be quite a long time until we get our hands on this one, but we’ll be questioning it nevertheless. Horizon Forbidden West The open world Horizon Zero Dawn saga continues with Horizon Forbidden next, as heroine Aloy returns for a second helping. Guerrilla Games welcomes players to a beautiful yet dangerous world that builds on the original game in several ways. Aloy is tasked with getting to the bottom of a mystery that threatens her way of life tied to the “old world” and humanity’s old ways. It looks like a solid new adventure that will introduce new mechanical enemies, tools, and weapons to tell an even more nuanced story than even the original game. There’s currently no release date. We’ll keep you up to date on just about everything the PlayStation 5 has to offer as well as all the games headed to the system. Be sure to keep checking back at Dexerto for additional updates.

Everything we saw at the PlayStation State of Play January 2024 PlayStationAfter a wave of rumors, the PlayStation State of Play for January has officially released. The showcase was packed with multiple release dates coming within the next year. It’s been a few months since Sony hosted a State of Play, the publisher’s digital showcase showcasing what’s happening in the world of PlayStation. However, hot off the heels of the Xbox Developer Direct, Sony’s ready to bring back its digital showcase, with the end of January home to the first State of Play in 2024. Here is everything that was announced during the event and when these announcements will be made available to the public. Helldivers 2 – February 8 Stellar Blade – April 26 Sonic x Shadow Generations – Autumn 2024 Zeneless Zone Zero – In development Foamstars Season 1- February 6 Dave the Diver – April / DLC – May V Rising – 2024 Silent Hill: The Short Message – Now Available Silent Hill 2 – In development Judas – In development Metro Awakening VR – 2024 Legendary Tales VR – February 8 Dragon’s Dogma – March 22 Rise of Ronin – March 22 Until Dawn Remake – 2024 Death Standing 2: On the Beach – 2025 So there you have it, those are all of the announcements made during the PlayStation State of Play on January 31 along with their release dates. There will be a follow-up State of Play on February 6 which will address Final Fantasy 7 Rebirth.

Everything we learned from the new God of War Ragnarok trailer Sony Santa MonicaIt’s finally here: On September 9, 2021, Santa Monica Studio unveiled a first look at God of War Ragnarok, and it’s chock full of new details for fans to soak up as they wait in anticipation for the upcoming title’s release. After initially teasing the next installment of the God of War franchise in late 2020, the minds behind God of War 2018 have cooked up a tantalizing peek into the next game, bringing with it a host of new characters, abilities, and, of course, a new turn in the relationship between Kratos and his son, Boy — er, Atreus. (Caution: This article contains spoilers!) Grown-up Atreus Atreus is back, and it looks like he’s had a growth spurt since we left him in 2018. Judging by the trailer, it seems that he’s intent on learning more about himself as a god — much to his dad’s chagrin — as well as his mysterious moniker, Loki, one of two major plot twists players were hit with at the end of the last game. Fight with Freyja? One particular segment of the newest trailer shows Freyja transforming into a hawk before changing back to her old self and preparing to throw hands with Kratos. Considering that we kind of killed her son, Baldur, in the last game, it makes sense that she’s a little bloodthirsty… and a boss battle with the Valkyrie Queen herself is certainly something fans are looking forward to, if it ends up happening. Last of the giants As revealed by director Eric Williams — which we’ll get into in a minute — one of the new characters shown at the very end of the trailer is none other than Angrboda, the last of the living giants in the God of War timeline… and, coincidentally, Loki’s mate (and mother of Fenrir, Jormungandr, and Hel) in Norse mythology. This gives us a pretty good hint at something that might happen in the new game — but as Williams claimed in a post-broadcast interview, the crew does like to “throw a monkey wrench” into the mythology to fit their narrative. Tyr Tyr, the Norse God of War, was a hot topic of conversation in God of War 2018. The architect of Tyr’s Temple, it seems this guy is a bonafide genius with the bravery to match — and in Ragnarok, we finally get to meet the one-handed god. In the trailer, Kratos approaches Tyr, asking him if he’s willing to aide their cause, which seems to be stopping Ragnarok from happening. Before answering, Tyr stands up from where he’s sitting slouched on the floor… and absolutely dwarfs Kratos in size. It’s unclear if we’ll see a boss battle with this guy or not, but either way, we’re stoked to finally lay eyes on the fabled god of justice. More abilities for Atreus and Kratos Fans got a pretty good look into the combat of the upcoming game, and we spotted a few new abilities for both Kratos and Boy in the mix. Atreus had a few summons he could call as backup in 2018, and it looks like this mechanic is remaining in the new one, as well. Kratos now comes equipped with the Blades of Chaos and the Leviathan axe from the jump, and it looks like his Runic attacks are here to stay… with some potential new variations. More monsters A notable complaint surrounding God of War 2018 was the lack of variety in enemies. Santa Monica Studios seems to have heard this loud and clear, and made sure to show off some new monsters to kill come launch — although I hope we still get to see some of our old friends like Brenna Daudi. Mimir is back Mimir is back, and, as always, full of witty remarks. It seems that we’ll be taking him on our new journey, as well, as a few clips from the new trailer show him secured to Kratos’s belt, so we can count on more fun stories and banter between characters in this new installment. Ragnarok is happening God of War Ragnarok wouldn’t live up to its name if Ragnarok didn’t actually happen — or so says game director Eric Williams. While the game’s plot sees Kratos and Atreus doing everything in their power to stop the apocalyptic battle from taking place, it seems their efforts will be heavily contested… making for a “surprising and inevitable” ending. New director As we’ve mentioned a few times in this article, God of War Ragnarok is no longer being headed by the famed Cory Barlog of 2018. Instead, the mantle is being taken up by Eric Williams, who has been involved in every single God of War game in the series. The team claims that it’s good to get a fresh pair of chaps in the saddle for every release for a new perspective on the story… as well as giving Barlog some time to rest from the Herculean effort of directing the last game. Thor and Odin make an appearance As we saw at the very end of God of War 2018, Thor is definitely making an appearance in Ragnarok, and he’s being voiced by none other than Ryan Hurst. This version of Thor is going to differ hugely from the blonde-haired class clown we’ve seen in Marvel movies, though; instead, Williams claims that God of War’s Thor is a “big, burly, hedonistic man-child” who is much closer to the original Norse mythology. Joining Thor is his father, Odin, voiced by Richard Schiff — and while precious little information about the AllFather was given, it’s clear that he’s going to be a central figure in the new game. New and Old Worlds It looks like we’ll be seeing some familiar terrain as we traverse the nine realms. From the looks of it, players will travel back through the freezing wasteland of Helheim as Fimbulwinter sets upon us, as well as finding more potential spots on the Lake of Nine. However, some new spots were also teased, including what looks like a port town and an innkeeper with a pet octopus. Could we finally see humans in this game? These are some of the biggest takeaways from September 9th’s trailer, but there’s plenty more for fans to dissect if they want to watch for themselves. Grab your axes and mark your calendars, as Ragnarok is set to release sometime next year.

Zenless Zone Zero: Release date, trailers, gameplay & more HoYoverseZenless Zone Zero is a brand-new Action RPG game from the developers behind Genshin Impact. Here’s everything we know so far about HoYoverse’s upcoming title. While Genshin Impact continues to prove incredibly popular, HoYoverse shows no signs of slowing down with Honkai Star Rail, and their next release, Zenless Zone Zero. This action RPG features a colorful character roster, a compelling post-apocalyptic world, and interesting roguelike elements. From its release date to story and gameplay details, this is what we know about Zenless Zone Zero so far. Zenless Zone Zero release date & platforms Zenless Zone Zero will be released on July 4, 2024. The game will be available on PlayStation 4, PlayStation 5, PC, iOS, Android, and Cloud devices. Zenless Zone Zero trailers The Zenless Zone Zero reveal trailer aired on May 13, 2022. This news was announced via the game’s official teaser website, which originally had a countdown timer and a brief audio recording. During the trailer, players get a glimpse of New Eridu — the last shelter for civilization due to the “Hollow” calamity. It’s in these futuristic streets that a number of Zenless Zone Zero characters can be seen engaging mysterious monsters. A follow-up trailer revealed even more about the title, showing off additional combat details and showcasing various ARPG elements. Finally, after almost a year of silence, Zenless Zone Zero got some love at Gamescom with a new gameplay trailer. Another trailer was shared at The Game Awards on December 7, 2023, and it gave fans another look at some of the characters, as well as some action-packed combat. Zenless Zone Zero gameplay Zenless Zone Zero features a fluid, cinematic, and action-oriented combat system. Players can take control of different units to unleash electrifying skills and unlimited QTE combos, which give them an edge over their foes. However, unlike other HoYoverse titles, the game also has roguelike gameplay mechanisms. This means Zenless Zone Zero will have clear differences from Genshin Impact and the turn-based combat seen in Honkai Star Rail. Zenless Zone Zero story & setting Zenless Zone Zero takes place in a post-apocalyptic world where civilization has been destroyed by a supernatural disaster known as the “Hollows”. This strange phenomenon has led to dimensions where mysterious monsters dubbed the “Ethereal” roam. New Eridu is the last urban civilization that survived the apocalypse, but its survival is reliant on the technology and valuable resources that are extracted from the Hollows. In order to save humanity and uncover the mystery behind the supernatural disaster, players must take on the role of a “Proxy” — a special professional who guides people in their exploration of the Hollows. It’s here where players need to utilize their characters’ skills, claim valuable data, and progress through Zenless Zone Zero’s story. So, there you have it, everything we currently know about Zenless Zone Zero. For more on the game, read up on the voice actors, and system requirements.

Everything we know about WWE 2K23: Release date, roster, new match types, more 2K GamesWWE 2K23 is the latest annual release from 2K Games with new wrestlers, the inclusion of WarGames, and a John Cena-focused Showcase. So, let’s check out its release date and look at everything you need to know. After a return to form in WWE 2K22, the popular wrestling game series is now full steam ahead once again with annual game releases. Each new iteration still boasts a familiar approach with many of the same gameplay systems and modes, there’s always excitement around the key changes with each yearly release and 2023 is no different. With WWE 2K23 now on the horizon, we already know to expect new match types like the iconic WarGames, a new take on the Showcase mode with a string of John Cena’s biggest rivals, and of course, an updated roster featuring the latest and greatest superstars. So before the latest wrestling game rolls into town, be sure to brush up on everything new in WWE 2K23. Contents WWE 2K23 release date – WWE 2K23 editions & pre-order bonuses – WWE 2K23 platforms – WWE 2K23 gameplay details – WWE 2K23 trailers – WWE 2K23 roster & ratings – WWE 2K23: Release Date WWE 2K23 is all set to release on Friday, March 17, 2023. However, it’s worth noting if you opt for a premium version instead, you can access the game from Tuesday, March 14 with the Deluxe and Icon Editions, more on that below. WWE 2K23: Editions and pre-order bonuses When it comes to buying WWE 2K23, you have three options to pick from. The Standard, Deluxe, and Icon Editions all come jam-packed with their own mix of exclusive content. On top of that, pre-ordering the game also gives access to a number of bonus goodies too. Below is a full breakdown of what comes in every edition. WWE 2K23 Standard Edition Base game on March 17. – WWE 2K23 Deluxe Edition Early access to base game on March 14. – Deluxe Edition Content: Season Pass Access (5x DLC) – MyRISE Mega-Boost – SuperCharger – • 1x Ruby John Cena MyFACTION Evo Card – • 1x Emerald Bianca Belair MyFACTION Card – • 1x Gold Asuka MyFACTION Card – • 1x Gold Edge MyFACTION Card – • 3x Basic Premium Launch MyFACTION Packs – – WWE 2K23 Icon Edition Early access to base game on March 14. – Deluxe Edition Content: Season Pass Access (5x DLC) – MyRISE Mega-Boost – SuperCharger – • 1x Ruby John Cena MyFACTION Evo Card – • 1x Emerald Bianca Belair MyFACTION Card – • 1x Gold Asuka MyFACTION Card – • 1x Gold Edge MyFACTION Card – • 3x Basic Premium Launch MyFACTION Packs – – Ruthless Aggression Content: • Playable Prototype Cena – • 1x Prototype Cena MyFACTION Card – • Playable Leviathan Batista – • Playable Throwback Randy Orton – • Playable Throwback Brock Lesnar – • John Cena Legacy Championship Belt – • WrestleMania 22 Arena – – Icon Edition Content: • 1x Emerald Paul Heyman Manager MyFACTION Card – • 3x Deluxe Premium Launch MyFACTION Packs – – WWE 2K23 Pre-order Bonus By pre-ordering any edition of WWE 2K23, players gain access to the Bad Bunny bonus Pack which includes the following: Playable Bad Bunny Character – 1x Ruby Bad Bunny MyFACTION Card – WWE 2K23: Platforms WWE 2K23 is currently targeting a launch across PlayStation 5, PlayStation 4, Xbox Series X | S, Xbox One, and PC. While previous years saw the popular wrestling series branch out onto the Nintendo Switch as well, it doesn’t seem likely for this new iteration. WWE 2K23: New gameplay details As usual, many of the series’ staple game modes are all set to return in WWE 2K23 with MyRISE, Showcase, and Universe Mode all making a comeback this year. We also know for certain that MyGM, the popular General Manager mode inspired by the classics from Smackdown vs Raw, will be returning here once again with more options than before. New features, more match types, more GMs to pick from, and even four-player support all look to flesh out the mode. When it comes to the Showcase this time around, things are a little different. Rather than playing as cover athlete John Cena and recapturing many of his most iconic moments, players will instead be stepping into the shoes of his biggest rivals looking to take him down. From Edge and Randy Orton to RVD, the ‘You Can’t See Me Man’ has had many great feuds over the years, so expect to see most of them broken down in 2K23. We also know for certain that the brutal WarGames match type is making its way into a video game for the first time since its modern-era reincarnation in NXT. That means two rings with one giant cage wrapped around it all as wrestlers slowly join the fight one by one. WWE 2K23: Trailers Multiple WWE2K23 trailers have already been revealed including first looks at in-game action and even a deep dive into the WarGames mode. You can find them all below. WWE 2K23 Showcase trailer WWE 2K23 Gameplay trailer WWE 2K23 WarGames gameplay WWE 2K23: Roster & Superstar Ratings Now that a finalized list of wrestlers has been locked in for WWE 2K23, we know exactly what to expect when the game arrives. From Hall of Famers to relative newcomers just rising through the ranks, the expansive roster includes a wide range of characters. Below is a full look at everyone on the WWE 2K23 roster thus far, along with their rating. That covers everything we know about 2K’s newest wrestling title – WWE 2K23. For even more detailed game hubs, here are some other ones we’ve put together for you: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Tears of the Kingdom | The Day Before | Resident Evil 4 Remake | WWE 2K23 | Star Wars Jedi: Survivor | EA Sports PGA Tour

Everything we know about WWE 2K22: Release date, full roster, GM Mode 2K gamesAfter the tumultuous release of WWEK 2K20, the world’s biggest wrestling company returns with WWE 2K22. A two-year hiatus has hopefully solved many of the problems that plagued the previous entry in the series. Here’s what we know including its release date and the return of GM Mode. WWE 2K20’s release quickly turned into a nightmare for 2K. Numerous bugs, glitches, and issues spawned a myriad of YouTube compilations showcasing the game’s flaws. As a result, the backlash caused WWE 2K21 to be canceled, and 2K went back to the drawing board. Now, two years on, and WWE 2K22 looks to make amends with a fresh release and the return of a beloved game mode. From its concrete release date to a full look at the roster, here’s everything we know about WWE 2K22. Contents WWE 2K22 release date – WWE 2K22 platforms – WWE 2K22 GM Mode & gameplay – WWE 2K22 cover star – WWE 2K22 Showcase mode – WWE 2K22 Soundtrack – WWE 2K22 trailers – WWE 2K22 editions and pre-order bonuses – WWE 2K22 roster – WWE 2K22 release date An early access period begins on March 8 for those picking up the more expensive editions, but the game launches worldwide for everyone on March 11, 2022. This deviates from the traditional October release period of older titles, in light of 2K21’s cancellation and subsequent delays. A fresh release date could work wonders, however, as WWE fans will be able to get their hands on the new title ahead of this year’s Wrestlemania in April. WWE 2K22 platforms WWE 2K22 is expected to be a major release across the most familiar platforms including PS4, PS5, Xbox One, Xbox Series X, and PC. It’s unclear how the last-gen and current-gen versions will compare. However, if recent examples of other franchises are anything to go by, then it’s safe to assume we’ll see a difference in visual fidelity, load times, and possibly included features too. WWE 2K22 GM Mode & gameplay 2K released a trailer on November 19, 2021, detailing the biggest features in WWE 2K22, one of which is the standout return of GM Mode. A feature last seen in Smackdown vs Raw in 2008, the much-requested mode has finally…come home to the WWE franchise. The renamed “MyGM Mode” allows the internet’s greatest fantasy wrestling bookers to build their own roster and create legendary storylines and feuds. Whilst balancing a budget, players need to make the most of their talent, create enticing rivalries and matches, and make their brand as dominant as possible. A full deep-dive has been done into the mode, explaining what players can look forward to, including information and details explained by WWE’s Chief Brand Officer Stephanie McMahon. Players can pick one of five different GMs — including Stephanie McMahon, Adam Pearce, Sonya Deville, Shane McMahon, or create their own – The battle will take place across a 50-week period – You can compete against the AI, or even battle a friend in local co-op – There are many customization options for your GM – Players must balance a budget to spend on wrestlers – Free agents can be added if they are released or their contract expires – Each show you put together is rated based on numerous factors including Star Power, Match Quality, Show Quality, and Rivalries – Power Cards and Commissioner Goals provide gameplay boosts and guidance from management, like HHH, to put on higher quality shows – Simulate, Play, or Spectate your matches, run the show in real time, contribute to production like camera angles, to create a compelling product – Create the best brand possible so that you can put on the best Wrestlemania show – In addition to this, 2K have also advertised a ton of other general gameplay aspects: Redesigned Gameplay Engine – New controls – Stunning Graphics – Immersive Presentation – New 2K Showcase – MyFaction – MyRise – Universe Mode – Creation Suite – We were treated to the game’s first real deep-dive into the gameplay on February 2, 2022, where we got to see the game in action. WWE 2K22 Art Producer Christina Diem Pham claimed that the newest WWE game is “the best looking game yet.” The game’s lighting and VFGX have been completely overhauled and the game boasts over 55 playable arenas — even the WWE Superdome concept that was introduced in 2021. In terms of wrestling action itself, animations have also been completely redesigned to all look smoother to make the gameplay flow more naturally. There are a multitude of grapple attacks that will be determined by a wrestler’s height, weight, amongst things, and light and heavy attacks will factor in risk and reward elements. A new addition to the gameplay is new ‘Breaker’ moves where a player can press the corresponding prompt to counter and even reverse a move. Combatants can also dodge and block to help deal with a flurry of attacks from nimble wrestlers like Rey Mysterio for example. WWE 2K22 Cover Art This year’s cover star is none other than Lucha libre expert Rey Mysterio and both the standard edition and the deluxe edition have unique covers featuring the high-flying legend. The NWO 4-Life Edition has a unique cover, too. WWE 2K22 Showcase Mode With Rey Mysterio as cover star, he’ll also be the centerpiece of Showcase mode. This time around, players can step into the ring as Rey Mysterio, taking part in his legendary clashes with ‘HBK’ Shawn Michaels, The Undertaker, and the memorable encounter at Wrestlemania 21 against the late great Eddie Guerrero. WWE 2K22 Soundtrack Along with the roars of the crowd and critical commentary, the game’s out-of-ring time needs some tunes to keep the vibe of the game alive and well. Thanks to Machine Gun Kelly, WWE 2K22 has a hand-picked soundtrack to make the game feel even more alive and kicking. Here’s every officially licensed song you can expect to hear in WWE 2K22: Asking Alexandria – Final Episode (Let’s Change The Channel) – Bad Bunny – Booker T – Bring Me The Horizon – Typhoons – KennyHoopla & Travis Barker – hollywood sucks// – Machine Gun Kelly – concerts for aliens – Machine Gun Kelly – body bag (feat. Bert McCracken) – Motorhead – Iron Fist – Poppy – Say Cheese – Wu-Tang Clan – Protect Ya Neck – The Weekend – Heartless – Turnstile – I Don’t Wanna Be Blind – Typhoons – Royal Blood – 🎧 CRANK IT UP! The #WWE2K22 soundtrack, curated by Executive Soundtrack Producer @machinegunkelly Hits Different. Give it a listen now on @AppleMusic: https://t.co/Ie9M7vzeGM pic.twitter.com/t5GJdzYvKh — #WWE2K24 (@WWEgames) February 23, 2022 WWE 2K22 trailers So far, 2K has released two different trailers for the upcoming WWE game. One is the previously mentioned gameplay features “hit list” trailer, and the other was its anticipated reveal trailer. After the controversy and uproar caused by WWE 2K20, fans were eager to see what time and development had done for the new game. Here is WWE 2K22’s debut trailer. If you want to see the new gameplay features in action, check out the hit list trailer below. For a quick look at what to expect in the returning GM Mode, renamed ‘MyGM’, 2K released an informative trailer. WWE 2K22 editions and pre-order bonuses No different from previous years, WWE 2K22 is set to feature a number of unique goodies as part of pre-order incentives and premium edition upgrades. Although nothing has officially been confirmed just yet, early leaks appear to have revealed everything on the way. WWE 2K22 Deluxe Edition The Deluxe Edition of WWE 2K22 comes with a handful of extra content. First and foremost, players who purchase this edition gain three days of early access, beginning on March 8. This edition also includes the first Season Pass along with the Undertaker Immortal Pack, more on that below. WWE 2K22 Undertaker Immortal Pack The Undertaker Immortal Pack is reportedly this year’s pre-order bonus. This unique addition “includes three Undertaker personas: Phantom Mask Undertaker, Lord of Darkness Undertaker, and the Boneyard Match Undertaker.” On top of that, the bundle also comes with MyFaction EVO card for the Undertaker, along with an assortment of Perks and Bonuses. WWE 2K22 nWo 4-Life Edition If all of the above doesn’t take your fancy, then there is one more edition for you to consider — nWo 4-Life Edition. It will tempt potential buyers by offering “nWo versions” of its OG members: Kevin Nash, Hulk Hogan, Scott Hall, along with later members X-Pac and Eric Bischoff. Not only that, but the edition features two bonus wrestling arenas, the classic nWo Wolfpac Championship, plus other special content too. WWE 2K22 roster & ratings From Hall of Fame legends to current WWE champions, the 2K22 roster is stacked full of superstar talent. Unfortunately, a good chunk of this year’s roster includes released superstars like Keith Lee, Jeff Hardy, or even Shane McMahon to name a few. While some have since gone on to other companies such as AEW or Impact, they’re still playable in the latest WWE release. Below is a full look at the confirmed WWE 2K22 roster. For more gaming news and content hubs, check out the ones below: Hogwarts Legacy | Forspoken | Elden Ring | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | Hollow Knight Silksong | Sonic Frontiers | Evil Dead: The Game | Kirby and the Forgotten Land | God of War Ragnarok | Gotham Knights | Wolverine | Final Fantasy 16 | BioShock 4 | Cuphead: The Delicious Last Course

Everything we know about WrestleQuest: Trailer, gameplay, platforms, more Mega Cat StudiosMega Cat Studios’ love letter to wrestling history – WrestleQuest – is a unique blend of RTS and RPG elements. It’s sure to include a ton of Easter Eggs and references and here’s everything we know about this unique wrestling game. Whereas 2K and Yuke’s are busy trying to create the perfect wrestling simulation games in WWE 2K22 and All Elite Wrestling: The Game, WrestleQuest looks to be a healthy alternative. WrestleQuest looks to be an entertaining and heartwarming tale about a plucky, young upstart in the professional wrestling business who wants to emulate his heroes and rise to the top of the wrestling landscape. Its announcement trailer has shown that the game will be a light-hearted affair packed full of nods to legendary wrestlers, styles of wrestling, and much more. Contents Does WrestleQuest have a release date yet? – WrestleQuest trailer – WrestleQuest gameplay – WrestleQuest platforms – Does WrestleQuest have a release date yet? Unfortunately, there is no official release date for WrestleQuest. However, you can add it to your wishlist on Steam or sign up to their website for more updates. This will be updated whenever a release date gets announced so be sure to check back regularly. WrestleQuest trailer WrestleQuest was first made public on March 16, 2022, with an intriguing 1 minute 22 second-long trailer showing off the art style of the game, its game mechanics, story, and various other features. You can check it out below here. WrestleQuest gameplay Unlike other wrestling game competitors, WrestleQuest deviates from a full-on wrestling match-based presentation and doubles down on the RPG elements. It’s closer to the narrative-driven stylings of Sidebar Games’ Golf Story for instance. Players will be able to clothesline the opposition into submission as they start out as a classic jobber wrestling in front of meager crowds, before moving on to sold-out arenas. Wrestling icons such as Randy “Macho Man” Savage, Andre the Giant, and Jake “The Snake” Roberts” are at the forefront of the game’s advertising. We expect more superstars, past and present, to make an appearance in one way or another as fan-service aplenty will be expected. Special meters and HP bars will be all the rage during actual bouts as WrestleQuest uses proper, turn-based RTS gameplay to fuel its matches. You won’t be hitting cutters out of nowhere, but you will be able to acquire new moves and grow your wrestler’s repertoire of rough-housing options. WrestleQuest platforms Mega Cat Studios have confirmed that WrestleQuest is getting a wider release on major platforms including PS4, PS5, Xbox One, Xbox Series X|S, Switch, and Steam. Wrestling fans looking for a different fix should be happy then that cartoonish DDTs and Death Valley Drivers will be possible on all major formats. For more news and updates on other upcoming games, check out a ton of our other hubs: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Overwatch 2 | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | God of War: Ragnarok | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Forspoken | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Sonic Frontiers | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Breath of The Wild sequel | The Witcher 3 next-gen patch | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Haunted Chocolatier | Hogwarts Legacy | Perfect Dark

Everything we know about Ubisoft’s Star Wars game: Open-world, Snowdrop engine, more Electronic ArtsUbisoft’s ambitious Star Wars game is deep into development and while details are scarce, we’ve got an early rundown on everything there is to know about the upcoming open-world title. It’s safe to say there are quite a few Star Wars games in the works at this point in time. From EA’s Jedi: Survivor game on the horizon to Quantic Dream’s Eclipse project, a KOTOR remake, and plenty more in between, it’s an exciting time for fans around the world. Among the list of projects now underway is none other than an open-world title from Ubisoft, the publishing giant behind the likes of Assassin’s Creed and Far Cry. Although it’s early days yet, without even so much as a proper name for the upcoming release, we do still have a fair bit of early intel to go off. So if you’re eagerly awaiting any scrap of information you can get your hands on, here’s a full rundown on everything we know thus far about Ubisoft’s open-world Star Wars game. Contents Does Ubisoft’s Star Wars game have a release date? Currently, Ubisoft’s Star Wars game does not have a solid release date. However, we may have received a slight teaser through a developer tweet on January 2. Ubisoft creative director Julian Gerighty set the rumor mill ablaze with a simple post teasing the Star Wars title. “2023 is going to be huge for us,” he said in the tweet to accompany an image of the iconic Star Wars logo. Naturally, many interpreted this as though the open-world game is targeting a 2023 release, but it’s worth taking that idea with a grain of salt. Gerighty soon followed up on his post to clarify that 2023 will be “huge for our teams building our game,” perhaps trying to walk back his initial teaser. Nonetheless, we know for certain the Star Wars project has been in active development since January, 2021, so fans shouldn’t have to wait all too long to see the game in action. Which team is developing Ubisoft’s Star Wars game? Swedish developer Massive Entertainment is leading the charge on Ubisoft’s open-world Star Wars game. Best known for their work on the likes of The Division series and the most recent South Park title (The Fractured but Whole), the team now has two ambitious titles in development simultaneously. Not only is Massive working on the Star Wars game, but they’re also responsible for the upcoming Avatar: Frontiers of Pandora title too, both of which are set to incorporate vast open worlds, meaning they’re no small undertaking. Early open-world Star Wars gameplay details While we haven’t yet seen even so much as a screenshot from the game, we do have some early details as to how Ubisoft’s Star Wars game will play. First up, we know for certain the title will hone in on a “new set of characters who have their own motivations and stakes.” As for an exact setting or timeframe, that’s anyone’s guess for now. We could see anything from the newly established High Republic era to more familiar territory in the Skywalker era. The open-world game is also set to utilize Ubisoft’s innovative Snowdrop engine, an engine powering a number of upcoming titles from the publisher including Avatar: Frontiers of Pandora and the Splinter Cell remake. Although not yet confirmed, leaked intel from InsiderGaming claims we’ll control a customizable protagonist and guide them through the story with our own decisions. Moreover, the report claims players will be able to ‘seamlessly’ jump between systems in a vast universe, akin to how No Man’s Sky presents its boundless galaxy. Obviously, it’s still fairly early days yet so it’s worth taking this information with a grain of salt for now. But rest assured we’ll keep you up to speed with all the latest developments right here as new details emerge.

Squid Game video game: Everything we know NetflixIs a Squid Game video game already in development at Netflix? The wildly popular Korean drama could be making the jump in the near future with players able to experience similarly life-threatening challenges for themselves. Here’s a rundown of all there is to know about the potential adaptation. Within barely a few days of Squid Game arriving on Netflix, it quickly blossomed into one of the biggest shows not just of 2021, but of all time. It’s officially in the books as the biggest series launch on Netflix with more than 111 million unique views in just 17 days. Given this rapid surge in popularity, Netflix has been scrambling to figure out what comes next. Another season, books, board game spinoffs, it’s all being considered but one project appears more likely to happen sooner than later: a video game. It’s still early days yet, but here’s a full overview of everything we know about the Squid Game video game. Contents: Is Netflix working on a Squid Game video game? – Is there a release date for the Squid Game video game? – Squid Game video game developers – How will the Squid Game video game work? – Is Netflix working on a Squid Game video game? While nothing is finalized, Netflix is indeed exploring the potential of a video game adaptation for its immensely successful Squid Game series. With how rapidly the show exploded across social media, Netflix is not only focusing on ideas for a second season, but also on new projects in other mediums, Minyoung Kim, VP of Content for Netflix Asia Pacific, told Hollywood Reporter. “My team’s role is to really look at all of those opportunities together, to create that roadmap for the Squid Game IP. We are looking at multiple different areas — from games, consumer product and others — to really figure out what we can bring to our audiences to increase their affinity toward our content and give them more joy, while staying true to the world that our creator has built.” So a gaming spinoff hasn’t exactly been locked in, but Netflix is undoubtedly interested in the idea. “This is just the start,” Kim explained. Is there a release date for the Squid Game video game? Given the overnight sensation only just launched on Netflix in 2021, we’re likely still a long way out from the release of a Squid Game video game. Depending on the scope of the project, we could be looking at a fairly long development cycle. For a smaller mobile adaptation, for instance, 2023 could be a safe bet. But if Netflix has ambitions of creating a AAA battle royale title with its blockbuster IP, we could be looking at a 3-5 year development cycle, placing the release somewhere between 2024-2026. Squid Game video game developers As for who will develop a video game adaptation of the popular show, that remains a mystery for the time being. It’s still very early days in the Netflix gaming roadmap, so there’s really no telling who has been assigned the massive project if a studio has even been selected yet. Netflix houses just one dev team at the time of writing. Night School Studio, the devs behind Oxenfree and Afterparty, were brought on as the first Netflix gaming team on September 28. While it could be safe to predict Night School as the Squid Game developers, this appears to be just the first of many signings under the Netflix umbrella. Given they have no history in multiplayer titles, they might not be a perfect match. Therefore, it’s likely we’ll see some more developers joining the red and black brand in the coming months, some of which could be responsible for the Squid Game project. How will the Squid Game video game work? With Squid Game’s devious challenges stringing together to crown one ultimate winner, a video game adaptation will predictably follow a similar rhythm. If the game is to mirror the show’s concept, the battle royale genre is the closest comparison. Players will likely be dropped into a lobby ‘waiting room’ as various minigames load in. This could be dozens of players or even hundreds all at once if Netflix can overcome the technical hurdles in front of them. Players should then compete through a wave of these varying tasks, with failure resulting in a swift death much like the show. Fall Guys would be the closest example of a Squid Game video game today, though the Netflix project will have a far more adult theme. While waiting for a potential announcement for the new Squid Game video game, check out some other upcoming titles. The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | God of War: Ragnarok | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Forspoken | Pokemon Violet & Scarlet | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Sonic Frontiers | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Breath of The Wild sequel | The Witcher 3 next-gen patch | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Haunted Chocolatier | Hogwarts Legacy | The Expanse: A Telltale Series

Supermassive’s The Quarry: Release date, trailer, plot & everything we know 2K GamesThe Quarry is a new horror game from Supermassive, the team behind Until Dawn. Here’s everything you need to know about it, including release date, trailers, gameplay, and more. While Until Dawn wasn’t for everyone, it was an excellent showcase for cinematic storytelling in gaming. Now Supermassive are back with their next horror game, the spooky-looking The Quarry – which is going out of its way to channel Friday the 13th in its promotional material. This time, The Quarry will star another set of teens in danger, but rather than a cabin in the snow, the game will star a group of summer camp councillors getting picked off one by one. Who lives and who dies will be down to the player and the choices they make. From a release date to gameplay details, here’s all there is to know about The Quarry. Contents The Quarry release date The Quarry will release on June 10, 2022, for PlayStation 5, PlayStation 4, Xbox Series X|S, Xbox One, and PC. The Quarry Trailers Announcement Trailer Gameplay Like Until Dawn, The Quarry will be a cinematic gaming experience where players control various characters, guiding them through intense horror scenarios to progress through a branching story. The player will be able to make choices that can either save or seal the fate of the survivors, impacting the story for the rest. For example, do you investigate that knocking on the door or run and hide? Either action could have fatal consequences for the character you’re controlling or another. Expanding on the branched story selections you can make, The Quarry will also offer a passive watching experience based on pre-determined outcomes. Rather than making each individual decision to try and reach a specific end you’ll be able to select that ending from the start and watch the characters play it out. In a fresh take on the narrative gameplay method, the ‘Director’s Chair’ mode will allow you to pre-select character traits before sending your councilors off into the world to make their choices. We were lucky enough to get our hands on a preview if you’re interested in the hands-on experience of The Quarry. Story and setting The game’s tagline reads: “As the sun sets, the teenage counselors of Hackett’s Quarry throw a party to celebrate. No kids. No adults. No rules.” Which already doesn’t sound good for the nine characters who are likely to meet a gory end. Read More: Everything we know about BioShock 4 – Rather than wendigos, the monsters from Until Dawn, this time the teens will be “hunted by blood-drenched locals and something far more sinister.” We suspect they’ll be a few twists before the story is concluded. The cast includes David Arquette (Scream), Lin Shaye (A Nightmare on Elm Street), Ariel Winter (Modern Family), and Justice Smith (Jurassic World). So that’s everything we know so far about The Quarry. For more on the biggest upcoming releases, check out our pages on some of the most-anticipated games that have been announced: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Overwatch 2 | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | God of War: Ragnarok | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Forspoken | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman

Everything we know about the next Guild Wars 2 expansion ArenaNetArenaNet have announced that Guild Wars 2 will receive another expansion following the success of End of Dragons, so here’s everything we know about it so far. Following the release of Guild Wars 2’s highly anticipated expansion, End of Dragons, players have finally been able to dive into the Jade-tinted world of Cantha, a Wakanda-esque utopia hidden away from mainland Tyria. Defined by its forward-thinking outlook, ArenaNet have decided to channel the realm’s futuristic vision and are already exploring the potential avenues their iconic franchise will take in the future. As the sun sets on the emerald isle of Cantha, where will we see Guild Wars 2 go next? ArenaNet have provided us some answers. Contents Will there be another Guild Wars 2 expansion? In their March 22 blog post, ArenaNet confirmed that we will be getting a fourth Guild Wars 2 expansion. Read More: Is Guild Wars 2 on Steam? – Writing that “we’re happy to confirm that there will be a fourth expansion for Guild Wars 2,” it’s clear that End of Dragons’ success has inspired the devs to add yet another chapter to the game’s ongoing Dragon Cycle saga. Is there a release date for Guild Wars 2’s fourth expansion? While there’s confirmation that a new expansion is coming, the devs have warned that we’ll be waiting quite a while – especially given their extensive roadmap for End of Dragons’ upcoming content. “We mean it when we say we’re focused on the long-term,” they highlight. “This is a very early confirmation (the earliest we’ve ever done this, in fact), so don’t expect news anytime soon.” Concluding that “expansions take a very long time to develop. Plus, there are plenty of cool things to look forward to between now and then,” the next installment in the Guild Wars 2 story may be a while away, but at least we can ponder away to our heart’s content about its contents. So that’s everything we know about the next Guild Wars 2 expansion, the fourth chapter in the game’s classic tale. Planning to dive into this jade-tinted universe while you wait? Be sure to check out our Guild Wars 2 guides for some tips and tricks: Is Guild Wars 2 free to play? | How many people play Guild Wars 2? | Best Guild Wars 2 addons | Guild Wars 2 Antre of Adjournment guide | End of Dragons: Jade Bots guide | End of Dragons: Skiffs & fishing guide

Metroid Prime Trilogy remaster: Metroid Prime Remastered & everything we know from leaks and rumors NintendoA Metroid Prime Trilogy remaster has apparently been in the pipeline for some time now. The release of Metroid Prime Remastered may have changed things though, so here’s everything we know about the proposed Metroid Prime Trilogy remaster on Nintendo Switch. The original Metroid Prime Trilogy was a series of first-person shooters set in the Metroid universe that was released on the Nintendo GameCube and Wii – with a spin-off, Metroid Prime Hunters, also landing on the Nintendo DS. Die-hard fans have been craving a HD remaster of all three games since the days of the Wii U, but Nintendo has kept quiet on the matter for many years now. Rumors and speculation have intensified over time, and with Nintendo re-releasing plenty of GameCube, Wii, and WiiU classics on the Nintendo Switch, the possibility of a Metroid Prime Trilogy remaster is stronger than ever. For everything concerning a Metroid Prime Trilogy remaster, as well as any evidence that suggests the titles are being developed, we’ve put together a complete hub to help you out. Contents Does the Metroid Prime Trilogy remaster have a release date? – Metroid Prime Remastered for Nintendo Switch – Are Metroid Prime 2 or 3 getting a remaster? – Does the Metroid Prime Trilogy remaster have a release date? Nintendo is yet to formally announce a Metroid Prime Trilogy remaster, or even acknowledge the possibility of a complete package remastering of all three games. However, plans may have changed regarding the status of a Metroid Prime Trilogy remaster as the first game has received the remaster treatment. Metroid Prime Remastered for Nintendo Switch During the Nintendo Direct event on February 8, 2023, the company dropped a bombshell by not only announcing that Metroid Prime Remastered was coming, but it was also released on that very same day. Industry insider Emily Rogers, who has a reliable track record when it comes to Nintendo leaks, had revealed on Twitter a few months prior that she believed the first Metroid Prime remaster was already complete. Emily said, “I’m pretty confident Metroid Prime 1 wrapped up development over the summer,” Rogers said, “I hope we still see the entire trilogy on Switch. But Prime 1 is clearly finished.” https://twitter.com/EmilyRogersBlog/status/1458561450075639813?ref_src=twsrctfwtwcamptweetembedtwterm1458561450075639813twgrtwcons1_&ref_url=httpswww.nintendolife.comnews202111rumour-metroid-prime-switch-remaster-is-wrapped-up-according-to-industry-insider Are Metroid Prime 2 or 3 getting a remaster? Following on from the Metroid Prime Remastered title, Emily has also said that the first Metroid Prime remaster will be the first of three individual remakes moving forward – suggesting that there will be a Metroid Prime 2 and Metroid Prime 3 remaster. She previously tweeted: “Last I heard, Nintendo was busy working on Metroid Prime 1 to celebrate the game’s 20th anniversary in 2022. I’m not sure if we’re getting a ‘trilogy’ or just a re-release of the first game. I’m leaning toward the latter, but I hope we get the former.” https://twitter.com/EmilyRogersBlog/status/1440929893458616320?s=20&t=NfwMmkYMxntpqOdedTOhVQ Jeff Grubb, a renowned industry insider, also supported Roger’s view as he claimed that Nintendo “has been working on this for years” and that “everyone (including him) just assumed it was the Trilogy. Emily Rogers mentioned this, and I went back to look into it, and I think she’s right.” It remains to be seen how long Nintendo will give it before presumably announcing and releasing Metroid Prime 2 Remastered. If this is an eventuality, then logic would suggest that Metroid Prime 3 Remastered would then be a lock. Once all three games are released, only then might Nintendo opt to bundle all three together into one handy Metroid Prime Trilogy package. We’ll be sure to keep you updated as more Metroid Prime Trilogy remaster information becomes available. In the meantime, check out a bunch of other gaming hubs with tons of information for you to check out: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Tears of the Kingdom | The Day Before | Resident Evil 4 Remake | WWE 2K23 | Destiny 2: Lightfall | Star Wars Jedi: Survivor

Everything we know about The Lords of the Fallen: Platforms, trailer & more HexWorksThe announcement of a next-gen Lords of the Fallen game was one of Gamescom 2022’s highlights. Here’s the scoop on this much-anticipated sequel/reboot. Back in 2014, Lords of the Fallen debuted as a Souls-like game where players took on the role of Harkyn, battling against evil demonic entities. Fast forward to the present, and the latest addition to the series, once again named Lords of the Fallen, has hit the shelves. While the game is styled as a reboot, it chronologically continues the original storyline, taking place a millennium after the first game’s events. The series takes inspiration from FromSoftware’s games and plays a lot like Elden Ring, Dark Souls, and Demon’s Souls. Like the Souls series, the game features tactical combat, various class options, and nonlinear gameplay. Players also lose progress when they die, but have the chance to retrieve their lost experience. You can see what we thought of the opening hours in our detailed Lords of the Fallen preview. Contents Does Lords of the Fallen have a release date? – What platforms will Lords Of The Fallen be on? – Lords Of The Fallen trailers – Gameplay and plot – Does Lords of the Fallen have a release date? Yes, publisher CI Games confirmed a launch date for the new RPG title. Lords of the Fallen was released on Friday, October 13, 2023. Lords of the Fallen platforms, preorder, and edition details Lords of The Fallen is available now for PS5, Xbox Series X, and PC. Preorders have already gone live for each platform, with preorder bonuses that include the following digital extras: Exclusive bronze, silver, and gold armor tincts; three XP items, five HP items, and five MP items. (Tincts will allow players to recolor wearable items for customization purposes.) Lords of the Fallen will also launch with a Deluxe Edition, priced at $80 compared to the standard version’s $70 price tag. Those who purchase the Deluxe Edition can expect to receive the following goodies: Lords of the Fallen game, 3D model viewer, Dark Crusader starting class, 100-page digital artbook, and digital soundtrack Trailers Narrated by Stranger Things star Joseph Quinn, the reveal trailer was shown at Gamescom 2022. The cinematic trailer showed no new gameplay but it did confirm that we should all prepare to die – a lot. The trailer was also accompanied by Danzig’s popular rock ballad Mother: Showcasing a medieval-style knight as they battle through a horde of ghouls and a three-headed dragon, the trailer draws many comparisons to games like Elden Ring. CI Games promised an open world five times larger than the original 2014 game. The sequel also includes an uninterrupted online-co op mode. On May 18, the publisher unleashed a gameplay reveal trailer, which runs nearly four minutes in length. The more action-oriented footage doesn’t kick in until the 1:40 mark. More recently, on July 27, publisher CI Games unveiled an extensive 17-minute Extended Gameplay Preview on their YouTube channel. The massive showcase featured boss battles, story details, seamless co-op, and plenty of examples of Lords of the Fallen’s take on Soulslike combat. This was followed up by a story trailer that gives fans more of an idea about what to expect from the game’s plot, and it seems to be a hit with those anxiously awaiting more news on the title. Gameplay and plot Lords of the Fallen sequel/reboot looks much darker than the original, with a tone similar to Dark Souls 3. The original game also played a lot like a Dark Souls game. However, Lords of the Fallen will also offer a tighter more curated experience and will not feature an open world like Elden Ring did. The story will be set over 1000 years after the original game and will follow on from one of its three endings, but which one will be a mystery until the game is released. Harkyn and the events from the first game have fallen into legend and Adyr, a demon god is potentially awaking once again. Players will travel through the dark land of Mournstead on a holy quest to “restore radiance to the Six Beacons of the Sentinels,” while we’re unsure what this means we expect each Beacon will be protected by some huge and powerful bosses. The game will also allow travel between the two parallel worlds, the realm of the living Axiom, and Umbral, the realm of the dead. When you are slain, you will have a final chance to survive by defeating enemies in Umbral which changes not only the appearance of the world but the look and characteristics of bosses. For some more information about the biggest upcoming games, check out these below: Is Lords of the Fallen coming to Nintendo Switch | Is Lords of the Fallen a Soulslike game | How long to beat Lords of the Fallen | Lords of the Fallen System Requirements | Does Lords of the Fallen have multiplayer | Is Lords of the Fallen a sequel or reboot | Does Lords of the Fallen have an easy mode | Lords of the Fallen review | Does Lords of the Fallen feature NG+ | Is Lords of the Fallen coming to Xbox Game Pass | Lords of the Fallen: How to summon NPCs | Lords of the Fallen: All Stats Explained

The Callisto Protocol: Release date, trailers, platforms & everything we know KRAFTONThe Callisto Protocol is an upcoming survival horror game that looks to be a return to form for Glen Schofield, co-creator of the iconic Dead Space franchise. From the release date to gameplay details, here’s everything we know thus far. The very first project from Striking Distance Studios was revealed as The Callisto Protocol in 2020. Bringing his horror expertise to a new franchise, Schofield began leading a new team of developers in crafting a terrifying horror experience. While the upcoming release was previously tied into the popular Battle Royale mythos of PUBG, that’s no longer the case. Instead, the project stands alone as its own story in its own world, Schofield has since announced. Now that we’re just weeks out from release, here’s a full breakdown of everything there is to know about The Callisto Protocol. Contents The Callisto Protocol release date – What platforms is The Callisto Protocol on? – Trailers – Editions – Plot and setting – Gameplay details – Helix Station – The Callisto Protocol release date The Callisto Protocol is officially set to launch on Friday, December 2, 2022. After months of speculation, this news was revealed during the June State of Play event. This gets the launch of Schofield’s latest project just ahead of the Dead Space remake on January 27, 2023. What platforms is The Callisto Protocol on? The Callisto Protocol has been built from the ground up for the latest hardware. Therefore, it will be released for Xbox Series X | S, PlayStation 5, and PC. However, that’s not all. It was later confirmed that the project will still be released on last-gen systems too, including Xbox One and PlayStation 4. Exactly how these versions will be scaled back remains unclear. If you’re looking at jumping in on PC, you’ll need to keep in mind the following system requirements. Minimum system requirements to run The Callisto Protocol CPU: Intel® Core™ i5-8400 or AMD Ryzen™ 5 2600 – RAM: 8 GB – OS: Windows 10/11 – VIDEO CARD: NVIDIA® GeForce® GTX 1060 or AMD Radeon™ RX 580 – PIXEL SHADER: 5.1 – VERTEX SHADER: 5.1 – FREE DISK SPACE: 75 GB – DEDICATED VIDEO RAM: 3072 MB – Recommended system requirements to run The Callisto Protocol CPU: Intel® Core™ i7-8700 or AMD Ryzen™ 5 3600 – RAM: 16 GB – OS: Windows 10/11 – VIDEO CARD: NVIDIA® GeForce® GTX 1070 or AMD Radeon™ RX 5700 – PIXEL SHADER: 5.1 – VERTEX SHADER: 5.1 – FREE DISK SPACE: 75 GB – DEDICATED VIDEO RAM: 8192 MB – The Callisto Protocol trailers Our very first look at The Callisto Protocol came during the 2020 Game Awards show. Though this trailer provided just a glimpse into the terrifying journey ahead, without revealing any key gameplay snippets just yet. Gameplay then arrived in an epic two-minute trailer during Sony’s June 2022 State of Play broadcast. This provided our first true look at the game in action on new-gen hardware. You’ll find more gameplay lower down the page, too. Then came a story trailer in October of 2022, revealing new characters and motivations along with broader plot details ahead of the game’s imminent launch. A live-action trailer also premiered on November 25, showing lead actor Josh Duhamel running for his life on the “dead moon.” The Callisto Protocol Collector’s Editions Alongside the standard Day One Edition that comes with downloadable content in the form of the Retro Prisoner Character & Weapons Skins Pack, along with the Contraband Pack on PlayStation only, The Callisto Protocol also has a Collector’s Edition on offer. This physical version comes with everything from the Day One Edition, plus issue #0 of The Callisto Protocol comic series, a Steelbook case, some collectible pins, along with a statue of Jacob fighting off a mutated foe. Of note, however, this version is only available across Xbox and PlayStation. No PC Collector’s Edition has been announced. The Callisto Protocol plot and setting While much of The Callisto Protocol’s narrative is being kept under wraps, for obvious reasons, we do know a few key details already. For starters, the game takes place in 2320 on Callisto, Jupiter’s “dead moon,” Schofield has revealed. Players assume the role of protagonist Jacob Lee, an inmate at a prison on the moon. It’s a fight for survival as a mysterious outbreak spreads, morphing guards and fellow inmates alike into haunting ‘Biophage’ creatures. Gameplay details and footage You can check out some gory gameplay below, and yes, it appears dismemberment is a key mechanic: Akin to Dead Space, the game is played from a third-person perspective as players wield a number of both melee and ranged weapons to fend off terrifying Biophage foes. Also similar to Isaac in the classic EA series, The Callisto Protocol’s protagonist can use various abilities through a gravity weapon known as the GRP. From freezing enemies to launching them away, this tool seems to provide a range of options. As for the project’s ambitions, Schofield has gone on record saying he wants to create “the scariest game on next-gen platforms.” Expect plenty of jump scares, an intense atmosphere, and as always, some truly unsettling enemy designs. The developers have also confirmed that the game will run at 60fps on console while in performance mode and not 30. It’s believed that this update was provided after Gotham Knights was revealed to run at 30fps. The Callisto Protocol: Helix Station Ahead of the game’s official launch, an audiobook-style narrative is being drip-fed online. Helix Station tells the story of a skip tracer as she tracks down a criminal that’s fled from a nearby prison. Along the way, she naturally encounters many of the terrifying monsters players will soon come to grips with in the game. Gwendoline Christie of Game of Thrones and Star Wars fame plays the leading character while Michael Ironside joins in a supporting role. The latest episodes can be listened to right here.

Armored Core 6 Fires of Rubicon: Trailers, gameplay, release date & more FromSoftwareAfter a 10-year wait, Armored Core 6 is here. Hungry fans can finally sink their teeth into mouthwatering mechanized combat. If you want to know more about AC6, our succinct hub has key details on the game including trailers, platform availability, and more. After many trailers and gameplay showcases, FromSoftware has finally released Armored Core 6: Fires of Rubicon. This long-awaited title was first announced at The Game Awards 2022, where a number of exciting details were revealed about the new game. The Armored Core series is a third-person shooter that involves monolithic mechs blasting and bashing each other into oblivion. So, here’s everything you need to know about Armored Core 6. Contents Armored Core 6 release date – Armored Core 6 platforms – Armored Core 6 trailer – Armored Core 6 gameplay details – Armored Core 6 release date Armored Core 6 released on August 25, 2023. 2023 has been a stacked year when it comes to new game releases, but fans of the series looking to hop in for the first time in several years are more than willing to carve out some time for the epic title. Armored Core 6 platforms The game is now available on PS4, PS5, Xbox One, Xbox Series X|S, and PC. Armored Core 6 trailers Armored Core 6’s initial reveal trailer blew fans of the series away with its new visuals and the fact that a follow-up game to the dormant franchise was coming at all. A trailer released on April 27, 2023, gave people a bit more detail as to what moment-to-moment gameplay will look like, along with the release date. “”Augmented human C4-621 has awakened.”” ARMORED CORE VI FIRES OF RUBICON makes planetfall August 25, 2023. pic.twitter.com/7kBnxEq9zR — ARMORED CORE (@armoredcore) April 27, 2023 FromSoftware’s work on the Souls games and other titles in their recent library surely contributed to the evolution of the Armored Core games – as seen in the trailer below. Armored Core 6 got its first gameplay reveal trailer on June 14, 2023, thanks to the Japanese publication Famitsu. The trailer showed over four minutes of gameplay footage featuring both exploration and combat in action. Additionally, fans got a look at the in-game menus where players can customize their mechs. AC6 saw its gameplay further expanded in a trailer from June 29, 2023. Bandai Namco released four and a half minutes of footage from the game. Armored Core 6: Fires of Rubicon got a compelling story trailer on July 20, foreshadowing the setup for the game. The title has been shrouded in some mystery since its announcement, but the trailer gave a good sense of tone to the universe. Armored Core 6 gameplay details Armored Core 6 gameplay sees players move through massive environments with an emphasis on “rapid maneuverability” and “visceral vehicular combat.” If this doesn’t sound exciting enough, mecha pilots can also customize and assemble their very own AC. We’ve told you everything you need to know about FromSoft’s Armored Core 6. In the meantime, why not check out our pages for some other big releases: Marvel’s Spider-Man 2 | Assassin’s Creed Mirage | The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | | Wolverine | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman | DokeV | Dragon Age 4 | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Metal Gear Solid 3 Remake | Counter-Strike 2 | Mortal Kombat 1 | Starfield | EA Sports FC | Alan Wake 2

AEW Fight Forever: Release date, platforms, trailers, match types & everything we know All Elite Wrestling / Yuke’sThe first All Elite Wrestling (AEW) game, titled ‘Fight Forever,’ is nearing its long-awaited release. To get you up to speed, let’s go to ringside where you can hear about its features, licenses, platforms, and more. After what seems like an eternity, AEW Fight Forever is set to drop in 2023 and represent yet another key area in which the relatively new upstart hopes to compete against the WWE goliath. While the likes of AEW: All In London represents the company’s real-life action, Fight Forever is an arcade-like wrestling sim that will let you control the wrestling promotion’s hottest stars. There’s plenty for wrestling fans to be excited about in AEW Fight Forever. From match types, roster, and gameplay details, here’s everything we know about the game from WWE’s biggest rival. Contents The release date has officially been locked in for AEW Fight Forever as June 29, 2023. It’s worth noting, however, that the premium Elite Edition comes with 24 hours of early access, meaning the most eager players can get their hands on the game from June 28. AEW Fight Forever: Platforms AEW Fight Forever is set to launch across the following platforms: PlayStation 4, PlayStation 5, Xbox One, & Xbox Series X|S, Nintendo Switch, and PC. AEW has confirmed that crossplay is planned, with Omega stating “there will be cross-platform gameplay,” during an interview with Wrestling Observer Radio. Reports in early November 2022 suggested that the game would be coming to Xbox Game Pass on day one of release. However, this has since been shot down by AEW in a statement saying: “We don’t anticipate AEW: Fight Forever being part of any monthly gaming subscription services.” AEW Fight Forever: Trailers Check out the various trailers below: Teaser Trailer Darby Allin Reveal trailer Jungle Boy Reveal Kris Statlander Reveal Nyla Rose Reveal Moxley Spotlight MJF Spotlight Gamescom stream Gameplay trailer Release date trailer AEW Fight Forever: Developers Renowned Japanese studio Yuke’s is developing AEW Fight Forever. The company is best known for its work in the genre and has over 25 years of experience making wrestling games. Their prior work includes the WWE Smackdown titles on PlayStation, the popular Smackdown vs Raw series, and most of the more recent WWE 2K games. Gameplay Details Kenny Omega explained, that AEW is not going to try and “compete with the production values of WWE’s games.” Instead, AEW Fight Forever aims to revisit the classic wrestling game style. “We just want the wrestling to feel how it used to feel,” he said. As confirmed through the Gamescom stream, we know for certain each wrestler will have their own entrance. Better yet, players can manually trigger pyro and special effects during these animations too. While it’s not the full walk to the ring as we’d see on TV, the brief opening does appear to include some official AEW themes like Adam Cole’s and Kenny Omega’s. In moment-to-moment gameplay, players have access to all the familiar strikes, grappling moves, and counters you’d expect. Each wrestler also comes with their own set of finishers and signatures that require special inputs to execute. While not entirely confirmed, it appears we may be able to select our own powerful moves in the future and assign them to certain wrestlers. As you damage your opponent with various moves, a momentum bar will fill on screen. With a full bar, you’re then able to trigger one of the aforementioned signature moves. When it comes to game modes, not much is known at present. While a ‘Create a Wrestler’ mode has been discussed, and we know a range of minigames are set to be included, we’re yet to hear about game modes like General Manager, or a multiplayer ranking system. A Story/Career Mode is reportedly in the works, however, according to Fightful Select. This storyline supposedly includes input from multiple wrestlers and could already have some unique music locked in, made by none other than AEW’s Mikey Rukus. The likes of Orange Cassidy and John Silver reportedly did some voiceover work for the story mode, with MJF also writing a promo just for the game. On top of this, we also know Fight Forever will come with a number of quirky minigames completely different to the in-ring style. From Simon Says (Penta Says)-style modes to a baseball game, there’s plenty to look forward to here. We do know for certain the game will additionally come with an extensive online offering as well. While fans can expect the usual mix of game modes and playlists for online play, early intel spotted on the PlayStation Store also hinted at something much bigger. According to the game’s description on the PS Store, Fight Forever supports up to 30 players online at once. This means we could see an epic battle royal mode or perhaps even rival leagues with players assuming control of their favorites over the course of a season. We’ll have to wait and see how it plays out but thus far, no wrestling game has managed to involve 30 players online all at the same time. AEW Fight Forever: Match Types Official match types to be featured in the AEW console game haven’t yet been confirmed through official channels, although Kenny Omega has said: “We have a lot of match types,” without going into any specifics. Below are the confirmed match types we will see in AEW Fight Forever, along with various match types that leaked through the Amazon UK store listing: Singles match – Intergender singles match – Tag team – Triple Threat – Fatal Four Way – Casino Battle Royale – Falls Count Anywhere – Unsanctioned Lights Out – Exploding Barbed Wire Death Match – There’s currently no telling if we’ll see others joining the list closer to launch or even as DLC down the line. From a steel cage option to the iconic Mimosa Mayhem match type, there’s still plenty left on the table. AEW Fight Forever: Roster The AEW Fight Forever roster is already stacked full of top talent. Many of the promotion’s biggest stars like CM Punk, Jade Cargill, Jon Moxley, and plenty more, were all confirmed months out from launch. Obviously, we imagine many more will be revealed in time. AEW has a roster of over 100 wrestlers, with the possibility of even more when we consider their ownership of Ring of Honor (ROH). This could also see ROH wrestlers appearing in AEW Fight Forever, as several have already appeared on AEW’s TV shows. A handful of AEW roster members now hold ROH titles too, so this is likely to factor into content in the future, such as roster updates and DLC. However, the developers have said that the game will include 50 wrestlers when it launches. This means the game is only likely to include performers who appear on the main roster (AEW Dynamite and Rampage) at first, although more could be added in DLC expansions. In fact, we already know six wrestlers are indeed locked in to make their debut in Season 1. While many new wrestlers are being announced to join AEW Fight Forever, some stars will not be making an appearance at launch. For instance, FTR will not be present when the game goes live. While the issue was under a lot of speculation, FTR said in an interview that their removal from the game “made a lot of sense” and it seems the departure was under good terms. Though as we now know, the current AEW tag champs will be joining the game very soon as part of Season 1. While waiting for AEW Fight Forever to come out, why not take a look at some of the other upcoming titles?

New Tales From The Borderlands: Release date, pre-order editions, characters & more Gearbox SoftwareA new crazy and zany adventure from Gearbox Software is on the way as New Tales From The Borderlands has officially been announced. This is everything you need to know about the new addition to the Borderlands franchise. The Borderlands series has produced some of the most compelling and insane characters and missions we’ve seen in RPG games. Along with their cel-shaded graphics and tight gunplay, the games have a certain appeal that has kept fans coming back for more over the years. Tiny Tina’s Wonderlands was a successful spin-off and the movie is well underway. But now a brand new Borderlands game has been announced called New Tales From The Borderlands. Here’s everything we know. Contents New Tales From The Borderlands release date – New Tales From The Borderlands trailer – New Tales From The Borderlands story and characters – Deluxe Edition details – Preorder Bonus details – Who is developing New Tales From The Borderlands? – New Tales From The Borderlands release date New Tales From The Borderlands will be released on October 21, 2022, with the announcement of its release date coming from both Gamescom 2022 and the trailer. This was previously predicted thanks to an Amazon store listing that let slip the final release date. New Tales From The Borderlands trailer GamesCom 2022 announced the new title and with it brought a trailer filled with chaos, robots, and the brand new main characters. You can watch it below. New Tales From The Borderlands story and characters The game explores the weapon makers, Tediore as they begin to take over Promethea. You play as the ‘streetwise’ Octavio, the selfless Anu, and the lovable Fran who take it upon themselves to finally make a name for themselves. When they find out Tediore are actually here to find a rumored Vault, the main characters seize the opportunity to change the world, and their own lives. The interactive story revolves around a selfless scientist by the name of Anu, her brother Octavio, and the hilarious frogurt-slinging Fran. Deluxe Edition details The Deluxe Edition comes with a multitude of perks, and the full announcement of the game has given us some key details to those wanting to purchase it. Price: $49.99 USD / £44.99 / $79.95 AUD What’s included: Tales From The Borderlands Full Game Preorder Bonus details If you preorder New Tales From The Borderlands you’ll get the Adventure Capital Pack which features: Cosmetics for Anu, Octavio, and Fran – 10,000 in-game virtual currency – An in-game FL4K Vaultlander collectible – Who is developing New Tales From The Borderlands? Unlike the first Tales From The Borderlands game which was developed by Telltale Games, the sequel is instead being developed in-house by Gearbox Software themselves. Problems at Telltale Games led to the closure of the company and, even though it’s been restructured and is under new management now, Gearbox have decided they wanted to be hands-on with the newest iteration in the series. For more information on games coming out this year and beyond, we have tons more hubs for you to take a look at: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Overwatch 2 | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | God of War: Ragnarok | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Forspoken | Pokemon Violet & Scarlet | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Sonic Frontiers | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Breath of The Wild sequel | The Witcher 3 next-gen patch | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Haunted Chocolatier | Hogwarts Legacy | The Expanse: A Telltale Series

Everything we know about Super People: Platforms, early access, more Wonder Games’ Super People has been making a lot of noise for a game that’s still in the early stages of development. For all the details and updates on the upcoming battle royale title, we’ve got everything you need to know right here. Taking a page from the playbook of games like Apex Legends, Super People aims to bring a unique blend of special abilities to the world of battle royale. Each class brings something new to the table in this high-octane shooter, and where Apex aims for increased speed and hectic gunfights, Wonder Games has chosen to stick with a slower, more methodical pace for their swing at the genre. If that sounds like something you’re interested in, this is what you’ll need to know to jump into the world of Super People. Contents Is there a release date for Super People yet? – What platforms will Super People be on? – How to play Super People closed beta? – Is there a Super People release date yet? The superpowered BR doesn’t have a full release date just yet. Developer Wonder People just finished up the final stage of Super People’s Beta on August 30, 2022. It was a huge success, with the game’s player count breaking its all-time player record. With the beta for the game having just wrapped, the game is now moving into early access. Early access will go live on October 10. For those who have been enjoying the game, this does mean unfortunately you will have to wait it out for the next month and a half before you can dip back into Super People. 🎉Early Access open date is officially out!🎉 SUPER PEOPLE is coming back on Oct. 11. (KST) Soldiers, gear up for a more exciting experience in ORBISLAND. See you real soon 😉 pic.twitter.com/baqtKAl4Zg— SUPER PEOPLE 2 (@playsuperpeople) August 31, 2022 So far there’s been no official word on when the full game will be out. On the game’s official steam page, the release date is still currently listed as TBA. What platforms will Super People be on? As of now, the game is only available on PC via the Steam store. While other PC-exclusive shooters like Splitgate and PUBG have made the jump to console, Wonder Games haven’t so much as teased a console release yet. That doesn’t rule out the possibility of an eventual console debut, but it will likely be a while before we know anything concrete. How to play Super People early access The initial closed beta ran from December 7 – December 26 and offered players to get a feel for the game’s fresh take on the battle royale genre. For the upcoming early access period, players will need to follow these simple steps in order to gain access: Log in to your Steam account. – Use the search bar to find Super People in the app. – Locate the large, green Request Access button and press it. – Confirm your information and press enter. – That’s it! The game’s official website suggests that the odds to be selected for access during early access are better if the game is on your Wishlist, so tossing it in there is also a good idea. So, there we have it – that’s everything you need to know about Super People. For more upcoming releases, be sure to check out our hubs below: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Overwatch 2 | God of War: Ragnarok | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Forspoken | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Sonic Frontiers | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Breath of The Wild sequel

Shroud reveals his own FPS Spectre Divide: Release date, platforms, everything we know Mountaintop StudiosShroud has revealed a new tactical FPS he has been working on with Mountaintop Studios named Spectre Divide, so here is everything we know about the game. Shroud is a certified legend when it comes to FPS games, be it his time as a professional Counter-Strike player (and a brief stint as a VCT player) or his regular streams playing competitive shooters. Over the past few years, he has voiced an interest in developing FPS games and even announced plans to be part of other game dev projects. On August 1, 2024, Shroud revealed he had been working on a tactical FPS game in secret for the past two years, and now, he’s letting fans in on the fun. Following some early playtesting, we now have a number of details regarding Spectre Divide. Here’s everything we know including its release date, system requirements, and more. Does Spectre Divide have a release date? Spectre Divide has been given an official release date and is set to launch on September 3, 2024. The news came after a successful closed beta test that drew plenty of praise. Coupled with the announcement was a new gameplay trailer that showed off more of the impressive gunplay, unique tools, and artistic flare that gripped players in the beta. Is Spectre Divide free to play? Yes, Spectre Divide will be a free-to-play game, and the subsequent playtests and Closed Beta will be free for players to access. The game will be available on Steam and you can now put it on your wishlist or request early access. Spectre Divide Platforms Currently, Spectre Divide is only available to play on PC. The devs have not announced any plans to bring it to consoles and it looks like it will be exclusive to PC for the foreseeable future. Spectre Divide gameplay details Spectre Divide is a 3v3 tactical shooter. Playing in your classic defusal mode, attackers will need to control a bomb site and plant, and defenders will need to defend bomb sites or retake them to defuse the bomb. The catch is that all players will have a Duality. A Duality is another body you can control, meaning you can place your Duality on one site and be at the other site so you can rotate fast. It also means you effectively have two lives. Being a tactical shooter, the gunplay will be very important, as the devs describe it as having “true-to-crosshair” accuracy. There will be characters you can choose from, each having their own unique abilities and utilities. There is also a shop you can buy weapons from at the start of every round. Spectre Divide system requirements Below you can find the PC system requirements for Spectre Divide: Minimum OS: Windows 10 – Processor: Intel Core i5 or AMD Ryzen 5 – Memory: 8 GB RAM – Graphics: Nvidia 1080 Ti or AMD RX 6700 XT – Storage: 20 GB SSD – DirectX: Version 11 – Currently, the devs have only listed the game’s minimum specs, but if your PC’s specs are anything better than this you should be able to run the game smoothly. Who are Spectre Divide’s developers? Spectre Divide is developed by Mountaintop Studios. The studio was co-founded by Nate Mitchell and Matt Hansen, both of them previously working at Oculus with the former co-founding it. The team has various developers from Respawn, Riot Games, Blizzard, and more. Shroud, the veteran FPS pro player and streamer, was brought on as the game’s Lead Gameplay Advisor. Currently, the studio is independent and has recently raised $30 million in funding from various investors. The studio announced angel investors such as Shroud, Tarik, iiTzTimmy Sacriel, and various other capital investors.

Sniper Elite 5: Release date, trailers, platforms, gameplay, more RebellionGet ready for more gruesome, X-Ray kills as Sniper Elite 5 is the newest entry into Rebellion’s much-loved shooter franchise. Whether it’s Call of Duty, Halo, or Battlefield, everyone loves sniping. There’s something refreshing and cinematic about getting your eye locked down the greatly magnified scope of a Sniper Rifle and pulling off a nasty headshot. The Sniper Elite franchise took the skill and turned it into an art form. People keep coming back for the refined gameplay and Rebellion are showing no signs of stopping as Sniper Elite 5 is gunning for more success. Contents Sniper Elite 5 release date – Sniper Elite 5 trailers – Sniper Elite 5 gameplay – Sniper Elite 5 platforms – Does Sniper Elite 5 have a release date yet? After originally informing players at the end of its cinematic trailer that the game would arrive in 2022, Rebellion have now provided a more accurate May 26, 2022, release date. Rebellion were presumably just finalizing some final details on Sniper Elite before delivering the final date. Given how volatile the gaming industry is right now, there’s always the potential for it to be pushed back. Sniper Elite 5 trailers The game was announced on December 10, 2021, with a reveal trailer to get fans and newcomers excited. It wasn’t too long before hopeful patrons had more Sniper Elite 5 content. On January 25, 2022, Rebellion followed up the original debut trailer with a far more narrative-heavy video that also teased some potential new features. Along with the game’s official release date, Rebellion treated fans to some more footage of the game on March 17, 2022, showing off Operation Kraken. Operation Kraken must be destroyed. Pre-Order Sniper Elite 5 now for the bonus Target Führer campaign mission and P.1938 Suppressed Pistol. Coming to Game Pass, Xbox One, Series X|S, PC and PlayStation 4 & 5 on May 26th 2022 | https://t.co/H18W6dUdoW pic.twitter.com/ZGrfi5OfUi — Sniper Elite (@SniperElite) March 16, 2022 Sniper Elite 5 gameplay The footage released so far looks to be a lot more of what Sniper Elite fans love about the series – especially the cinematic journey of a bullet going through someone’s unwitting skull. There’s also more of finding the right spot to execute some gnarly sniper kills, the perfect recipe of stealth and close-combat action, and maybe a new invasion element? Sniper Elite 5’s cinematic trailer concluded with the tease of a new feature that could see online players hunt you down Dark Souls style. It seemed very Deathloop-like in its suggestion, and the variation could prove to be a winning formula for the game. Sniper Elite 5 platforms Both trailers make sure to point out that Sniper Elite 5 will be available for players on PS4, PS5, Xbox One, Xbox Series X, and PC. There is no word of the game coming to the Nintendo Switch platform as yet, but things can always change between now and release. For even more upcoming video game titles, we have more in-depth hubs: Hogwarts Legacy | Forspoken | Elden Ring | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | Hollow Knight Silksong | WWE 2K22 | Sonic Frontiers | Evil Dead: The Game | Kirby and the Forgotten Land | God of War Ragnarok | Gotham Knights | Wolverine | Final Fantasy 16 | BioShock 4

Everything we know about Sifu: Release date, trailers, platforms, gameplay SloclapSifu is a beat ‘em up game where players control a martial arts expert throughout his life. Here’s everything we know about Sifu, including its release date, platforms, and gameplay. Sifu developers, Sloclap, revealed the title during Sony’s 2021 State of Play event. The game puts us in the shoes of a martial arts expert who goes on a lifelong quest to hunt down a group of 5 assassins who murdered his family. The protagonist ages throughout the game, and perfects their fighting abilities. The unique drawn art style rather than opting for photorealism, which really helps it stand out from other upcoming games. However, its gameplay is reminiscent of a range of beat ‘em up titles. Contents Sifu release date Sifu was released on February 8, 2022 on PS5 and PS4. It was then released on Nintendo Switch on November 8, 2022. The game will also release on Xbox and Steam in March 2023. Sifu platforms Sifu is available on PlayStation, Nintendo Switch, and PC while also coming to Xbox in 2023. Sifu trailer Check out the rather impressive announcement trailer below: Gameplay details Sifu borrows elements from various older games in the beat ‘em up genre. We’ve seen DNA from The Bouncer, Tekken Force, Streets of Rage, and Ghost Runner in its gameplay. While the art style certainly looks unique, the gameplay resembles the classic third-person scrolling beat ‘em up, where waves of enemies meet their fates at your fists. The playable character starts out as a young kung-fu apprentice, but by the end of the game he’ll be a grizzled and experienced martial arts master. The game is set in a modern version of a Chinese city where the characters make use of magic to return from death, but at the cost of their health. This mechanic looks similar to Dark and Demon’s Souls, where each death makes life harder for the player. We look forward to learning more about Sifu in time and will update this as we learn more details. Until then, though, be sure to check out some of our other release hubs: God of War Ragnarok | Horizon: Forbidden West | Gotham Knights | Suicide Squad: Kill the Justice League | Lost Ark

PS VR2: Features, specs, PS5 VR design & everything we know SonyPlayStation VR 2 is coming, but what will virtual reality on PS5 be like, and how will it improve on the first iteration? Here’s everything we know about PS VR2. Despite originally saying they had “no plans” to update VR on the PS5, Sony announced PlayStation VR2 (or PS VR2) just a few short months later. Now, we’ve now got a full look at the hardware in all its glory. the specs behind it, and some of its shiny games too! Now that we know PlayStation VR2 is not just a virtual reality, here’s everything we know about Sony’s plans to bring an updated VR experience to PS5 in one place. Contents PS VR2 release date – PS VR2 price – What does PS VR2 look like? – Technology and Specifications – Games on PS VR2 – PS VR2 release date PS VR2 is set to release on February 22, 2023, for the PS5. The Sense controller charging station for the PS VR2 Sense controller will also launch the same day. Pre-orders opened on November 15, 2022. PlayStation VR2 launches February 22, 2023, with pre-orders starting November 15. Details at PlayStation Blog: https://t.co/K5h5YjRlxj pic.twitter.com/e97fVvHvZx — PlayStation (@PlayStation) November 2, 2022 PS VR2 price The PS VR2 costs $549.99 / €599.99 / £529.99 / ¥74,980, including tax. This price includes the PS VR2 headset, Left & Right PS VR2 Sense controllers, a USB cable for controller charging, stereo headphones, three pairs of earpieces, and printed materials. What does the PS VR2 look like? On February 22, 2022, the PlayStation Blog finally let potential consumers see the new piece of technology. The redesigned headset shares a lot of similarities to the original model, but now the front has a “circular orb shape representing the 360-degree view that players feel when they enter the virtual reality world.” According to Sony, the new headset has also been “inspired by the look of the PS5 family of products,” so gamers are to expect some familiar comfort in certain aspects. As well as the headset, the actual controllers themselves have probably had the biggest overhaul. The old-school PS3-era Move controller aesthetic has been ditched in favor of a sleek new look. It would be fair to say that they look a lot more like the Oculus controllers, but given how well-liked the Oculus setup is, this isn’t a bad choice. Here are some other features mentioned by Sony about the PS VR2 headset: Added roundness to the PS VR2 headset – An adjustable headset scope – A lens adjustment dial – Its “slimmer” with a slight “weight reduction” – The headset has a clever new vent for airflow – On the front and back bands of the PS VR2 headset, there are tons of PS button symbols like on the PS5 DualSense controller – PS VR2 technology and specifications VR gaming on PC has come on leaps and bounds since PlayStation VR was released on the PS4 in 2016, meaning that PS VR2 has had to make several big changes to keep up and stay competitive. Sony has already announced that the PS VR processor will not be returning for PlayStation VR2. Instead, the headset will connect to the PS5 console using USB-C. The company has also confirmed that the new headset will feature a fully 4K HDR display, thanks to OLED technology improving each eye lens, with a complete 110-degree field of view to boot. Connect with new worlds using #PSVR2’s revolutionary features. New video demonstrates: 👀 4K HDR display ↔️ 110-degree FOV 💆♂ Headset feedback 🖐️ Adaptive triggers & haptics ➕ plus more: https://t.co/TiSFxrnUKe pic.twitter.com/nBJAuuzNxM— PlayStation (@PlayStation) September 21, 2022 In an update, Sony confirmed that the headset will offer a transparent view mode that will allow users to see the space around them while wearing the headset, as well as a safety-focused grid feature to keep people from banging into walls and furniture. It’s similar to systems seen on headsets like the Meta Quest, but it’s a big improvement over PS VR1. The new controllers will borrow features from the DualSense controller, such as adaptive triggers, haptic feedback, and better tracking. This will not only improve the experience of PlayStation VR2 but help it feel like a worthwhile companion to the PS5. The new PlayStation VR2 controller will also be called the PlayStation VR Sense, keeping it in line with the DualSense controller on PS5. Games on PS VR2 One of the most exciting things about PS VR2 is the improvements over PS VR 1 that will allow more PlayStation users to experience the back catalog of games. However, Sony has since looked to quash this idea, suggesting the new-gen VR unit won’t support games from the previous hardware. “PlayStation VR games are not compatible with PlayStation VR2 because PlayStation VR2 is designed to be a truly next-generation virtual reality experience,” Senior Vice President of Platform Experience Hideaki Nishino said. So while that’s the case for launch, there’s always a chance individual developers may port their efforts to the new hardware. Thus, we could still see plenty of original PS VR 1 titles make the jump to PS VR2 down the line and that trend is already starting, as a number of iconic titles are already locked in for the new hardware. While not every game has a solid release date just yet, Sony confirmed at its 2023 CES conference that “more than 30 games” are locked in for PS VR2’s launch window. Below is a full look at every game we know of today: After The Fall – Altair Breaker – Alvo – Among Us VR – Beat Saber – Before Your Eyes – Cities VR – Enhanced Edition – Cosmonious High – Creed: Rise to Glory – Crossfire: Sierra Squad – Demeo – Dyschronia: Chronos Alternate – Fantavision 202X – Firewall Ultra – Firmament – Ghostbusters VR – Gran Turismo 7 – Hello Neighbor: Search & Rescue – Horizon Call of the Mountain – Job Simulator – Jurassic World: Aftermath Collection – Kayak VR: Mirage – Kizuna AI: Touch the Beat! – Low-Fi – Moss – Moss: Book II – NFL Pro Era – No Man’s Sky – Pavlov VR – Pistol Whip – Puzzling Places – Requisition VR – Resident Evil Village – Resident Evil 4 Remake – Rez Infinite – Samurai Slaughter House – Song in the Smoke – Star Wars: Tales from the Galaxy’s Edge – Stranger Things: The VR Experience – Synth Riders – Tentacular – Tetris Effect – The Dark Pictures: Switchback VR – The Last Clockwinder – The Light Brigade – The Tale of Ongoro – The Walking Dead: Saints & Sinners Chapter 2: Retribution – Thumper – Vacation Simulator – What the Bat – X8 – Zenith: The Last City – We also know for certain that original games are a big focus for various PlayStation Studios. “20+ major first-party and third-party titles” have been confirmed to be in development and while it’s unclear what will round out the list, it’s only a matter of time until we find out. For more on upcoming releases, be sure to check out our release hubs for the following titles. The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Forspoken | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Breath of The Wild sequel | Haunted Chocolatier | Hogwarts Legacy | The Expanse: A Telltale Series

Everything we know about Project Spartacus: Price, games, consoles included, exclusives Sony Interactive EntertainmentSony’s alternative to Xbox Game Pass for PS5 is here. Here’s everything we know about the revamped PlayStation Plus tier system AKA Project Spartacus. Xbox Game Pass has existed for a while now, but in recent years the service has exploded in popularity, changing the way many people experience games. The service offers value and convenience, meaning Sony was bound to take notice eventually and create their own Game Pass service for PS5. This is where Project Spartacus comes in. On March 29, 2022, formally announced the long-awaited rival, outlining its plans, pricing structure Contents What is Project Spartacus? – Has Spartacus replaced PS Now? – What will Spartacus include? – How much will Spartacus cost? – Are PlayStation day one exclusives included? – When will Spartacus be released? – What is Project Spartacus? Sony’s new PlayStation Plus and PlayStation Now combined service will provide players with a different range of options with regards to how they want to experience their PlayStation gaming. Read More: Tiny Tina’s Wonderlands review – Gamers will be able to select one of three different memberships that each come with a range of benefits in exchange for either a monthly or annual fee. Has Spartacus replaced PS Now? The PlayStation Plus name has been completely retained, but any ties to PS Now have all been fully integrated into the new and improved PS Plus model. Gamers will still be able to access a range of classic games from multiple PlayStation eras, but a subscription will still be required. What does Project Spartacus include? Along with their announcement blog, Sony detailed all three tiers that players will be able to subscribe to and they include all the existing features of a PS Plus membership. Depending on which one you choose, you will also have access to a range of PS1, PS3, PS4, PS5, and PSP games. How much will Spartacus cost? PlayStation Plus Essential The essential package is basically what any PlayStation Plus owner is getting now. Free monthly games, access to Sony’s online services, cloud saving, and discounts. If the extended tiers and additional content fees incurred don’t interest you, then essential is the model for you. Two monthly downloadable games – Exclusive discounts – Cloud storage for saved games – Online multiplayer access – PlayStation Plus Essential Prices United States: $9.99 monthly – $24.99 quarterly – $59.99 yearly – – Europe €8.99 monthly – €24.99 quarterly – €59.99 yearly – – United Kingdom £6.99 monthly – £19.99 quarterly – £49.99 yearly – – Japan ¥850 monthly – ¥2,150 quarterly – ¥5,143 yearly – – PlayStation Plus Extra As well as all the standard PlayStation Plus Essential features, fans can upgrade to the ‘Extra’ tier and add a huge library of PS4 and PS5 games to their subscription. Provides all the benefits from the Essential tier – Adds a catalog of up to 400 of the most enjoyable PS4 and PS5 games – including blockbuster hits from our PlayStation Studios catalog and third-party partners. Games in the Extra tier are downloadable for play – PlayStation Plus Extra prices United States $14.99 monthly – $39.99 quarterly – $99.99 yearly – – – Europe €13.99 monthly – €39.99 quarterly – €99.99 yearly – – – United Kingdom £10.99 monthly – £31.99 quarterly – £83.99 yearly – – – Japan ¥1,300 monthly – ¥3,600 quarterly – ¥8,600 yearly – – Provides all the benefits from Essential and Extra tiers – Adds up to 340 additional games, including PS3 games available via cloud streaming, a catalog of beloved classic games available in both streaming and download options from the original PlayStation, PS2, and PSP generations – Offers cloud streaming access for original PlayStation, PS2, PSP, and PS4 games offered in the Extra and Premium tiers in markets where PlayStation Now is currently available. Customers can stream games using PS4 and PS5 consoles, and PC – Time-limited game trials will also be offered in this tier, so customers can try select games before they buy. – United States $17.99 monthly – $49.99 quarterly – $119.99 yearly – – Europe €16.99 monthly – €49.99 quarterly – €119.99 yearly – – United Kingdom £13.49 monthly – £39.99 quarterly – £99.99 yearly – – Japan ¥1,550 monthly – ¥4,300 quarterly – ¥10,250 yearly – – Asia markets (excluding Japan): targeting May 23, 2022 – Japan: targeting June 1, 2022 – Americas: targeting June 13, 2022 – Europe: targeting June 22, 2022 – PlayStation Plus Premium The super-duper tier in the new PlayStation Plus service, Premium is the most expensive bundle and comes with everything. PlayStation Plus Premium Prices Are PlayStation day one exclusives included? After studying the official notes to be sure, it seems that Sony have opted not to include any day one launch exclusives in any of their subscription models. Xbox Game Pass has been a huge hit with gamers for offering this very service. But, for the time being, it doesn’t appear that PlayStation fans will have the same opportunities. But Sony has said that subscribers can expect: “At launch, we plan to include titles such as Death Stranding, God of War, Marvel’s Spider-Man, Marvel’s Spider-Man: Miles Morales, Mortal Kombat 11, and Returnal.” These are obviously the first steps on the road to a bigger and bolder PlayStation Plus service. When will Spartacus be released? Sony’s revamped PlayStation Plus offerings will release across a global rollout for different regions starting on May 23, 2022. Sony is targeting the Asian markets (excluding Japan) as the first batch of recipients while Japan, the Americas and Europe following shortly after. PlayStation Plus release rollout follows below: Coupled with the expansion of PlayStation’s cloud streaming access to Bulgaria, Croatia, Czech Republic, Greece, Hungary, Malta, Poland, Republic of Cyprus, Romania, Slovakia, and Slovenia, a lot of PS players are in for massive amounts of content. Once the new PlayStation Plus model lands, people will have tons of options to buy into Sony’s overhauled online subscription. With so many games to look forward to, be sure to check out our content for the following PS5 exclusives. God of War: Ragnarok | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Horizon Forbidden West | Forspoken | Gran Turismo 7 | KOTR Remake

Everything we know about Perfect Dark reboot: Trailer, Xbox Exclusivity & more The InitiativeThe Initiative’s upcoming Perfect Dark reboot is the long-awaited next entry into the franchise and aims to take everything that made the original a classic and bring the series into the modern day. Despite being 22 years old now, the Perfect Dark games have only actually seen four games released, with one of them just being a remaster of the 2000 classic. Fans have had to wait a long time for a new title that tells a new story about expert agent Joanna Dark. But expectations and excitement levels were raised dramatically in 2020 when a Perfect Dark reboot was announced. Not much is known about The Initiative’s new take on Perfect Dark, but here’s what we know so far. Contents Does the Perfect Dark reboot have a release date? – Perfect Dark reboot stuck in development hell? – Perfect Dark reboot trailer – Will the Perfect Dark reboot be an Xbox exclusive? – Does the Perfect Dark reboot have a release date? At present, there is no outlined release date or even a timeframe as to when we can expect to see Joanna again. After the announcement of Perfect Dark at The Game Awards 2020, we’ve heard next-to-nothing in terms of progress or any real form of update. Perfect Dark reboot stuck in development hell? The most recent news pertaining to the Perfect Dark reboot project isn’t positive as, according to VGC, it appears that at least half of Xbox’s ‘The Initiative’ studio have left the team to pursue other ventures. Under the circumstances, this is naturally less than ideal, and it doesn’t appear like many of these vacant roles are being actively filled either. The devs apparently told VGC that: ‘it’s confident in the team it has in place, and new talent joining and pointed to industry-wide staffing challenges during the pandemic.’ Accomplished developers Crystal Dynamics were brought in to assist with the game’s development, but it appears this may have caused any work to regress and overhaul lots of the game’s established content. The game now risks being stuck in a perpetual development hell cycle akin to another fan-favorite name — Beyond Good & Evil 2. Perfect Dark reboot trailer For the time being, the only media we have for the Perfect Dark reboot is its reveal trailer at The Game Awards 2020. Until we get anything more concrete, this might be all we have to go on for a while. If the trailer is anything to go by, then the original direction for the game appears to be a futuristic one. Here is the trailer in full for you to watch. Will the Perfect Dark reboot be an Xbox exclusive? As Perfect Dark is essentially being developed under the Microsoft banner, we fully expect the reboot to appear exclusively on Xbox Series X, Xbox Series S, and Microsoft Windows. Read More: 6 games you need to play after Elden Ring – In recent years, Microsoft have been trying to increase their studio acquisition and produce more appealing first-party titles to bring gamers to the green brand. It seems certain that the Perfect Dark reboot will follow suit. The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Overwatch 2 | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | God of War: Ragnarok | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Forspoken | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Sonic Frontiers | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Breath of The Wild sequel | The Witcher 3 next-gen patch | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Haunted Chocolatier | Hogwarts Legacy

Everything we know about Peridot: Release date, gameplay, platforms & how to pre-register NianticPeridot is a brand new AR mobile game from Niantic that lets you raise and breed one-of-a-kind pets, so here’s everything you need to know including a release date, gameplay features, and what devices it’s available on. Following on from previous augmented reality games Pokemon Go and Pikmin Bloom, Niantic are preparing to release a brand new original franchise called Peridot, which brings the joy of raising colorful pets called Peridots (or ‘Dots’) to your mobile phone. Every player’s Peridot will be unique in both appearance and personality. When fully raised, they can breed with other Peridots to merge their DNA and create an entirely new creature – diversifying the species and helping them avoid extinction. Below, you’ll find everything you need to know about Niantic’s new game Peridot, including screenshots, gameplay details, and the scheduled release date. Contents Is there a Peridot release date? – What platforms will it be on? – How to pre-register for Peridot – What do we know about gameplay? – How does breeding work? – Is there a release date for Peridot? Peridot will finally be released around the world on May 9, 2023. The game had a soft launch in select markets in 2022, but this is the first time that most people will be able to try the game for themselves. What platforms will Peridot be available on? Niantic has confirmed that their new game will be available to download on iPhone and Android devices at launch through the App Store and Google Play Store respectively. How to pre-register for Peridot & get free rewards You can pre-register for Peridot on the App Store or the Google Play Store right now. If you pre-register for the game and play it within the first two weeks of launch, you’ll get a free launch-exclusive party hat cosmetic for your Peridots. Gameplay details for Niantic’s new game Peridot The core gameplay of Peridot involves caring for your new pet and raising it from a baby to an adult, a little bit like an old-school Tamagotchi. To do this, you’ll need to train it, play with it, and make sure you meet its basic needs. A desire system will tell you what your Peridot wants, whether that’s going for a walk or visiting a nearby point of interest. It may even want to eat a specific type of food, which you can find by taking your Dot outside to forage the ground. Camera-based AR technology is essential to take part in the Peridot experience. For example, Peridots will recognize the surface they’re on and will react accordingly, like foraging kelp from water or prickly beets from the sand. The ultimate goal is to breed your adult Dot with others to hatch new babies of various archetypes and populate the world. These archetypes range from Unicorn to Rabbit to Clownfish, with rare ones taking many generations to achieve. How does breeding work in Peridot? When your Peridot reaches adulthood (which we’ve been told should take around a few days for the average player), you can visit a Habitat at a real-world point of interest to start the breeding process with other adult Dots. Breeding also requires Nests, which are items foraged around Habitats. They come in different rarities and can be used to alter various features, such as a ‘Cheetah Pattern Nest’ that will give your new baby Dot a cheetah pattern. Once a new Peridot is born, you’ll release your existing adult into the Habitat. You can always check on how it’s doing through the menu that allows you to see previous pets, but your focus will now be on your new baby Dot. That’s everything we know about Peridot so far! We’ll keep this page updated when new details are announced, so check back soon. While waiting for Peridot to release, why not take a look at some of these upcoming releases: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Tears of the Kingdom | The Day Before | Resident Evil 4 Remake | WWE 2K23 | Star Wars Jedi: Survivor

The Witcher 4: New trilogy, narrative details and everything else we know CD Projekt REDNearly six years after the release of the Witcher 3: The Wild Hunt, CD Projekt RED revealed that they are ready to return to the fantasy RPG series. In an announcement on their website, the Polish developer explained that they were working on a new Witcher game and were using a new engine. The next Witcher game is codenamed ‘Polaris’ and will be the beginning of a new trilogy of games. The dawn of this new trilogy heralds a lot of change including Geralt taking a backseat for a new player character. Details are still sparse on Polaris but here’s everything we currently know about the upcoming Witcher game. A new saga announced for The Witcher CD Projekt RED surprised fans on March 21 when they announced that a new Witcher game was in development. The team made the announcement on their social media and official website. “We’re happy to announce that the next installment in The Witcher series of video games is currently in development, kicking off a new saga for the franchise,” they wrote. It was also recently announced that Sebastian Kalemba – the animation director for Cyberpunk 2077 – has been appointed as the game director for The Witcher 4. Career news: I’m directing the new Witcher Saga. Since joining @CDPROJEKTRED I believe nothing is impossible and raising the bar, telling emotional stories & creating worlds is what we’re here for. I’m proud to be part of CDPR and work with such a talented and passionate team. — Sebastian Kalemba (@Skalemba) November 3, 2022 Kalemba tweeted out about the news and expressed how excited he is to be getting to help develop this new story. “I believe nothing is impossible and raising the bar, telling emotional stories & creating worlds is what we’re here for. I’m proud to be part of CDPR and work with such a talented and passionate team.” The developer also revealed that the new title would not be on their own REDengine and would instead be developed on Unreal Engine 5. According to a press release, the decision to change the game engine was part of a “multi-year” partnership the studio has made with Epic Games. “This is an exciting moment as we’re moving from REDengine to Unreal Engine 5, beginning a multi-year strategic partnership with Epic Games,” the blog post read. “It covers not only licensing but technical development of Unreal Engine 5, as well as potential future versions of Unreal Engine, where relevant. We’ll closely collaborate with Epic Games’ developers with the primary goal being to help tailor the engine for open-world experiences.” The Witcher 4? New saga story Following its surprise announcement, fans have been speculating what the game’s story could be about. Given that the studio put a heavy emphasis on it being a “new saga,” it seems unlikely that it will be The Witcher 4. With the Wild Hunt largely serving as the end of Geralt of Rivia’s trilogy, many theorized that the next game could star Ciri as the protagonist. This wouldn’t be too far-fetched as the developer has discussed continuing the series with her in the past. In a 2020 interview with VG247, lead CD Projekt RED writer Jakub Szamalek teased a future game starring the ashen-haired Witcher. “I regret we didn’t get to explore Ciri’s past a bit more, but maybe it’s something we’ll get to get back to in the future,” he said, before asking the interviewer if he would like a game led by Ciri. Another major hint is the promotional image itself which features the School of the Lynx medallion covered in snow instead of Geralt’s iconic Witcher medallion, which had become the logo for the original trilogy. The developers have now confirmed that the medallion is indeed a lynx, which implies the School of the Lynx will factor into the story somewhat. While exciting, this is also surprising, as the School of the Lynx technically originated in unofficial Witcher stories, rather than something either CD Projekt RED or author Andrzej Sapkowski came up with. In a September 2022 earnings call, the developers revealed that the next Witcher game will be the start of a “new Witcher saga”. This implies that there could be more than one new game, even a potential trilogy set in the Witcher universe. Do we know anything about the The Witcher 4 release date? Although CD Projekt RED is finally ready to announce that they are working on the next Witcher game, the studio clarified in a press release that there is currently no release date or window for the upcoming title. “At this point, no further details regarding the game — such as a development time frame or release date — are available. Beyond this initial confirmation of a new saga in The Witcher franchise, we have no further details at this time,” an excerpt from their blog post read. Good news has arisen in the time since that blog post, however. Ahead of Cyberpunk 2077’s Phantom Liberty expansion, the studio announced that 250-plus devs had entered production on the next Witcher title. In November 2023, two months after Phantom Liberty’s launch, CDPR noted in an earnings report that the Witcher 4 headcount had climbed to nearly 330 employees. This means approximately half of the Polish-based outfit is hard at work on producing the newest Witcher adventure. As all this early information trickled out, CDPR had still been tight-lipped on exactly where the next Witcher game sat in its development cycle. Things appear to be ramping up however as the company’s CFO Piotr Nielubowicz revealed on August 28, 2024, that project Polaris was about to get well and truly underway. “The Polaris team – working on the next game in The Witcher saga – made substantial progress, which will soon enable us to wrap up pre-production and take this project to the full production phase,” Nielubowicz announced in a YouTube video detailing the game’s future. This does mean we’re still quite a while away from a release date reveal or even a release window. We’ll be keeping an ear out for news on both and will update readers as soon as the information becomes available. What platforms will The Witcher 4 be on? With details being scarce, it’s impossible to know definitively what platforms the next Witcher trilogy will be on. Unless it ends up being a next-gen-only title, it’s more than likely to land on PlayStation 5, Xbox Series X, and PC at the very least. Speaking of platforms, the official Witcher Twitter account confirmed that the game would not be exclusive to the Epic Games Store despite its Unreal Engine 5 deal. “We are not planning on making the game exclusive to one storefront,” the social media post wrote in response to a fan. We are not planning on making the game exclusive to one storefront. — The Witcher (@witchergame) March 21, 2022 A new engine Perhaps the most interesting tidbit from the announcement was that the new Witcher is being made from the ground up on Unreal Engine 5. Not only that, the developer stressed that they will be working closely with Epic Games to make sure the engine is optimized for their open-world release. This will likely come as a relief to many fans of the developer as Cyberpunk 2077’s debut was filled with so many bugs that Sony pulled it from its PlayStation store for months. So, if nothing else, it appears that the studio is working hard to make sure the next Witcher game delivers right out of the gate. Given the high bar that 2015’s Wild Hunt set for the industry, this sounds like a return to form for the critically acclaimed franchise. More Witcher games: Project Canis Majoris & Sirius CD Projekt Red has revealed that two other Witcher games are in development and are separate from the Polaris Trilogy. The first of these is called Canis Majoris and will be ‘a full-fledged Witcher game, developed by an external studio headed by experienced developers who have worked on past Witcher games’. Canis Majoris is a full-fledged Witcher game, separate to the new Witcher saga starting with Polaris. It will be developed by an external studio headed by experienced developers who have worked on past Witcher games. pic.twitter.com/ucy7T073tm — CD PROJEKT RED (@CDPROJEKTRED) October 4, 2022 The next is codenamed Sirius and will also be set in The Witcher universe and created with support from CDPR. This Witcher entry will offer multiplayer gameplay on top of a single-player experience including a campaign with quests and a story. However, the announcement means that there is now a total of 5 Witcher games in development, including the Polaris trilogy and projects Canis Majoris and Sirius. So, that’s everything we know so far about the next Witcher game. As the game moves further through its development cycle, we’ll be sure to keep you posted on the pertinent information.

Silent Hill 2 remake: Platforms, trailers, release date & everything else we know KonamiA Silent Hill 2 remake is shuffling toward us through the darkness. Here’s everything we know about our next trip to gaming’s most haunted town. Back in 2001, Silent Hill 2 shaped the horror genre as we know it, introducing gamers to a new world of fear and trepidation. Now, one of the best horror games ever is being remade to terrify a new generation and hopefully revive the franchise. Announced during the Silent Hill Transmission event in 2022, the game is being developed by Bloober Team (The Medium, Blair Witch). Concept Artist Masahiro Ito and Composer Akira Yamaoka will also return from the original development team for the remake. Release date Silent Hill 2 remake will be releasing on October 8, 2024. The date was revealed in Sony’s State of Play presentation on May 30, 2024. However, owners of the Digital Deluxe Edition will be able to play from October 6. On X (Twitter), developer Blooper Team gave an update about the game in early 2024 saying: “As Bloober Team, we are proud to be a part of Konami‘s plans for the Silent Hill franchise. Alongside our partner, we are diligently working to ensure the Silent Hill 2 remake attains the highest quality.” “On behalf of our development team, we would like to clarify that the production is progressing smoothly and in accordance with our schedule. We understand that many players around the world are eagerly anticipating news about the game, and we appreciate your dedication.” With the game now having a projected release date within the year of 2024, it’s clear that development is moving right along. That said, there’s always a chance the game gets delayed if the team runs into any speedbumps. Platforms Silent Hill 2 will be a 12-month timed console exclusive on PS5, meaning it won’t be on Xbox at launch. However, it’s been confirmed that the game will also be released on PC. There’s been no word on an Xbox release once the exclusivity deal is over. Previous Silent Hill games came to Xbox, so it’s entirely possible – just don’t expect to see it any time soon. Trailers At Sony’s first State of Play event for 2024, the company offered up a much more extensive look at the new Silent Hill 2 remake. This full trailer can be viewed below and includes a slow look at gameplay, story and more. Additionally, a trailer revealed at the May 30 State of Play showed off some additional footage and confirmed the October 8 release date. Silent Hill 2 remake: Gameplay and setting The Silent Hill 2 remake will be very loyal to the original in terms of gameplay, continuing the atmospheric survival horror of that game. However, the remake will use the over-the-shoulder camera angle made popular by Resident Evil 4 to make sure the player is as immersed as possible. It will also make combat much easier, especially gunplay. The story involves an ordinary man called James returning to Silent Hill after many years. James lost his wife to an incurable disease and miraculously receives a letter from her asking him to meet her in their favorite spot in Silent Hill – a place the couple would visit together. Of course, Silent Hill has become a hellish nightmare world since that time, so James ventures back there to see if his wife, Mary, really is there – or if something more sinister is going on. The original Silent Hill 2 gained critical acclaim for its story, atmosphere, and gameplay, so here’s hoping the remake emulates that success. In the meantime, take a look at the other biggest upcoming games, such as GTA 6, Dragon Ball: Sparkling Zero, and Death Stranding 2: On the Beach.

Moonbreaker: Release date, gameplay, trailers and everything we know Unknown WorldsSubnautica developers Unknown Worlds’ latest IP Moonbreaker is a turn-based miniatures game, and famous author Brandon Sanderson helped bring it to life. Moonbreaker targets an untapped video game audience, combining real-time strategy with tabletop miniatures. Players can paint their very own tabletop figures and use them in an expansive turn-based combat universe. Unknown Worlds collaborated with famous author Brandon Sanderson on the project, who is best known for the Mistborn series, The Stormlight Archive, and The Wheel of Time. Sanderson lauded Unknown Worlds for their “incredible” work on Subnautica and “was absolutely thrilled to help craft the expansive sci-fi universe in which their next game is set.” Here’s everything we know about the upcoming collaboration. Contents Moonbreaker release date Moonbreaker arrived on Steam Early Access on September 29, meaning you can play right now. Moonbreaker platforms PC is the only confirmed platform for Moonbreaker’s release. Trailers Check out the launch trailer below: Unknown Worlds’ Game Director Charlie Cleveland, said his team was inspired by Guardians of the Galaxy and the famous sci-fi series Firefly. The development team created a bright and vibrant color scheme for Moonbreaker based on the two series. Moonbreaker tabletop gameplay Cleveland explained you assemble a roster of one captain and 10 crew members. Each miniature can be hand-painted using an in-game design system. The Game Director noted that “you can’t have a miniatures game without painting. It feels like you are painting an actual miniature.” Once a team is assembled, they are tested against other players online in combat akin to XCOM and Hearthstone. For some more information about the biggest upcoming games, check out these below: Hogwarts Legacy | Forspoken | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | Hollow Knight Silksong | God of War Ragnarok | Gotham Knights | Wolverine | Star Wars Jedi Survivor

Mafia: The Old Country – Setting, plot details, everything we know 2K GamesIt’s been eight years since the last mainline entry in the Mafia franchise but a new entry is now in development. Mafia: The Old Country is taking the franchise back to its roots, and it’s coming sooner than you might have guessed. Here’s everything you need to know. Over the course of 20 years and three staggered releases, the Mafia series has become one of the more beloved out of 2K Games. Following on from a trilogy re-release in 2020, we now know a full-fledged new release is in the works. The earliest reports suggested a prequel was in development, and we now know that to be true thanks to an official reveal at Gamescom 2024. With Mafia: The Old Country now in the spotlight, we’ve got you covered with the full rundown on every detail revealed thus far. Is there a release date for Mafia: The Old Country? No, there’s no concrete release date yet for the new Mafia game. We do know, however, the game is currently targeting a release at some stage in 2025. Exactly when in 2025 is anyone’s guess for now. We first heard rumblings of development on a new Mafia game all the way back in 2022, so it’s safe to say this one has been in the pipeline for quite some time already. Should plans hold together, we’ll be seeing Mafia: The Old Country in the next calendar year. Though it’s worth bearing in mind the Mafia series is published by 2K, whose parent company, Take-Two Interactive just so happens to have GTA 6 on the calendar for next year. Given they’re both open-world games with a similar penchant for crime, there’s every chance Mafia gets pushed out the way. Further details are set to be revealed in December, 2024. We’ll keep you posted here if we hear a concrete release date then. Mafia: The Old Country platforms The next Mafia game is set to release across Xbox Series X | S, PlayStation 5, and PC through Steam. There’s been no word on support for past-gen hardware, so it’s safe to assume the new entry in the series was built from the ground up with the latest specs in mind. Trailers The first teaser for Mafia: The Old Country premiered at Gamescom 2024’s Opening Night Live. The brief 62 second clip gave us little to go off beyond an early look at its setting and period, more on that below. New Mafia game setting & plot details From the very first reports of a new Mafia project, Kotaku claimed the developers at Hangar 13 were toiling away on a prequel. Allegedly codenamed ‘Nero,’ the fourth entry in the series was reportedly to take players back in time before the events of the very first game. Further comments from XboxEra host Nick Baker implied the prequel would be set between the late 19th century and early 20th century, with a supposed focus on Don Salieri, a boss from the original game. While not everything has held true, we do now know for certain Mafia: The Old Guard is technically a prequel, set prior to the events of any other Mafia game. Set in early 1900s Sicily, the game is set to focus on “the origins of organized crime.” “In Mafia: The Old Country, we’re going back to the roots of what fans love about the franchise, crafting a deep, linear narrative with that classic mob movie feeling, visiting a stunning new setting, and delivering it all in a tight, focused package perfect for fans of immersive experiences,” Hangar 13’s Nick Baynes said upon the game’s reveal. As for which characters may appear, whether any familiar faces may show up, it’s yet unclear, though there’s every chance the Salieri family comes back into the mix here. We’ll be sure to update you here any further details emerge as we get closer to the game’s launch.

Everything we know about Kerbal Space Program 2: Release delay, mod updates, multiplayer Private DivisionKerbal Space Program 2 is a highly-anticipated sequel being developed by Private Division and Star Theory. From its multiple release delays to the arrival of a new Multiplayer option, here’s everything we know about the upcoming sim. Kerbal Space Program absolutely swept the internet away back in the 2010s. Featuring a massive universe complete with intensely accurate physics, players couldn’t get enough of this one-of-a-kind game. Now, more than ten years after the first edition went into Alpha, KSP2 is well into development and we’re well into its gravity, hurling towards an eventual release date. Kerbal Space Program 2 release window As of now, the game is set to come out in Spring 2023, but there’s no telling if this one will stick either. KSP2 has seen quite a few delays. Initially projected to be a 2020 drop, the devs have called an audible on more than one occasion. Kerbal Space Program 2 Trailer One of the first announcements of the game came in the form of a Cinematic Announcement trailer. Kerbal Space Program 2 multiplayer According to the devs, the game will have a multiplayer feature, but details around how that works are still sparse. When speaking on what interconnected gameplay might look like in the rocket building sim, Creative Director Nate Simpson did say that “it is true to the spirit of the original Kerbal Space Program” so there are not likely to be any revolutionary features to speak of. Kerbal Space Program 2 mod support One feature that the devs have highlighted throughout the game’s development is its increased dependence on community engagement and feedback. Allowing players to add custom features to the original game was one reason it became such a smash hit across the world and that hasn’t gone unnoticed. As noted in the original developer trailer for KSP 2, many of the people who work on the game view it as “a game that merely gives you toys to play with and an infinite playground in which to play with them. ” That’s everything we know about Kerbal Space Program 2’s development at this time, but we will keep this page updated with the latest news as it becomes available. Check out more of our release hubs here: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Overwatch 2 | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | God of War: Ragnarok | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Forspoken | KOTR Remake | Wonder Woman | DokeV | FFXVI | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Sonic Frontiers | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Breath of The Wild 2 | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Haunted Chocolatier

Horizon Forbidden West: Release date, trailer, gameplay, PS5 details, more Guerrilla Games / PlayStationGuerilla Games’ open-world sequel to Horizon Zero Dawn is coming in 2022. Here’s everything we know about Horizon Forbidden West. When Horizon Zero Dawn dropped in 2017, it was seen as a risky new franchise for developer Guerrilla Games. The studio best known for the Killzone series took a complete left turn by releasing a huge open-world title populated by mechanical dinosaurs. But despite a slightly odd elevator pitch, it went on to be the year’s breakout success. The diverse world and methodical combat made it an instant classic among fans and critics alike. It’s not surprising, then, that the long-awaited sequel – Horizon Forbidden West – is one the most talked-about games on the upcoming calendar. We’ve collected everything we know about Horizon Forbidden West in one place. Contents Release Date – Platforms – Trailers – Gameplay footage – Gameplay changes – Setting – Story – Machines – How to long to beat the game? – Editions – Horizon Forbidden West release date Despite delays, on August 25th, 2021, Guerilla Games finally gave fans a release date – February 18th, 2022. The game officially went gold on January 27, 2022, and the game looks to be headed for its given release date. Is Horizon Forbidden West PlayStation exclusive? As with Horizon Zero Dawn, the sequel will be exclusive to the PS4 and PS5. In 2020 the first game was finally released to PC players with enhancements, so as with Zero Dawn, Forbidden West may eventually come to PC down the line. Players will be able to claim the next-gen iteration of the game for free, if they are able to play on PS5 in the future. Horizon Forbidden West trailers Exploring gorgeous underwater locations and sprawling forests, Aloy discusses the ‘Old Ones’ and how with their demise, new life and new dangers arose. Setting the tone for the sequel, she tasks herself with finding a way to stop these ‘new dangers’ from spreading further and destroying everyone. Horizon Forbidden West ‘New Threats’ trailer The newest trailer, ‘New Threats’ was revealed at The Game Awards, opening with Aloy telling us that “the land is dying, and the machines are out of control”. Here, we get even more glimpses into some of the new vistas and enemies that we will be interacting with throughout Guerilla’s upcoming sequel. Showcasing a variety of different looks for Aloy, she’s seen gliding off of cliffs, descending into the watery depths, and venturing across snowy plains as new machines roam the land. The footage shows a variety of mecha-creatures, across a range of terrains. Some are based on animals while others resemble dinosaurs and monsters, such as giant snakes. Many of the creatures resemble the robots we saw in the first Horizon game, although there are some new robo-beasts too. While the trailer refers to them as threats, it may be inaccurate to refer to all these creatures as enemies. For example, Aloy can be seen riding a mecha-raptor towards the end of the trailer, having bent it “to her will.” The trailer suggests that using the metal fauna as allies in-game may be a bigger part of Horizon Forbidden West than previous footage had us believe. Horizon Forbidden West: Tribes Trailer The next Horizon Forbidden West trailer focuses on the different tribes Aloy will meet in her next adventure: The Oseram tribe will be returning from Horizon Zero Dawn, as do the Carja who will play a much larger role in Forbidden West. The Utaru, a tribe will also be more fleshed out in Forbidden West than they were in Zero Dawn after only having a minor appearance in the first game. Aloy will be exploring the Utaru homeland of Plainsong in the sequel Finally, there’s the Tenakth, this is actually an alliance of multiple tribes who have united under one banner to fight the character Regalla. We’re looking forward to seeing how the drama unfolds in Forbidden West, and which tribes will end up on top once the credits roll. Horizon Forbidden West: Story Trailer The full story trailer of Forbidden West went live on January 20 and is certainly one to avoid if you’re trying to dodge spoilers. This three-minute clip offers a unique look at Aloy’s next adventure. From new enemy factions and terrifying machines, there’s plenty to unravel. Horizon Forbidden West: Meet the Cast Trailer Following close behind the Story Trailer was a longer video revealing the full cast for Horizon Forbidden West. Alongside a number of familiar faces, plenty of new additions to the cast were showcased throughout the trailer. Horizon Forbidden West PS4 Pro Gameplay trailer With Forbidden West’s release date just weeks away, the first gameplay of the PS4 Pro versions has been uploaded to the PlayStation below. Here, we got our first look at the new game running older hardware. Despite the difference in power, the environments still look stunning thanks to the vibrant colors and impressive design. If all the looks at the game above weren’t enough, on February 3, 2022, PlayStation unleashed yet another trailer/look at Horizon Forbidden West, this time an in-depth look at the “Challenges of the Forbidden West.” Horizon Forbidden West Challenges of the West Horizon Forbidden West gameplay footage revealed Guerilla Games previously lifted the curtain on the project and revealed extensive gameplay during the May 27, 2021, State of Play. In total, 18 minutes of new footage was shown off at the special Horizon Showcase. Read More: How to play Ghost Recon Frontline beta on PC – Players got their first peek at the game’s gorgeous PlayStation 5 graphics, as well as a slew of new features being introduced into the franchise. The development team even gave viewers a few insights into what to expect from the story. An incomplete version of the game leaked on January 10, 2021. The leak showcased images within the PS4 version of the game, with lush environments to explore. Horizon Forbidden West gameplay changes Horizon Zero Dawn’s stellar gameplay went a long way to making it the modern classic we know today, and the sequel is going for bigger and better. In addition to the standard bow, arrow, and Ropecasters, Aloy will have a few new toys in her arsenal. The Shieldwing is a type of glider that lets her quickly fly out of trouble, or swoop in to get the drop on unaware enemies. There’s also the Pullcaster, which works like a grapple hook to speed up claiming and give her greater mobility. In fact, many of the gameplay changes seem to focus on making the world feel more open and interactive. Aloy can now freely climb on any surface rather than having to specific points, making combat more varied and tactical. She also has a Diving Mask, which lets her dive underwater for long stretches. All of this is designed to give the player more options when traveling or approaching a fight. In addition to all of the new gadgets, the old faithful has also been revamped. Aloy’s trusty spear is now far more devasting thanks to improved melee combat, in the hopes of making human encounters more interesting than in the first game. It can be charged up with special abilities like a shocking device to knock out enemies. Horizon Forbidden West director Mathijs de Jonge expressed to Hardware Zone, how the game will utilize “3D audio, quick loading, and DualSense support”, with the main difference pertaining to graphical tweaks. In an upload to the Playstation blog, devs confirmed that they had looked at improving the stealth gameplay – a key part of Horizon’s DNA. All enemies will now offer up lines of context-dependent dialogue when they notice a fallen comrade or lose sight of Aloy. These voice lines can help players plot their next move. On top of all this, here are all the other snippets of gameplay information we know: Raider enemies can now override machines to use them as both weapons and mounts. – Aloy now has a focus scanner that can highlight spots for free-climbing anywhere in the open world. – The diving mask allows you to swim underwater for as long as you want. You can hide from enemies, as well as find currents to boost travel at high speeds. – A larger variety of machines can now be mounted. – There will be a larger emphasis on weapons being shot off the robotic animals which you can pick up and now use. – A new slingshot can shoot adhesive grenades to stick to enemies. – Players will now be able to use a workbench to upgrade weapons. – Outfits now have skills attached to them, letting players boost their abilities in unique ways. – There’s a “new and improved” skill tree in Forbidden West. – The Arena A huge addition to Horizon Forbidden West is the welcome of the new ‘Arena’ feature. The Arena is a huge open theatre where many of the natives gather to watch some incredible fights. It seems like Aloy will now be able to challenge greater and more powerful foes during the course of many fights. We’re unsure of what the rewards will be, but there will inevitably be rewards aplenty, and expect some testing, to say the least fights, towards the end of the list ofo fights, and post-game. Horizon Forbidden West setting Horizon Zero Dawn took place in a dystopian version of Colorado, Utah, and Arizona, in the 31st century. Although they had been reclaimed by nature and were virtually unrecognizable, Forbidden West sends Aloy towards the Pacific Coasts, with more familiar US states set to show up. Read More: Best Souls games – ranked – We don’t know every location that Aloy will visit in her adventure, but California and Nevada are where the bulk of the game will take place. San Fransisco has featured heavily in the game’s marketing, with the derelict Golden Gate bridge appearing on the cover. The map appears to be even more diverse than the original game’s. In addition to the desert valleys and snowy mountains, players will have to navigate Aloy through lush forests and tropical beaches. What is Horizon Forbidden West’s story? During the May 27 State of Play, Guerilla gave players a peek at what to expect from the story. The game will open up with Aloy and her partner Erend exploring the ruins of San Fransisco in search of an artifact. As Guerrilla later revealed in a PlayStation blog post, Forbidden West picks up six months after the events of Zero Dawn. A red plague-like moss called “the blight” is rapidly spreading across the world, and Aloy has to race against time to try to find a cure for it by sifting through clues left behind from past civilizations. Throughout her journey, Aloy is set to encounter old familiar tribes along with new clans and unique machines to boot. Along the way she’ll have help from both “old and new companions,” Guerrilla confirmed. New Machines in Horizon Forbidden West When Zero Dawn first launched in 2017, it did so with 26 unique machine types. While a few variants arrived The Frozen Wilds DLC, fans have been anticipating what new enemies might be on the way in the upcoming sequel. Early trailers have teased everything from giant snake-type machines to deadly Shellsnappers. With new aerial and underwater combat mechanics, there could be more variation to enemy design than ever before. In fact, we already have a good idea of just how many new foes to expect. Forbidden West’s official strategy guide spilled the beans weeks ahead of its release. A brief description of the 656-page book revealed there are “40+ intricately designed machines” in the game. That’s a significant increase from the original game and its DLC combined. How many hours to beat Horizon Forbidden West? In an interview with Guerilla Games’ Game Director Mathijs de Jonge, GamePro posed a question regarding the game’s length. When asked long the story was for Horizon Forbidden West, Jonge replied: “about as long as its predecessor.” On average, it took gamers, on average, 20-25 hours to beat Horizon Zero Dawn’s story. This obviously doesn’t account for side quests, collectibles, or any other extracurricular activities that extend the game’s longevity. ‘Howlongtobeat’ reckon that a full completionist run of Horizon Zero Dawn was 60-65 hours. Given that Forbidden West’s map is bigger and there will likely be more stuff to do, we’d estimate it will take players anywhere in the region of 60-100 hours to fully complete the game. Horizon Forbidden West: Pre-orders & Editions Sony has announced that there will be four different editions of Horizon Forbidden West. Fans will be able to choose from the following: Digital Deluxe Edition PS4 and PS5 versions, exclusive cosmetics and weapons, digital artbook and soundtrack, more – – Special Edition SteelBook physical copy of the PS4 or PS5 version, exclusive cosmetics and weapons, digital artbook and soundtrack, more – – Collector’s Edition A custom sculpted Tremortusk and Aloy statue, PS4 and PS5 versions, SteelBook display case, exclusive cosmetics and weapons, digital artbook and soundtrack, more – – Regalla Edition A Regalla-themed, custom sculpted Tremortusk and Aloy statue, Replica Focus and custom stand, two Art Print Cards, PS4 and PS5 versions, SteelBook display case, exclusive cosmetics and weapons, digital artbook and soundtrack, more – – All of the specifics can be found via the official website. That’s all we know so far about Guerilla Games’ upcoming Horizon Forbidden West release date and gameplay. Stay tuned right here, as we’ll continually update you with any new information as it drops. For more upcoming releases, be sure to check out our hubs below: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Overwatch 2 | League of Legends Project L | Destiny 2 The Witch Queen | Rainbow Six Extraction | Elden Ring | Diablo 4 | Diablo Immortal | Gotham Knights | Suicide Squad: Kill the Justice League | Hogwarts Legacy | God of War Ragnarok

Disney Speedstorm: Confirmed characters, trailer, platforms & everything we know DisneyDisney Speedstorm is an upcoming kart racer that lets players step into the shoes of their favorite characters and revisit some iconic locations from Disney and Pixar licenses — so here’s everything we know so far. While games like Mario Kart 8 are synonymous with the kart racer genre, Disney is about to make its presence felt in a big way in the genre. Not only is the racer looking to be a fast-paced rocket of a ride, but it will appeal to the hearts of many with a whole host of memorable, big-screen characters to play as and plenty of film-inspired tracks. So, here’s a full rundown of the game’s tracks, characters, platforms, and more. Contents Does Disney Speedstorm have a release date yet? – Is Disney Speedstorm is free-to-play – Playable characters & tracks – Disney Speedstorm gameplay – Trailers – Does Disney Speedstorm have crossplay? – What platforms will Disney Speedstorm be on? – Does Disney Speedstorm have a release date or window? No, there is currently no set release date for Disney Speedstorm. According to the title’s official site, all we currently have to go off of is a ‘coming soon’ marker, whereas its Steam page states a 2022 release. Is Disney Speedstorm is free-to-play? Yes, the game’s official reveal was accompanied by a voice-over that confirmed: “Disney Speedstorm is a free-to-play game.” Disney Speedstorm playable characters & tracks There are a total of 13 characters from across Disney and Pixar’s iconic franchises that fans can race as in Speedstorm, including Belle, Mowgli, and Sulley. These are the confirmed characters so far: Baloo – Beast – Belle – Donald Duck – Elizabeth Swann – Hercules – Jack Sparrow – Li Shang – Meg – Mickey Mouse – Mowgli – Mulan – Sulley – If more racer characters are revealed prior to release, we’ll be sure to update you right here. There are also plenty of tracks that we’ll see in Speedstorm, whisking fans off to locations from Hercules, Beauty and The Beast, and more. Check out our dedicated hub for a full breakdown of the available tracks. What do we know about Disney Speedstorm’s gameplay? As with most kart racing games, Disney Speedstorm includes different classes assigned to each character, which will change how players approach each race: Brawler, Defender, Speedster, and Trickster. Racers like Mulan will prioritize speed and agility, whereas big, hulking competitors like Sully from Monsters Inc. are better suited to players pursuing power. Each racer has a specific Ultimate ability that can be triggered at some point, and there are also tons of different pick-ups to change the tide of a race. Disney Speedstorm trailer The game was first shown off at the Nintendo Direct presentation on February 9, 2022, in the form of an exactly 1-minute long trailer. Stated as the “ultimate Disney and Pixar racer”, the trailer showcases some of the game’s roster zipping through locations while characters barrage their opponents with an array of attacks. Does Disney Speedstorm have crossplay? Yes, Disney Speedstorm will indeed have crossplay, allowing players to duke it out over the internet across various platforms. What platforms will Disney Speedstorm be on? A Tweet from the game’s official page has indicated that Disney Speedstorm “is releasing this year on PC & consoles.” While it doesn’t say specifically which consoles we can expect to see, we’ll add more information here once they have been revealed. The hero-based battle racing game, set on high-speed circuits inspired by @Disney & @Pixar worlds, is releasing this year on PC & consoles! Pre-register on https://t.co/sjKN6zF05L & you could be among the first to play!#DisneySpeedstorm #Racing #VideoGames #Disney #Pixar pic.twitter.com/SJ5LnnTQ7g — Disney Speedstorm (@SpeedstormGame) February 9, 2022 So there you have it, that’s everything we know about Disney Speedstorm so far. For more gaming content hubs on all of the latest upcoming releases, make sure to check out the following: Hogwarts Legacy | Forspoken | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | Hollow Knight Silksong | Sonic Frontiers | Kirby and the Forgotten Land | God of War Ragnarok | Gotham Knights | Wolverine | BioShock 4 | Dragon Age: Dreadwolf

Dead Island 2: Release date, gameplay, setting & more Deep SilverDead Island 2 has risen from the un-dead in 2023 and will be one of the year’s most bloody games. Here’s everything we know about Dead Island 2 including its release date, launch time, trailers, and much more. It’s been over a decade since the release of the original Dead Island in 2011, and fans have been hungry for another dose of zombie-slaying action ever since. Despite a relatively middling reaction from critics, it clearly made a splash as it went on to sell over five million copies and had a special place in the hearts of many. The game was announced pretty shortly after but found itself in an incredibly troubled development cycle that saw huge delays. Luckily, the zombie genre is still going strong, as games like Dying Light 2 and Back 4 Blood have proved, and Dead Island 2 still has a ton of hype behind it. We’ve put everything we know so far about Dead Island 2 into one handy guide, including its setting, release date, and developers. Contents Dead Island 2 release date Dead Island 2 will finally arrive on April 21, 2023, after having its release date brought forward from April 28 – after it was delayed from February 2023. Dead Island 2 time zone launches The official global launch times for Dead Island 2 have been announced, and the game will become playable across all time zones once it reaches midnight in any region. https://twitter.com/deadislandgame/status/1648989993723912194?s=20 Dead Island 2 trailers E3 2014 reveal trailer The first trailer for Dead Island 2 was released at E3 back in 2014, promising to take players through a zombie-ridden Los Angeles. Gamescom 2022 trailer 8 years after the first trailer for Dead Island 2 debuted at E3, a second trailer showed off even more of the gruesome and gory wonder, with the tagline reading “see you in helL-A” – a nod to the setting. With the game raring and ready to go, the devs released a final launch trailer to get excited fans hyped one last time. Dead Island 2 developers Dead Island 2 is currently being developed by Nottingham-based developer Dambuster Studios. However, they are the fourth team to have been attached to the project, after various changes, and have taken the reins from the original game’s devs – Techland. Dead Island 2 setting Moving away from the fictional Banoi island from the first game, Dead Island 2 will take place in an open-world version of California, with the bulk of the game taking place in Los Angeles. Players can expect to visit iconic locations that have been swarmed by the undead, such as the beaches of Venice or the upper-class streets of Bel Air. Dead Island 2 gameplay Dead Island 2 retains the first-person melee combat of the original and places greater emphasis on over-the-top gore. The team revealed via the PlayStation blog that they have created their own gore tech to make every combat as satisfying as possible. This should pair nicely with the brutal melee weapons and powerful firearms at your disposal. The devs also claimed that their goal was to empower the player, rather than making them feel helpless they want each player to work out how to survive every encounter. To this end, stealth mechanics have also been added. Crafting was a huge part of Dead Island and its DLC, so expect to see even more weird and wonderful weapons to carve through hordes of undead in the sequel. The Rage Mode system is also set to return, giving players a boost in a power as a reward for racking up kills. That was everything we know so far about Dead Island 2. For more on the biggest upcoming games, check out some of our other release guides: The Elder Scrolls 6 | GTA 6 | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | Wolverine | Spider-Man 2 | Wonder Woman | Avatar Frontiers of Pandora | Dragon Age 4 | Legend of Zelda: Tears of the Kingdom | Diablo 4 | Starfield | Crash Team Rumble | Star Wars Jedi: Survivor

Everything we know about Bomb: XDefiant’s Search & Destroy mode UbisoftXDefiant players have been clamoring for a Search & Destroy mode since it was released, and the developers have stated they are releasing one called Bomb during Season 1. Here is everything we know so far about the mode. XDefiant developers confirmed in May 2024 that a Search & Destroy-type mode would come to the game. At the time, they offered no specific timetable and were quiet about what would change for the mode in XDefiant compared to its contemporary Call of Duty. That all changed on July 1, 2024, when Ubisoft confirmed that a new mode, called Bomb, would join its roundtable of choices in Season 1 due to XDefiant players’ constant requests. Here is all the information the XDefiant developers have revealed about Bomb so far. When will Bomb release? The XDefiant developers have not given a release date for Bomb but have said the mode will come out sometime during Season 1, which starts on July 2 and is expected to run at least through September. Abilities in Bomb Unlike most Call of Duty titles, XDefiant features Factions with different abilities that can help players do damage, track enemies, or change the tide of battle. Players have voiced concerns over how different Faction abilities will play out in a one-life game mode like Bomb. And from the sneak peek trailer Ubisoft showcased on July 1, it looks like abilities and ultimate will be available in the hardcore mode. Bomb mode rules Ubisoft has yet to confirm the rules for the S&D-type mode. However, the sneak peek showcase revealed some of Bomb’s user interface, and players can safely infer some of the rules. The HUD indicates that this mode will feature 6 vs. 6-player action and that each team needs to earn six rounds to win a match. When teams will switch sides or if there will be weapon restrictions remains to be seen. That is all the information Ubisoft has revealed about the much-anticipated mode. This article will continue to be updated as more information is revealed about Bomb during XDefiant Season 1.

Everything we know about Babylon’s Fall: Release date, trailers, platforms, gameplay Square-EnixBabylon’s Fall, a mysterious title that vanished from public view after it was announced, is back and due for release. Here’s everything you need to know. Babylon’s Fall is a new game from Square-Enix developed by Platinum Games. Like Platinum’s previous titles, Babylon’s Fall features hack and slash mechanics with RPG elements and an emphasis on multiplayer, although single-player options will be available. The game was originally announced in 2018 but vanished into obscurity until E3 2021, where Square Enix unveiled a new gameplay trailer and fresh details. Here’s everything we know about Babylon’s Fall, including its release date, gameplay details, and the platforms we can expect to play it on. Contents Babylon’s Fall release date Babylon’s Fall releases on March 3. However, those who purchased the Digital Deluxe version of the game will be able to play it four days earlier via early access from February 28. Babylon’s Fall Platforms Babylon’s Fall is set to release on Microsoft Windows, PS5, and PS4. There’s been no word on if the game will be coming to Xbox Series X|S. However, as the game isn’t a Sony property, there’s always a chance. Babylon’s Fall demo Ahead of its official release, PS4 and PS5 players will be able to access a trial version of Babylon’s Fall on February 25 – a full week before the official release. All saved data will carry over to the launch version, too. Read More: Nintendo Switch Sports details – The details for the trial version aren’t known. However, Square Enix has confirmed it will not be limited to a single-player experience. That means you’ll be able to team up with a group of four friends to try it out. Babylon’s Fall trailer You can check out the original trailer below: The second Babylon’s Fall trailer, released at E3, 2021 provided even more details: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tRX3EqCyB1c Babylon’s Fall Gameplay During E3 2021, Square Enix revealed that Babylon’s Fall will be a four-player hack-and-slash RPG. It can be played solo. However, some aspects of the game, particularly dungeons, are better suited to full parties. Moreover, the combat revolves around players being able to switch between four equipped weapons at the same time. It also includes magic abilities, battle abilities, and more. Of course, it also has a story along the way, too. We look forward to learning more about Babylon’s Fall and will update this as we learn more details. Until then, though, be sure to check out some of our other release hubs: God of War Ragnarok | Horizon: Forbidden West | Gotham Knights | Suicide Squad: Kill the Justice League | Lost Ark

Everything we know about 2XKO’s Illaoi: Abilities, mechanics, more Riot GamesRiot Games unveiled Illaoi, the Kraken Priestess, as the first Champion to receive a gameplay trailer for their upcoming fighting title, 2XKO. Dive into this guide to learn how to master her before the game releases. Illaoi is one of the many Champions revealed for 2XKO alongside the likes of Yasou, Ekko, Darius, and Ahri. Like her character in League of Legends, Illaoi is a hard-hitting tank that uses her conjured tentacles to her advantage. Illaoi’s full ability list in 2XKO We do not know the button inputs for Illaoi’s kit just yet, but the developers have shared a basic understanding of how she works. Illaoi’s main damage dealer in 2XKO is her tentacles which can be broken down into two parts: Illaoi’s S1 and S2 abilities. S2 Specials: Illaoi can use any S2 Special to spawn a tentacle on the map, much like she can in League of Legends. Her Forward Assist is the same as her S2 Special and can be used for controlling mid-range fights. S1 Specials: Illaoi can use any of her S1 Specials to trigger her tentacles for a follow-up attack as long as the opponent is within the tentacle’s “Splash Zone.” If not in range, Illaoi can use certain moves to teleport the nearest tentacle to the enemy before placing an attack. Wrath of Nagakabouros: Illaoi’s S2 Super summons giant tentacles that smack the ground around her opponent. Any tentacles already in play will also get the same treatment. But if Illaoi or her Duo are hit at any point while the S2 Super is active, her tentacles will disappear. Crashing Waves: Illaoi’s S1 Super allows her to pick up her opponent, swing them overhead and slam them into the ground twice. If she already has a tentacle up while in the super, holding S1 will reposition it. Test of Spirit: This is Illaoi’s ultimate ability where she sends her opponent’s soul to the depth where they will face Nagakabouros. Test of Spirit is a mid-range move with a fast start-up that makes it perfect for ending combos. It is also invincible on startup, making the ultimate difficult to counter in the heat of the moment. Illaoi’s playstyle in 2XKO Illaoi has abilities beyond tentacle attacks. Like in League of Legends, Illaoi has multiple slamming attacks which can deal significant damage to her opponent. As developer Caroline Montano explained in the video, the team at 2XKO did not want Illaoi to become a “puppet character.” Her tentacle attacks function as rewards for players who deal damage and stay constantly moving. These tentacles are also easy to eradicate as a single hit from an opponent will cause them to disappear. 2XKO relies on cooperation between teammates to eliminate opponents. Even when Illaoi has been KO’d or is off-screen, she can still be a threatening force. Illaoi’s tentacles will stick around to offer her teammate additional support. Even while KO’d, Illaoi can also use Last Stand to activate her ultimate and “beat the soul” out of whoever is currently battling it out. How to play Illaoi in 2XKO There is no set release date for 2XKO, but Riot Games will be showing off the game at this year’s EVO Japan. Those attending will have the chance to play her and the other characters for the first time. Riot also revealed that home-based playtesting for 2XKO will go live later this year and allow fans unable to attend EVO Japan to test Illaoi out in full.

Everything upcoming in D&D 2024: New books, merch, minis & more Wizards of The Coast2024 is looking like a stellar year for Dungeons & Dragons, with tons of new books, merch, novels, and more coming soon. Here’s everything coming up in D&D for 2024. 2024 marks the 50th anniversary of Dungeons & Dragons. This means it’s a key time for the TTRPG to bring out some awesome new books, merch, minis, and more. On top of this, a major rules revision for D&D is scheduled to arrive, merging all the best bits of previous editions into one accessible rulebook, so anyone can enjoy what it has to offer. However, keeping track of everything that’s coming out for D&D this year can be pretty tricky and relatively overwhelming. So, with that in mind, here’s everything releasing for Dungeons & Dragons in 2024. D&D books coming in 2024 Currently, we know of six new books coming in 2024, two of which are updated core rulebooks. The third updated book, the Monster Manual, will not be released this year, instead launching on February 18, 2025. Beyond those, there are three adventures announced for this year, one of which is an adventure centered on the iconic villain Vecna for characters levels 10-20. There’s also an anthology of classic D&D adventures for characters levels 1-13. A tournament version of Descent into the Lost Caverns of Tsojcanth, a 1982 adventure written by D&D creator Gary Gygax, will be available for free on D&D Beyond. This is different from the Lost Caverns of Tsojcanth, an adventure included in the Quests from the Infinite Staircase anthology releasing later in the year. Finally, there is a book on the history of Dungeons & Dragons releasing this summer, which will provide insight into the game’s creation and early years. Check out all the upcoming releases below: Descent into the Lost Caverns of Tsojcanth – March 26, 2024 – Vecna: Eve of Ruin – May 21, 2024 – The Making of Original Dungeons & Dragons: 1970-1977 – June 18, 2024 – Quests from the Infinite Staircase – July 16, 2024 – Player’s Handbook (2024) – September 17, 2024 – Dungeon Master’s Guide (2024) – November 12, 2024 – 50th Anniversary D&D merch coming in 2024 There’s plenty of merch coming to Dungeons & Dragons in 2024, from dice sets, trays, and so much more. Check out all the upcoming D&D merch items below: LEGO Dungeons & Dragons: Red Dragon’s Tale: April 4, 2024 (April 1, 2024 for LEGO Insiders) – Converse x DUNGEIONS & DRAGONS collection: April 11, 2024 – Dungeons & Dragons 50th Anniversary Vintage Set: July 1, 2024 – Dungeons & Dragons 50th Anniversary Commemorative Set: July 1, 2024 – Dungeons & Dragons 50th Anniversary Then/Now set: July 1, 2024 – Dungeons & Dragons Shadow Light Dice Tray – Dungeons & Dragons Art Edition Dice Tray: Erol Otus – Dungeons & Dragons Signature Art Edition Dice Tray: Jeff Easley – Dungeons & Dragons Signature Art Edition Dice Tray: Larry Elmore – Dungeons & Dragons Art Edition Dice Tower: Erol Otus – Dungeons & Dragons Signature Art Edition Dice Tower: Jeff Easley – Dungeons & Dragons Signature Art Edition Dice Tower: Larry Elmore – D&D Novels coming in 2024 Looking to dive into the lore of Dungeons & Dragons or explore the making of the original D&D games, well these books will be perfect: The Fallbacks: Bound for Ruin: March 5, 2024 – The Making of Original Dungeons and Dragons: 1970-1976 – June 18, 2024 – D&D Minis coming in 2024 While you may not want to put your party up against a Young Gold Dragon too early, there’s always a good battle with these minis: D&D Icons of the Realms: Young Gold Dragon Promo Miniature: March 24, 2024 – D&D Icons of the Realms: D&D 50th Anniversary Birthday Cake Mimic Promo Miniature: March 24, 2024 – If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Everything revealed at The Game Awards 2023 The Game AwardsThe Game Awards 2023 is set to be a big one and it should be given the phenomenal year we’ve had in gaming. We’re compiling a working list of all the major announcements from this year’s show, as they happen. The Game Awards 2023 is in full swing with a host of deserving nominees ready to receive some hard-earned accolades. We’re super excited to celebrate the industry’s best but we’d be lying to you and ourselves if we said we weren’t also keen for the traditional reveals and announcements. Rumours have been swirling for weeks and gamers everywhere have been speculating about what could be shown off at The Game Awards 2023. It’s like Christmas except you don’t get to unwrap the present until 2025. As The Game Awards 2023 unfolds, we’ll be following live and adding every major reveal as we go. Make sure to check back if you miss anything and we’ll wrap it all up after the show. Brothers: A Tale of Two Sons Remake Usual June Harmoinum: The Musical Windblown Thrasher Dave the Diver X Dredge collab God of War Ragnarok: Valhalla DLC Exodus Senua’s Saga: Hellblade 2 release window Kemuri No Rest for the Wicked Sega Power Surge Dragon Ball Sparking! Zero Visions of Mana Rise of the Ronin release date Hideo Kojima’s OD Jurassic Park Survival Black Myth: Wukong release date Tales of Kenzera: ZAU Lost Records: Bloom and Rage Rocket Racing The First Berzerker: Khazan Apex Legends X Final Fantasy 7 Rebirth collab Marvel’s Blade LAST SENTINEL Mecha BREAK Space Marine 2 release date First Decendant Asgard’s Wrath 2 release date Light No Fire Final Fantasy 16 Echoes of the Fallen & The Rising Tide DLC New Stormgate trailer Monster Hunter Wilds Those are all the major reveals from The Game Awards 2023. We thought this year was stacked but all of these amazing games coming in 2024 and 2025 might just have it beat. We’ll be covering all of these games in detail in the lead up to their releases so be sure to check back with us for more updates.

Everything releasing for D&D in 2025 Wizards of the CoastWizards of the Coast has revealed several D&D books and other releases coming in 2025. 2024 marks the 50th anniversary of Dungeons & Dragons, and WOTC has celebrated by honoring the past while also laying out the world’s biggest role-playing game’s future. That’s in large part thanks to a major rules revision that kicks off with the release of the Player’s Handbook (2024) in September. Those curious about what’s to come as the golden anniversary wraps up got a look at what the designers have in the works during a D&D Direct held on August 27, 2024. The presentation included the announcement of several books coming next year. Here’s everything releasing for Dungeons & Dragons in 2025. New 5e books So far, Wizards of the Coast has announced five D&D books releasing in 2025, which include a new Starter Set based on the revised Core Rulebooks, new sourcebooks, and new adventures. Monster Manual (2025) Release date: February 18, 2025 (February 4, 2025 on D&D Beyond and in local game stores) Rounding out the new set of Core Rulebooks is the Monster Manual (2025), which features stat blocks for over 500 creatures and 45 NPCs. The book contains a mix of old and new creatures, with the designers paying particular attention to current gaps in D&D Fifth Edition’s offerings. New monsters include an arch-hag and the blob of annihilation, a high-level Fey and Ooze, respectively. It’ll also feature more art than ever before. Head of Art Josh Herman told Dexerto, “it’s almost entirely new art from cover to cover,” with new pieces meant “to help communicate what the player experience is.” Dragon Anthology Release window: Summer 2025 The first D&D book released after the Core Rulebook revision will be a currently untitled anthology of Dragon-centric adventures. This will feature 10 short adventures about the game’s titular creatures. As the designers explained during the D&D Direct, a surprising number of players say they’ve never actually fought a dragon during their adventures – a problem this book will address head-on. Updated Starter Set Release window: Fall 2025 WOTC is working on an updated Starter Set to help get new players into D&D following the rules revision. Like the existing Starter Set, this will include a beginner-friendly adventure to help players jump right in even if they’ve never played a TTRPG before. The working title for the new adventure is Heroes of the Borderlands. It is a reimagining of B2: The Keep on the Borderlands, an introductory adventure published in 1979 that was written by D&D co-creator Gary Gygax himself. Heroes of the Borderlands will be split into three self-contained booklets called the Caves of Chaos, the Keep on the Borderlands, and the Wilderness. The Forgotten Realms Player Guide & Adventure Guide Release window: Late 2025 The last set of D&D books announced for 2025 includes a duo of sourcebooks that revisit the classic Forgotten Realms setting. This iconic setting is home to locations like Icewind Dale, Neverwinter, and (of course) Baldur’s Gate. While neither has a finalized title yet, they are currently being referred to as The Forgotten Realms Player Guide and The Forgotten Realms Adventure Guide. The former will boast new character options like subclasses, feats, backgrounds, and spells, as well as new types of spells and information on factions like the Harpers and Zhentarim – organizations that should sound familiar to Baldur’s Gate 3 players. The Adventure Guide is geared toward Dungeon Masters and features plenty of information, lore, and resources to help DMs come up with unique adventures in the Forgotten Realms. It will also contain in-depth guides on the following locations within this world: Baldur’s Gate – Calimshan – The Dalelands – Moonshae Isles – Icewind Dale – These settings present opportunities for different kinds of campaigns, with the city of Baldur’s Gate being perfect for urban fantasy and frozen tundra of Icewind Dale being a great fit for survival horror adventures. Other releases & collaborations 2024 was a big year for D&D collaborations, with major releases like the massive Red Dragon’s Tale LEGO set and crossovers with brands like Converse and BlackMilk. That’s likely to continue in 2025. D&D X Dark Horse Comics During San Diego Comic-Con 2024, it was announced that Wizards of the Coast would team up with comic book publisher Dark Horse to produce D&D and Magic: The Gathering content. This will include art books, comics, and more. No specifics have been announced yet, but the first release in this partnership will drop in summer 2025. That’s everything we know so far about D&D releases in 2025! For more on the game, check out our guides on how to build characters of specific classes like the Bard, Fighter, and Wizard, as well as our review for the most recent D&D book, Quests from the Infinite Staircase.

Everything included with Nintendo Switch Online: Expansion Pack, Splatoon 2 DLC, Mario Kart, more NintendoNintendo Switch Online is constantly adding new games to its classic emulators and DLC for those with the added Expansion Pack. Here’s everything we know about what’s included in the service. Nintendo’s online service, Nintendo Switch Online, is a must-have for anyone looking to race their friends on Mario Kart 8 or battle other players ‘mon in Pokemon Sword & Shield. But what all is included? Here’s everything we know that’s included in Nintendo Switch Online, and the accompanying Expansion Pack. Contents Just like Xbox does with Games with Gold and Sony does with their free PS Plus titles, Nintendo Switch Online provides users with a list of games available to play with their subscription. However, it’s a little different. Instead of one or two titles every couple of weeks, NSO gives you consistent access to a list of games on four different classic consoles. The NES and SNES apps are available to regular Switch Online subscribers, while N64 and Genesis require you to subscribe to the more expensive Expansion pack. Nintendo Switch Online NES games Nintendo Switch Online SNES games Nintendo Switch Online Expansion Pack N64 games Nintendo Switch Online Expansion Pack Sega Genesis games Nintendo Switch Online Expansion Pack DLC Not only do you get access to dozens of fantastic classic games, the Nintendo Switch Online + Expansion Pack subscription gives you access to several paid DLC for free. Animal Crossing: Happy Home Paradise – Mario Kart 8 Deluxe Booster Course Pass – Splatoon 2: Octo Expansion – Nintendo launched the NSO Expansion Pack in October 2021 and has continued to provide a fairly steady flow of content for paying members. Nintendo Switch Online Free to Play games Alongside the growing library of classic games and paid DLC, those who subscribe to Nintendo Switch Online will also gain access to various free-to-play games. Tetris 99 – PacMan 99 – Other Nintendo Switch Online bonuses On top of all the game bonuses, Nintendo also has special edition classic controllers available for subscribers to purchase. For more gaming news, tips, and tricks, check out our guides. Everything we know about Splatoon 3 | Pokemon Sword & Shield Mystery Gift codes | Nintendo Switch Sports details: Release date, gameplay, new modes, DLC | 17 best Nintendo Switch games to play in 2022: Lite, OLED & Online | How to create Nintendo Switch groups to categorize your favorite games | All new Nintendo Switch games in 2022 |

Everything in Marvel Snap Savage Land Season: Zabu card, new Locations, more MarvelMarvel Snap’s January 2023 season is now in effect as the Savage Land is in focus for the month ahead. With a new Zabu card to master, unique Locations to work around, and a full new Season Pass up for grabs, here’s all there is to know. Each and every month Marvel Snap players are treated to a new season. These jam-packed updates always provide a range of new content to the digital card battler. In December 2022, The Power Cosmic season was centered on Silver Surfer and 3-cost decks, introducing the galactic traveler to the Marvel Snap universe alongside a mix of Pool 4 & Pool 5 cards. Now, with January 2023 upon us, we have the Savage Land season to grind through in Marvel Snap. Contents Savage Land Season dates – Savage Land Season pass – Zabu in Marvel Snap – Savage Land new cards – New locations – Savage Land Season Pass – Marvel Snap: Savage Land Season dates Marvel Snap’s Savage Land season went live on January 2 at 4 pm EST / 7 pm PST. The season is scheduled to run unit February 6 at 4 pm EST / 7 pm PST. When the new season starts, your rank will be reset and you will no longer be able to make progress on last season’s battle pass. Marvel Snap: Savage Land Season pass price As usual, players don’t have to spend any money on the season pass in order to unlock rewards, obtaining free goodies via the free rewards track. However, if you wish to get an advantage, there are two ways to do so. The Premium Season Pass is available for $9.99 and grants access to the premium reward track, allowing you to unlock exclusive items in the season. Although, a more expensive option exists in the Premium+ for $14.99, which instantly unlocks the first 10 Tiers of the Season Pass. Zabu in Marvel Snap Savage Land Season The main card that debuted in the Savage Land Season is Zabu. Zabu is a 3-cost 2-power card that has the following ability. Ongoing: Your 4-Cost cards cost 2 less. (minimum 1). Zabu is the companion of Ka-Zar, hailing from the Savage Land, and is the last known Smilodon (or sabretooth) in existence. IMAGE New Pool 5 cards in Marvel Snap There are a ton of new awesome cards coming to Marvel Snap with the Savage Land Season. Here is a list of all the new ones hitting the card game in Pool 5: New locations in Marvel Snap Savage Land Season There are a handful of new locations players can look forward to during the January 2023 season. A reminder that when the new locations roll out, one will become a Featured Location and show up 40% more during games for 48-hour intervals. That’s everything you need to know about the new Marvel Snap season. For more, stay tuned to our Marvel Snap page. Marvel Snap Savage Land Season Pass Rewards No different from usual, a new Season Pass means 50 Tiers of new content for you to chase. From a range of new card variants to an assortment of in-game currency, there’s plenty for players of all skill levels to get their hands on. Below is a full look at everything on offer in the Savage Land Season Pass.

Everything in Marvel Snap Rise of the Phoenix update: Jean Grey, Legion, more Second DinnerMarvel Snap’s next season is here, coinciding with the launch of the fiery ‘Rise of the Phoenix’ Season Pass, and we have the full breakdown. As the calendar flips to July, Marvel Snap has entered a new season. This one is centered around the cosmic entity Phoenix Force, one of the Multiverse’s oldest and most formidable powers. This new season introduces various new cards, variants, several brand-new locations, and more. Let’s soar through the multiverse and get you caught up on all the new content featured in the July 2023 season in Marvel Snap. Content Marvel Snap Rise of the Phoenix season dates – Marvel Snap Rise of the Phoenix Season Pass price – Phoenix Force theme in new Marvel Snap Season – New Phoenix Force cards in July 2023 Marvel Snap Season – Marvel Snap Rise of the Phoenix Season Pass rewards – Marvel Snap Rise of the Phoenix season start date Marvel Snap’s Rise of the Phoenix season went live on July 3. It was another smooth transition from the previous theme as players waved goodbye to the Spider-Verse theme. Marvel Snap Rise of the Phoenix Season Pass price Similar to the previous season, Marvel Snap players can obtain rewards through the free rewards track of the new Season Pass. Additionally, players can purchase one of the two premium tracks to access even more exclusive content. The Premium Season Pass is available for $9.99 and unlocks the premium reward track, while the Premium+ bundle for $14.99 skips the first ten tiers immediately. Phoenix Force theme in new Marvel Snap Season As revealed in the July 2023 Developer Update, the latest season of Marvel Snap brings in characters from the cosmic entity Phoenix Force, a power that fuses with characters and their souls. The new cards, Locations, and card variants revolve around the Phoenix Force theme introduced in the new season. New Phoenix Force cards in July 2023 Marvel Snap Season Four new cards are coming to Marvel Snap in July 2023. First up is Jean Grey, a 3-cost, 3-power card that forces players to play their first card at her Location each turn if possible. Jean Grey fits in perfectly with Sera Control and Sera Surfer decks. Next, we have Legion, a card that replaces every other Location with his own when revealed. Legion is a game-changer and a must-have card this season. Echo and Mirage are also joining the roster. Echo’s and Mirage’s stats and abilities are still under wraps, but they promise to bring exciting new dynamics to the game. Finally, the Phoenix Force is a 5-cost, 6-power card that can revive and merge destroyed cards. This card can move each turn, making it a game-changer for Move and Destroy decks. New Locations in July 2023 Marvel Snap Season Two new Locations will be introduced in the Rise of the Phoenix season. The White Hot Room gives the first player to fill the Location +3 max energy, while Lake Helis boosts one-cost cards with +2 power. These new Locations are uniquely positive effects and promise to add a new layer of strategy to the game Marvel Snap Rise of the Phoenix Season Pass rewards The Rise of the Phoenix Season Pass offers a slew of rewards. Players can expect to see new Phoenix Force variants, including the Mighty Colossus Phoenix Force variant, the Magic Phoenix Force variant, and a Phoenix Force variant by artist Alex Horley. Later in the month, Spotlight Caches will be launched, allowing players to open more series 4 and 5 cards on the collection track. More variants are also coming, including Mystique Archer, America Chavez by Rian Gonzales, Adam Warlock by Alex Horley, and a new Deadpool variant. The Marvel Snap team will also be at San Diego Comic-Con in July to discuss the art of Marvel Snap. Stay tuned for more updates on the Rise of the Phoenix season and other Marvel Snap news. All upcoming Bundles in Marvel Snap | Every card in Marvel Snap: Complete list of all iconic characters & abilities | Marvel Snap Featured & Hot Locations | Best Hit-Monkey decks in Marvel Snap | All Marvel Snap Locations: Every unique effect explained | Best Captain Marvel decks in Marvel Snap | How to use emotes in Marvel Snap

Everything in Marvel Snap Guardians Greatest Hits update: New cards, locations, more Twitter: Marvel SnapHere are all the new cards, locations, and other changes that dropping throughout the May 2023 season of Marvel Snap, Guardians Greatest Hits. Ahead of the imminent release of Guardians of the Galaxy Vol. 3, Marvel Snap is commemorating the moment by hosting a Guardians-themed monthly season for May, titled ‘Guardians Greatest Hits.’ This season includes not only new cards, some of which could very well be game-changing and meta-defining, but also several new locations and surprises. Here is everything that Marvel Snap has in store for players in the Guardians Greatest Hits update. Contents Marvel Snap Guardians Greatest Hits season dates – Marvel Snap Guardians Greatest Hits season Pass price – Guardians of the Galaxy theme in new Marvel Snap season – New Marvel Snap Guardians Greatest Hits cards – New Marvel Snap Guardians Greatest Hits locations – Marvel Snap Guardians Greatest Hits Season Pass rewards – Marvel Snap Guardians Greatest Hits season dates The Guardians Greatest Hits Season began on May 1, 2023 and will run throughout the month of May. The season will end sometime in the last week of May or the first week of June. The following season’s theme is unknown, but it could be related to the MCU’s Secret Invasion, which is premiering in June 2023. Marvel Snap Guardians Greatest Hits season pass price Just like in past seasons, the Premium Season Pass is available for $9.99 USD, unlocking the premium reward track that includes content not available to players on the free track. The Premium+ bundle, which prices at $14.99, skips the first 10 tiers right away to instantly unlock all that content. Guardians of the Galaxy theme in new Marvel Snap season With the release of Guardians of the Galaxy Vol. 3 on May 5, the latest Marvel Snap Season coincides with this next step in the MCU. As you would expect, this means much of the focus for the latest batch of content centers around the upcoming film. New Marvel Snap Guardians Greatest Hits cards Five new cards are coming to Marvel Snap as part of the Animals Assembled Season in May 2023. Nebula is a 1-cost, 1-power card that gains two power for every turn that your opponent does not play a card at that location (does not count the turn when Nebula is played). This would go great in locations that limit when cards can be played, but it would also pair well with cards that block other locations like Spider-Man and Debris. Iron Lad is a 4-cost, 6-power card that copies the text of your deck’s top card. This means that any card’s ability (including ultra-powerful ones like Kang or Ultron) can be played a bit earlier, making him a great addition to any Lockjaw deck. Also arriving this month is Howard the Duck, a 1-cost, 2-power card with the following effect – Ongoing: Tap this to see the top card of your deck. This card pairs well with the likes of Iron Lad, giving you more control over how you interact with the arrangement of your deck. Next up is the High Evolutionary, a 4-cost, 7-power card who unlocks the potential of all cards in your deck that don’t have abilities. This means that it would fit right in with Patriot decks, which are filled with cards like Shocker and Cyclops, and will get new abilities when the High Evolutionary is played. Finally, The Living Tribunal is a 6-cost, 4-power card that splits power evenly among all three locations at the end of the game. This means that you could double-down on one location with a bunch of multiplier cards like Black Panther, Wong, and Iron Man to get a massive amount of power at one spot to win all three. New Marvel Snap Guardians Greatest Hits locations There are two new locations to be added in the Guardians Greatest Hits season. First is the Deep Space, which disables the text of all cards at this location. This means that cards like even Sunspot and Galactus won’t have any abilities in Deep Space. The second new location in the Guardians Greatest Hits season will be the Milano, where cards can only be played on turn 5.

Everything in Marvel Snap Days of Future Past update: Nimrod card, new locations, X-Men theme YouTube: MarvelSnapWith the March 2023 Marvel Snap Season now upon us, we’ve got a full rundown on everything included in the X-Men-themed update: Days of Future Past. From the new Nimrod card to everything in the Season Pass, here’s what you need to know. The beginning of a new month means a new season of Marvel Snap content, with new cards, locations, variants, and cosmetic content for players to enjoy. Snap players’ time in the Quantum Realm is now in the rear view mirror, as they now transition to the X-Men universe. In the post-apocalyptic world of Days of Future past, players will battle evil Sentinels and try to correct the timeline. Let’s take a trip through time to see what’s now available in Marvel Snap’s Days of Future past update. Contents Marvel Snap March 2023 Season dates – Marvel Snap: Days of Future Past Season Pass price – X-Men Days of Future Past theme in new Marvel Snap Season – New Days of Future Past cards in March 2023 Marvel Snap Season – Days of Future Past Season Pass rewards – Marvel Snap Days of Future Past Season dates Marvel Snap’s Days of Future Past season went live on Monday, March 6. As always, the new updated transitioned seamlessly from the previous Ant-Man-focused theme. The current Marvel Snap season is all set to wind down on x, giving players x weeks to check out the latest content. Marvel Snap Days of Future Past Season Pass price As was the case in past seasons, Marvel Snap players can unlock rewards via the free rewards track of the new Season Pass. However, you can pay for one of the two paid tracks that will unlock even more content. First up is the Premium Season Pass available for $9.99, which unlocks the premium reward track. Next is the more expansive option in the Premium+ bundle for $14.99, which skips the first 10 tiers right away. X-Men Days of Future Past theme in new Marvel Snap Season As revealed in the March 2023 Season trailer that was released on March 2, the latest season of Marvel Snap takes inspiration heavily from the X-Men story Days of Future Past, where one of the X-Men is sent back through time to prevent the rise of the Sentinels from destroying mutant-kind. As a result, many of the new cards, locations, and card variants are focused on the theme of an alternate future and the key players who participated in the Days of Future Past conflict. New Days of Future Past cards in March 2023 Marvel Snap Season There are four new cards being added to Marvel Snap in March 2023, according to the latest trailer. First up is Nimrod, a 5-cost, 5-power card that adds a copy to the other two locations after it is destroyed. Nimrod seems like a no-brainer for any Destroyer decks, but there is a concern that if you block up too much space on the other locations, you might not be able to get Nimrod’s full effect. The second new card is Kitty Pryde, a 1-cost, 0-power card that gains 2 power if she is returned to your hand. She seems to be built with synergy for cards like Falcon and Beast, and would do well in an On Reveal deck where perhaps they could get multiple uses of this ability to beef her up. Master Mold is the fourth new card to join Marvel Snap as a 2-cost, 2-power card that adds 2 Sentinels to your opponent’s hand when played. This ability would make him a great addition to a Disruption deck, as it becomes harder for players to get as many of their own cards as they want unless they’re playing a Discard deck. Finally, Negasonic Teenage Warhead is a 3-cost, 4-power card that will, after any card is played at its location, destroy itself and that card. This could make it a good option to control a location because the enemy would essentially have to waste a card there, but it could also function quite well in a Destroyer deck as well.

Everything in Marvel Snap Animals Assembled update: New card Jeff, new locations, more YouTube: Marvel SnapHere are all the new cards, locations, and other changes that are dropping in the April 2023 season of Marvel Snap, Animals Assembled. With the Days of Future Past season coming to an end, Marvel Snap is now set to issue in the era of Jeff the Baby Landshark and all his other critter friends. The Animals Assemble season will feature fewer new locations, as per the most recent changes to Featured and Hot locations, and fewer new cards than past seasons. But that doesn’t mean there isn’t plenty of content for new and veteran players to unlock! Here is everything coming to Marvel Snap in the April Season, Animals Assembled. Contents Marvel Snap Animals Assemble Season dates – Marvel Snap Animals Assembled Season Pass price – Animal theme in new Marvel Snap Season – New Marvel Snap Animals Assembled cards – New Marvel Snap Animals Assembled locations – Marvel Snap Animals Assembled Season Pass rewards – Marvel Snap Animals Assemble Season dates The Animals Assemble Season begins on April 3, 2023, and will run throughout the month of April. The season will end sometime in the first week of May, with a still-unknown set that some are theorizing will be connected to the upcoming Guardians of the Galaxy Vol. 3. Marvel Snap Animals Assembled Season Pass price As was the case in past seasons, players can opt into either of the two paid tracks for bonus content not available in the free tier. The Premium Season Pass is available for $9.99 and unlocks the premium reward track. The Premium+ bundle, which prices at $14.99, skips the first 10 tiers right away to instantly unlock all that content. Animal theme in new Marvel Snap Season Whereas Quantumania and Days of Future Past were centered around existing comic and movie titles, Animals Assembled appears to be focused more on individual creatures in Marvel. Not only are all the new cards based on Animals, but the new Rian Gonzales variants are coming to existing animal cards like Goose and Cosmo. New Marvel Snap Animals Assembled cards Four new cards are coming to Marvel Snap as part of the Animals Assembled Season in April 2023. Snowguard is a 1-cost, 2-power card that will take either a Hawk or Bear form in your hand. The Bear form will trigger the effect of the location where it is played, while Hawk will disable all location abilities in the following turn. Since the form isn’t known until the card enters your hand, it’s a bit harder to build a strategy around Snowguard, but it could be a very good disruption card in a lot of decks. The highly-anticipated Jeff the Baby Landshark is a 2-cost, 3-power card that can be played at any location and moved once after it’s played. This will be a fantastic addition to any disruption deck since it can be played and moved at locations that are normally inaccessible like locations flooded by Storm. Hit-Monkey is a 2-cost, 0-power card that gains 2 power for every other card you play that same turn. This seems like a tailor-made finishing card in Patriot decks, where players can spam 1 or 2-cost cards toward the end to maximize Hit-Monkey’s power (theoretically he could hit +8 power with no amplifiers). Stegron is a 4-cost, 5-power card with an On Reveal ability that moves an enemy card from the location where it is played to another location. This seems like it would be a great disruptor card to counter any attempts to set up 4/5/6 card strategies at one location or remove an Ongoing effect card. New Marvel Snap Animals Assembled locations There are two new locations to be added in Animals Assembled. First is the Pet Avengers Mansion, where all cards must be played on the turn that it is revealed. This could prove very disruptive to players who are trying to use shown locations to maximize their cards’ power. Second is The Sandbar, a location that prevents a player from adding cards with any abilities. This means that, if a player doesn’t have movement cards or no ability cards, they might be conceding this location.

Everything in CoD Mobile Season 2 Heavy Metal update: New map, Goliath Clash, more ActivisionCoD Mobile Season 2: Heavy Metal is already coming into focus as 2023 rolls on and we’ve got an early look at what to expect from the major update. New game modes, a fresh map, and a range of balance adjustments are just the tip of the iceberg. While Warzone Mobile may be stealing the spotlight to some degree in the new year, CoD Mobile’s momentum isn’t slowing down in the slightest. With Season 1: Reawakening, we saw one of the most jamp-packed updates yet with a wide assortment of new content and cosmetics to keep players engaged. Now, devs are looking to follow that up with a desert-themed season for February and we already know a good amount of what to expect in the Heavy Metal update. From new maps and modes to a look ahead at likely balance adjustments, here’s all there is to know about CoD Mobile Season 2: Heavy Metal. Contents CoD Mobile Season 2: Heavy Metal release date – New Diesel map in CoD Mobile Season 2 – Goliath Clash game mode launches in CoD Mobile Season 2 – New Maddox Assault Rifle in Season 2: Heavy Metal – CoD Mobile Season 2: Heavy Metal balance changes – CoD Mobile Season 2: Heavy Metal release date & launch time CoD Mobile Season 2: Heavy Metal is all set to go live on Wednesday, February 22 at 4PM PT. This lines up seamlessly with the end of the current Season 1 Battle Pass, meaning new content will rollover right away as players install the new update. New Diesel map arriving in CoD Mobile Season 2 Taking from Black Ops Cold War once again, the multiplayer map Diesel is making its way over to CoD Mobile in Season 2. This medium-sized battleground arrived in BOCW Season 3 in 2021, and served as a new arena for fast-paced matches. Designed with 6v6 combat in mind, as well as Gunfight contests, this desert-themed locale was a popular pick from its debut onward. Goliath Clash game mode launches in CoD Mobile Season 2 Also launching as part of Season 2 is a new Goliath Clash playlist. In this unique game type, players are all in control of Goliaths from the jump. Teams battle in these powerful suits of armor in a Domination-style mode. By capturing objectives as you would in the standard mode, players earn batteries to upgrade their Goliath’s abilities. New Maddox Assault Rifle lands in CoD Mobile Season 2 As always, with a new season in CoD Mobile comes a new weapon as this time around, the Maddox Assault Rifle is in focus. First appearing in Black Ops 4, this gun is making the transition over in Season 2 as a well-rounded AR pick. Boasting a “reliable fire rate,” and a “special Echo Fire attachment that can maximize damage,” it’s sure to be a strong contender in the weeks to come. CoD Mobile Season 2 Heavy Metal: early balance changes leaked While it’s still early days yet, and official patch notes are yet to arrive, but prominent insiders ‘LeakersOnDuty’ have revealed some early balance changes ahead of Season 2’s launch. These adjustments rolled out early on the test server and thus, might be subject to change before their arrival in the full game, so do take the following with a grain of salt. While that’s all we know about CoD Mobile Season 2: Heavy Metal for now, be sure to check back in the coming days as we’ll update you here with all the latest details as they emerge.

Everything announced at Nintendo Indie World Showcase Nov 2023 NintendoNintendo’s latest Indie World Showcase revealed a variety of indie games coming to Nintendo Switch, some of which are available today. Here’s everything announced during the Showcase. Nintendo Indie World Showcase is back, presenting a look at indie games releasing on the Nintendo Switch between now and next year. As with any Showcase, there are some surprises and potential hidden gems among the lot. While we didn’t, as some hoped, learn any more about Hollow Knight: Silksong, there’s still a lot here for gamers to check out. Here’s everything announced during the November 2023 Nintendo Indie World Showcase. Shantae Advanced: Risky Revolution The beloved half-genie heroine is back. After a hectic development cycle that was stalled for many years, Shantae Advance: Risky Revolution will finally release in 2024. Core Keeper In Core Keeper, players will explore procedurally generated biomes as they gather resources, build bases, and fight monsters. The game supports up to 8 players in online multiplayer, allowing them to explore the Underground together. The game will release Summer 2024. On Your Tail Made by an Italian development team, On Your Tail is a narrative life sim with a mystery to uncover. Players must use their investigation and interrogation skills to discover who the masked menace is. The game will release in 2024. Howl Described as a “turn-based tactical folktale,” Howl is all about a Deaf prophet who must save the realm from a sinister plague that’s spread by sound. The full game is available today along with a free demo. The Star Named EOS This “puzzle-driven narrative adventure” uses photography and scrapbooking to explore its heartwarming story about reality and memory. It will release Spring 2024. Backpack Hero Backpack Hero is a unique take on a dungeon crawler in which packing your bag makes you more powerful. It essentially turns a Resident Evil 4-style inventory management system into a full game about rebuilding a village, fighting monsters, and (of course) organizing your backpack. Backpack Hero is available on Switch today. Blade Chimera This 2D action game arms players with a huge sword and time manipulation powers. In Blade Chimera, players must protect their cyberpunk city from demon attacks. The game releases Spring 2024. A Highland Song Inspired by the developer’s adventures through the Scottish Highlands, A Highland Song is a 2D adventure through a harsh but beautiful land. The narrative platformer takes you across its world, with the story changing based on what path you take. It releases on December 5, 2023 and is available to preorder today. Moonstone Island Fans of games like Slay the Spire and Stardew Valley should keep an eye on this one. Moonstone Island combines a variety of genres with card combat, an open world, life sim elements, and more. It releases on Switch in Spring 2024. Death Trick: Double Blind This visual novel is set in a circus whose star has disappeared. It’ll be up to the player to uncover mystery as an unlikely detective duo when Death Trick: Double Blind launches next year. There’s also a demo available today in the eShop. Outer Wilds: Archeologist Edition One of 2019’s most acclaimed games is finally coming to Switch. Outer Wilds: Archeologist Edition combines the base game and its Echoes of the Eye expansion into one package. The game releases on December 7, 2023, with a physical version coming next year. Everything Else announced during the Indie World Showcase Nintendo ended the Showcase with a rapid-fire look at even more indie games coming to Nintendo Switch. Here’s a rundown of the games featured in this section and their release dates.: Planet of Lana – Spring 2024 – Enjoy the Diner – Available today – Heavenly Bodies – February 2024 – The Gecko Gods – Spring 2024 – Passpartout 2: The Lost Artist – Available today – Urban Myth Dissolution Center – 2024 – Braid Anniversary Edition – April 30, 2024 – That’s everything Nintendo revealed during the November 2023 Indie World Showcase! While you wait for some of these games to release, be sure to check out the rest of our content on Nintendo games like Pokemon, Mario, and The Legend of Zelda.

Everything announced at D&D Direct: MTG cards, Minecraft collabs, more Wizards of The CoastD&D Direct announced a variety of new content for both gamers and Dungeons & Dragons fans to enjoy. Here’s everything they announced. With the release of Dungeons & Dragons: Honor Among Thieves imminent and One D&D still in the works, fans have plenty to get excited about, especially with upcoming books, plushes, and more. However, the D&D Direct event has only added to the excitement, announcing some exciting reveals and experiences in the game’s future. So, with so much being announced in such a short time, we’ve put together everything that was revealed on March 28th’s D&D Direct so you know what to look forward to and what you can try out now. Minecraft Dungeons & Dragons DLC Announced as one of the two collaborations with Minecraft, Mojang, and Wizards of The Coast revealed a brand new DLC featuring four classes, skill points, dice rolls, and an action RPG style, all set in Minecraft. The DLC will be unlike any other, featuring speech, real-time battles, stats, and character level-ups, as well as some recognizable D&D monsters and locations. For more information on the Minecraft D&D DLC and its release window, take a look at our handy hub. Minecraft Monstrous Compendium Volume Three Along with the new DLC, WoTC also revealed the third volume of their Monstrous Compendium, only this time it centers around a variety of Minecraft monsters, allowing DM’s the chance to put some famous mobs into their own game. Such mobs include every builder’s worst nightmare, the Creeper, and every endgame player’s struggle, the Enderman and the legendary Ender Dragon, who looks like a tricky battle for any D&D party. The third Monstrous Compendium will be free for all on D&D Beyond and is already released. Dungeons & Dragons: Honor Among Thieves MTG Cards Minecraft wasn’t the only collaboration present at the D&D Direct event. In fact, the upcoming Honor Among Thieves movie is now collaborating with Magic: The Gathering to release a set of inspired cards featuring all the main characters. The cards were leaked before but have now been confirmed and each features special skills for each legendary creature, some of which can be seen in the movie itself. New Dungeons & Dragons: Honor Among Thieves trailer Just days before its release, D&D Direct showed off another trailer for Dungeons & Dragons: Honor Among Thieves. It details more of the large dragon that chases the party, as well as a few more shots of that adorable yet deadly Displacer Beast, one of the many monsters in this hilarious film. You can watch the trailer below: Neverwinter: Menzoberranzan Also announced during D&D Direct was a brand-new trailer for Neverwinter, which is currently working with legendary writer, R.A. Salvatore to focus on the Drow city of Menzoberranzan and, naturally, Drizzt Do’Urden. It was also announced that the update would be released for PC and consoles on March 28, 2023. You can watch the trailer below: That’s everything announced at D&D Direct. For more Dungeons & Dragons content, be sure to check out our hub.

Everybody 1-2-Switch will be your new favorite party game NintendoI’m probably alone in saying that 1-2-Switch is one of my favorite Nintendo Switch games. Sure, it was overpriced and I might have only played it a handful of times before the novelty wore off. But Nintendo has a way with silly party games that I’ve always found irresistible. So when I was invited to preview a sequel called Everybody 1-2-Switch, I knew I was in for a good time. This new iteration features 17 team-based games and the ability to play with a Joy-Con or your smartphone, a little bit like the Jackbox Party Packs. In a room with several other video game journalists, I was presented with a handful of these party games. They ranged from intriguing to downright ridiculous – and they were all hosted by a man in a horse mask called Horace. First up was Balloons. For this game, we worked in teams of four to blow up a balloon using the Joy-Con like a pump. The aim was to get our balloon as big as possible without popping it. This game is all about communication, although that’s admittedly a bit difficult when you’re in a room full of people you’ve never met before. I have a feeling this game – like most others in the collection – will work better with close friends or family. Prepare to look silly The next game was Hip Bump, which takes place in a 1v1 format. The rules are simple: Hold the Joy-Con behind yourself and thrust backward to ‘bump’ your opponent out of the virtual ring. It was definitely the silliest game shown off during this preview session and there’s not much substance to it. Having said that, it did get plenty of laughs from the room, so it’ll no doubt be fun at parties. My favorite game out of the handful I experienced was Color Shoot, which encourages you to channel your inner fashionista. Smartphone in hand, you’re presented with a specific shade of color and it’s your job to find an item in real life that matches it. Once you’ve found your item, take a photo and submit it to see how yours compares to everyone else’s. It’s a fun and frantic game that even the most technology-averse people should be able to get on board with. It’s also one of the few moments where Everybody 1-2-Switch presents something that feels fresh and exciting. Everybody 1-2-Sit Other games I got to try included Ninja Training, in which one person attempted to fend off throwing stars from the rest of the group with well-timed Joy-Con swings. Another was Quiz Show, which saw everyone attempt to answer general knowledge questions as fast as possible. I did question why Musical Chairs – a game that’s so simple to set up with actual chairs – was included, but the addition of a timer to track who flung themselves to the ground the fastest really did bring out everyone’s competitive side. None of the games here are particularly beefy, but I do think they’ll have slightly more longevity than the micro-games featured in 2017’s 1-2-Switch. This collection also combats the main criticism of that game: the cost. At $29.99, Everybody 1-2-Switch is almost half the price of its predecessor. This feels a lot more reasonable for what is essentially a bunch of novelty mini-games. Perhaps the most impressive thing about Everybody 1-2-Switch is the claim that up to 100 people can take part in a single game. I refuse to believe anyone has that many friends, but our group of around 20 people faced no technical issues while playing games like Quiz Show and Musical Chairs, so it certainly seems possible. I also love that many of the games can be played with smartphones, as this removes the need to purchase (or borrow) several expensive Joy-Con controllers just so all of your friends can join in. While I only got to play a handful of the games on offer in Everybody 1-2-Switch, it’s shaping up to be everything I want from a party game: Ridiculous, good fun, and easy for everyone to pick up and play. Everybody 1-2-Switch may be a sequel that no one asked for, but I’m glad it exists. Sometimes all you really need is a group of friends and a host in a horse mask called Horace to help you all feel silly together. I’m excited to see what the other games have to offer. Everybody 1-2-Switch will be available on Nintendo Switch on June 30, 2023.

Best faction in XDefiant: All factions ranked by abilities UbisoftXDefiant offers players the ability to play as one of six Factions, each based on a different Ubisoft property: Watch Dogs, Far Cry, Splinter Cell, Ghost Recon, Rainbow Six, and The Division. Each Faction offers unique abilities and skills that can give a player an edge on the battlefield. All of these skills are based on the kind of gameplay of their respective franchises as well, such as DedSec from Watch Dogs being heavily focused on hacking and using technology to affect enemies. But not every Faction is as good as the other, and so to help anyone looking to get a step up on the competition, here is how each Faction ranks at the time of writing. Best faction to pick in XDefiant – recommended After playing XDefiant for many hours and testing multiple factions across the game’s modes, we recommend Echelon as the best faction to start with on XDefiant. Many players – not just this tester – have been impressed by the faction’s Digital Ghillie Suit which gives you a major advantage as it makes you completely invisible. There are merits to playing each of the factions in the game, some of which will suit you and others won’t. Below, we’re going to rank them 1-6 and explain all of the abilities so you can make the right choice for your play style. 1. Echelon Echelon: Abilities explained Sonar Goggles (Ultra): Reveal enemies and hunt them down with the classic Third Echelon 5.7 pistol. – Low Profile (Passive Trait): Agent does not appear on enemy minimaps. – Intel Suit (Ability): Shares the location of nearby enemies with your team. – Digital Ghillie Suit (Ability): Renders the agent nearly invisible. Movement and aiming reduce the effect. – Echelon makes the top of this XDefiant Factions list thanks to its stealth capabilities, specifically the Digital Ghillie Suit we mentioned earlier that renders players completely invisible to enemies. This is an OP skill that can help you maneuver and flank points, enemy spots, and more to completely outplay opponents. Further still, the Sonar Goggles are a huge boon for locating enemies on the map. Echelon’s abilities are simply too strong to be relegated to any other spot but the best one on this list. 2. Libertad Libertad: Abilities explained Médico Supremo (Ultra): The Médico backpack provides a large health and healing boost for a limited time. – Espíritu de Libertad (Passive Trait): The contagious spirit of freedom slowly heals you and nearby allies. – El Remedio (Ability): Launch a revitalizing gas canister that heals friendlies until destroyed or canceled. – BioVida Boost (Ability): A fortifying wave boosts total health and regen for you and nearby allies. – Libertad is going to be one of the favored Factions as people start learning the ropes since its abilities offer plenty of healing opportunities. This should prove a huge help for beginners trying to better understand the shooter’s ins and outs. But these skills are useful beyond just the opening hours, as healing abilities offer advantages for even the most experienced of players. Plus, they go beyond just keeping you alive, with many healing-related skills boosting the health of teammates as well. When used properly, this can be a game-changer. 3. Phantoms Phantoms: Abilities explained Aegis (Ultra): A spherical plasma shield combined with an electro-scattergun for close-quarters combat. – Hardened (Passive Trait): Health increased as a result of tailored gene therapies. – Mag Barrier (Ability): An electromagnetic barrier blocks incoming enemy fire and grenades. – Blitz Shield (Ability): Equip a tactical shield. Press the Melee button for a shield bash. – The Phantoms use their unique technology to nullify enemy attacks, such as the Mag Barrier that will surround you and nearby teammates in a protective bubble. The ability can be incredibly helpful when taking a point in Domination, or just trying to get from Point A to Point B in a firefight. However, one shortcoming is that Phantoms cannot deal damage with their skills. They are a defense-first group and while that is invaluable when used right, it can be tough when you are outnumbered. 4. GSK GSK: Abilities explained Flash Shield (Ultra): Blind and bash foes with an LED studded shield, which also provides a mobile cover for your sidearm. – Hard Hat (Passive Trait): A ballistic helmet reduces the lethality of enemy headshots. – ADS (Ability): Deploy an Active Defense System to intercept incoming devices thrown by enemies. – Shock Wire (Ability): Drop briars of electrified barbed wire to zap and entangle foes. – The GSK Faction is great for holding down an area and not letting an enemy through chokepoints without a fight. These characters are like the Phantom class but without the extra health and are great in objective game modes like Escort, Occupy, and Zone Control. However, they don’t have any damaging abilities, and their Passive Trait isn’t felt as much on smaller maps where SMGs are king and headshots are less important in gunfights. However, the class has no obvious drawbacks like the final Factions ranked below it and still has a niche to fill for almost every mode and map, especially when playing defensively. 5. Cleaners Cleaners: Abilities explained The Purifier (Ultra): A flamethrower ensures enemies are thoroughly sterilized. – Incendiary Rounds (Passive Trait): Incendiary ammo inflicts extra burn damage but decreases weapon range. – Incinerator Drone (Ability): A napalm-delivering drone burns everything in its flight path. – Firebomb (Ability): Detonate a Molotov cocktail, causing explosive damage and igniting the area. – On paper, the Cleaners sound like the most fun Faction in the game. Their incendiary rounds can cause fire damage against targets and their Flamethrower Ultra is, well, a flamethrower and those are always welcome additions to any game. The issue with these guys is that their hitboxes are much larger than the other Factions in XDefiant, which turns them into big targets during matches. There is also the problem of their ability cooldowns being rather lengthy compared to other characters. 6. DedSec DedSec: Abilities explained Lockout (Ultra): Disable the enemies’ HUD, minimap, and abilities in the affected area. – Fabricator (Passive Trait): After a device is deployed, the Fabricator prints a new one. – Spiderbot (Ability): Deploy a Spiderbot that will target and stun the nearest foe via face hug. – Hijack (Ability): Hack enemy-deployed abilities and make them your own. – DedSec is a cool Faction to use in XDefiant, as its abilities allow you to mess with your opponents and disorient them. When used at the right time, it can help your team come out on top. However, some of these have proven pretty weak, especially the Spiderbot. If spotted, enemies can easily take this little guy out with a quick shot. And even though its effects may cause issues on the enemy’s HUD, it doesn’t do anything to reduce their damage. Here is how to unlock DedSec in XDefiant. The Factions are just one part of XDefiant. See what else you need to know: XDefiant system requirements | XDefiant: Gameplay, platforms & everything we know | Will XDefiant feature a battle royale mode? | Best ACR 6.8 loadout for XDefiant | Best M4A1 loadout for XDefiant

Every Xbox Series X launch title confirmed: what you can play day one Sega / Ubisoft / MicrosoftMicrosoft’s next-generation consoles, the Xbox Series X and S, are set to hit stores on November 10. Here are all the games consumers can play on their new systems on release day. [jwplayer hRlzg0BA] Microsoft is finally gearing up to enter its next generation with the release of the Xbox Series X on November 10 for $499. The publisher is also giving consumers a cheaper option with the S version for $299. While the new console will be launching without any major first-party exclusives, the next-gen systems are jam-packed with titles to choose from. Here is everything you can play on day one. Xbox Series X and S launch titles Microsoft originally planned to launch the Series X & S with Halo Infinite. However, in August it was announced that the 343 developed FPS was delayed sometime into 2021. Because of this, the consoles are making their debut without any major first-party titles. Despite this, consumers will still have a good amount of games to play on their brand-new systems. The standout titles are from third-party studios such as Ubisoft’s Assassin’s Creed Valhalla, and the wildly anticipated Yakuza: Like a Dragon. The SEGA-produced RPG is console exclusive on the Series X for four months. Day one titles Assassin’s Creed Valhalla – Bright Memory – Destiny 2: Beyond Light – Devil May Cry 5: Special Edition – DiRT 5 – Fortnite – Gears 5 – Gears Tactics – Maneater – NBA2K21 – Observer: System Redux – Scorn – The Ascent – The Falconeer – Watch Dogs Legion – Yakuza: Like a Dragon – Launch window titles Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War – November 13 – Cyberpunk 2077 – November 19 – Immortals: Fenyx Rising – December 3 – The Medium (Xbox exclusive) – December 10 – While the Xbox Series X isn’t launching with any first-party titles, it is the most powerful console with specs even higher than the PlayStation 5. Read More: Every PS5 launch title confirmed so far – So the next-gen system is the perfect place to play some of the most anticipated titles coming out in 2020. Cyberpunk alone will keep players busy for months.

Every WWE 2K24 MyRise unlockable: All characters, arenas, belts, more 2K GamesMyRise mode in WWE 2K24 is full of exciting unlockables that you can earn by completing different milestones. Here’s a full breakdown of every unlockable you can get in MyRise throughout the game. While WWE 2K24 comes with a roster of iconic Superstars and Legends to use, some fans may prefer to create their own Wrestling career in the game‘s MyRise mode. As you carve out your own journey in MyRise you’ll have the chance to unlock some unique rewards across the 2 distinct narratives. Here’s every single MyRise unlockable you can get in WWE 2K24, including Arenas, Championship Belts, and MyFaction cards. Contents All WWE 2K24 MyRise Unlockables – WWE 2K24 unlockable Arenas – WWE 2K24 unlockable Championship belts – WWE 2K24 MyRise unlockable MyFaction cards – All WWE 2K24 MyRise unlockables WWE 2K24’s MyRise has two distinct narrative journeys to playthrough and each has its own set of unlockables. We’ve gathered a list of every reward for MyRise in WWE 2K24 including arenas, MyFACTION characters, and Championship belts in the table below. MyRise unlockable Arenas MyRise unlockable Championship belts MyRise unlockable MyFaction cards Those are all of the MyRise unlockables you can get in the game, and they should give you plenty of incentive to play through both stories. For more WWE 2K24 content, check out our guides below: All Match Types | WWE 2K24 DLC Roadmap | Is WWE 2K24 on Steam Deck? | Does WWE 2K24 have local multiplayer? | WWE 2K24: All 40 Years of WrestleMania matches

Every weapon in WWE 2K24 & how to get them 2K GamesWith WWE 2K24 comes a range of devastating new weapons alongside many returning favorites. From where to find them to how you can use them in a match, here’s what you need to know. WWE 2K24 is now out in the wild with all its hard-hitting action captivating the masses for another year. And while plenty remains the same, there’s a great deal of new additions to be excited about too. From the revamped roster to electrifying new match types, fans can enjoy an assortment of upgrades this time around. And that also applies to the game’s offering of weapons, with WWE 2K24 adding a few new tools of destruction to the mix. So if you’re wondering just how many weapons there are, where to find them, or simply how to use them, look no further. Here’s the full rundown. Full list of all weapons in WWE 2K24 Trashcan – Guitar – Microphone – Chancla (Flip-flops) – Slim Jim – Chair – Ladder – Kendo Stick – Sledgehammer – Shovel – Table – Baseball Bat – Stop Sign – Hockey Stick – How to change the weapon wheel in WWE 2K24 Changing the weapon wheel in WWE 2K24 can only be done before a match starts. You need to be in the menus and head to the match settings before locking in a given bout. In the match settings screen, navigate to the Edit Weapons section. From here, you’re able to pick and choose which weapons will be stocked under the ring for the next bout. Keep this in mind as you’ll need to come back to this menu screen ahead of every match if you want different weapons to rotate in and out. How to get weapons in WWE 2K24 If weapons aren’t already strewn around the arena, you’ll need to look under the ring to grab your tool of choice. Simply approach a ring apron on any non-LED board side and press L1 (PlayStation), LB (Xbox), or U (PC). This will then bring up the game’s weapon wheel as outlined above, giving you a choice of six weapons to use to your advantage. Just hit select on the one you want and your superstar will drag it out from under the ring. Should you drop the weapon or have an attack interrupted, tap the same L1, LB, or U button to pick it back up again. This applies to all manner of objects as well, even though not necessarily designed to be weapons, such as water bottles found near the commentary tables, or the steel steps at ringside. So that’s all there is to know about weapons in WWE 2K24. If you’re looking for other guides, we’ve got you covered right here.

Every weapon in Wild Hearts explained: Fighting styles, upgrades, more Koei TecmoWild Hearts has nine total weapons, all of which have their own characteristics, traits, and playstyles they cater to, Here’s a full breakdown on each and every one of them so you can get ahead of the curve. In EA’s new game, Wild Hearts, we explore the world of Azuma and hunt monsters named Kemono across the lands. Throughout your journey in Wild Hearts, you have a plethora of choices when it comes down to picking the right weapon, of which there are nine to be specific. Each weapon has its characteristics which makes it better for specific Kemono in the game. When we first start the journey, we are given the option of five different weapons to choose from, and later in the game after Chapter 2, we are given three more weapons to choose from. Weapons in Wild Hearts essentially function as character classes, and knowing which one would cater to your personal preferences is a key component of the combat. Upon forging your weapon, you can further acquire upgrades for the weapons to counteract their negatives. So, in this guide, we will take a look into what each weapon does, and what sort of play style each of them caters to. Contents Starting weapons in Wild Hearts: Karakuri Katana The Katana is the weapon our character is given at the start of Wild Hearts. As melee weapons go, it is a good balance between fast attacks and high power damage. The mid-weight, short-ranged weapon has the ability to easily chain attacks one after another. The Katana can easily chain attacks which deal a considerable amount of damage. And each individual attack has a decent amount of damage. The wind-up time between each attack is not so slow it requires immediate upgrades, nor so fast it barely does any damage. But just like every weapon, it has flaws. Although its attacks can be easily chained, it also means once you are locked into an attack with no way to dodge a Kemono coming at you. Leaving you vulnerable mid-attack to damage. And individual attacks can consume a significant amount of stamina. Of course, there are upgrade paths to reduce the amount of stamina it takes up, but it exchanges it for damage. But if you enjoy fast-paced combat that tests your prediction skills, the Katana is the way to go. Nodachi Heavy and sluggish, the short-ranged weapon might be a comparatively slower experience than the Katana, but it deals a significant amount of damage with every strike. Despite its damage per second being significantly slower than the Katana, it is also significantly easier to handle. Dodging and running mid-attack is extremely easy in comparison to the Katana despite the large blade, and even its normal attacks can pack a punch. The only drawback with it is how slow it can be. If you miss your target on your first few attacks, you are most likely going to be hit by a raging Kemono coming your way. And your character is significantly slower due to the weight. It may be easier to handle, but it’s hard to move with. And of course, there are upgrade paths to make the Nodachi lighter and easier to move around with, but it trades some attack damage and critical chances for mobility. Bow One of the two ranged weapons available, the bow is in a unique position as the only weapon in game with two different stances. One where the bow is held horizontally, and the other vertically. It can be triggered by pressing the Attack 1 command. The horizontal mode, called Haya, is your light damage. And the vertical, Otoya, is your heavy. Chaining a Haya and Otoya shot one after another can inflict additional damage to the Kemono, including sustained damage. And you can also trigger continuous fire while the bow is in Haya, but it will deal significantly less damage in comparison to charging the bow in Otoya. Of course, the main advantage of the Bow is the range of damage and mobility. You can damage Kemono from a long distance, and still be fine. And the Bow also gives increased dodge capabilities, with the player being able to press dodge once to sidestep and twice to roll. But what you gain in range and mobility, you lose in damage. In comparison to the melee short-ranged weapons, the Bow deals significantly less damage. Of course, there are upgrade paths to increasing its damage, but it will always be less than a melee weapon. Maul This is the heaviest weapon in the game. The Maul is an extremely weighty, short-ranged, weapon that deals an incredible amount of damage per hit. The Maul is in a unique position in that not only does it offer maximum-impact attacks, but it is also so powerful it can destroy both Kemono and Karakuri. Karakuri are abilities the players can use to construct objects to aid them in combat. The Maul also has surprisingly high mobility attacks which allow the player to easily Kemonos’ mid-attack. And unsurprisingly, the Maul uses a considerable amount of stamina due to its heavy attacks. There are upgrade paths to reduce stamina depletion, but it comes with trade-offs for its damage. Bladed Wagasa Based on the real-world traditional Japanese umbrella, the Bladed Wagasa is a lightweight, short-ranged weapon. It offers fast attacks which can’t be stopped. It is also unique in the weapon pool in that it is the only weapon that allows the player to block attacks coming from Kemonos’. Although it does not function as a shield, rather a well-timed deflection and parry of the attack, so you will need to be quick-fingered to react to incoming attacks. It also allows chain attacks, both on the ground and airborne. The Wagasa is a very mobile weapon, with hunters being able to easily dodge incoming attacks, and if you can’t dodge, you can always deflect it. Although, its main drawback is its low attack output. Despite still being able to deal high penetration damage, it still ultimately does not deal the largest amount of damage. Weapons unlocked after reaching Chapter 2 in Wild Hearts: Hand Cannon This is the only other ranged weapon available to the player. The Hand Cannon is the Bow’s heavier counterpart. Just like the Bow, it is a long ranged weapon, which allows you to damage Kemono from a distance without the fear of being killed. But the Cannon has a higher damage output per attack in comparison. The Cannon has two gauges the player must be aware of to use it effectively. The Charge gauge shows the amount of Celestial Thread stored in the cannon and the Heat gauge which shows the temperature of the weapon. With each usage of the weapon, the Heat gauge increases and Charge gauge decreases, so being able to balance the gauges is essential to dealing an effective stream of damage. To charge up the Charge gauge, you will need to stand on top of a base. In order to create a base, you just need to press the Attack 1 button which will place it on the ground. Pressing Attack 2 will shoot a base at the target. To deal an effective amount of damage, you are essentially bound to the base, leaving you quite vulnerable to attacks. And due to its base restrictions, mobility is not the greatest while trying to deal damage. Claw Blade This is the lightest weapon in the game. The Claw Blade specializes in quick movements and aerial combat, and offers the greatest mobility of any weapon. The Claw Blade allows the hunter to hook into a Kemono like the claw wire and attack them in the air as long as your claw gauge lasts. To build up the claw gauge, you just need to attack the Kemono, and it will gradually fill up the gauge. With every landing of the claw wire onto the Kemono, it will further increase the power of aerial attacks. And while airborne, pressing the dodge button allows you to rotate mid-air and comboing it with the Special Attack will allow you to lunge at the Kemono. The Claw Blade allows for effective attack chains, and the fastest-paced playstyle of any weapon in the game. Although the damage output for each individual attack is relatively low in comparison to the other weapons, if you combo your attacks correctly, it can deal just as much damage per second to any Kemono. Karakuri Staff The Karakuri Staff is a medium-weight weapon and is probably the weapon with the highest skill ceiling in the game. The Staff is unique in that it can transform between five different forms, each mutating into a weapon that has its own characteristics. The five modes are: Staff – Polearm – Shuriken – Double Blades – Juggernaut Blade – The weapon offers only short-ranged attacks, but easily cycles between heavy and light damage with a good amount of mobility. The staff can be easily transformed into whichever mode you would like by just pressing the Special attack button. And you can mutate the Staff into its sixth, and most powerful mutation, the Giant Sword, by pressing the Special attack and Attack 2 buttons together. The Staff is most effective when chaining together transformation attacks from different modes. But to do it takes considerable mechanical skill as you will need to constantly switch from mode to mode while attacking and making sure you are using the right mode for the specific Kemono. With each usage of a transformation attack, the Karakuri Staff’s transformation level increases, which increases the power of each mode, and enhances the performance of the Giant Sword. Of course its main drawback is its steep learning curve. But if you decide to put in the work into mastering the Staff, you will be rewarded with one of the next damage-dealing weapons in the game.

Every track in Disney Speedstorm: Monsters Inc, Pirates of the Caribbean & more DisneyDisney Speedstorm is a free-to-play kart-racer, giving players the freedom to blast through locations from their favorite childhood movies. But which familiar sights can we expect to see? Here is every track confirmed in the game so far. There was plenty to get excited about in February’s Nintendo Direct, from news on Xenoblade Chronicles 3 to a new trailer for Kirby and the Forgotten Land. But one of the most surprising reveals was a new Disney-themed kart-racer titled Disney Speedstorm. The free-to-play game lets fans hit the tarmac with their favorite Disney and Pixar characters, including Mickey Mouse and Sulley, each with their own unique abilities. But no great racer is complete without interesting tracks to crash your way through. Luckily, Disney Speedstorm has levels inspired by some of the most beloved Disney movies of all time. Here’s everyone that has been confirmed so far. Monsters, Inc. One of the circuits that featured heavily in the reveal trailer was centered around the titular Monsters, Inc. factory from the 2001 movie. Fans will be able to spot plenty of nods to the film surrounding the high-speed track. The magical doors that the company uses to harness screams can be seen whizzing past the side of the road, while a CDA van is also parked perilously close to the action. There are bound to be even more recognizable objects and easter eggs to spot, once players can see the track in all its glory. Pirates of the Caribbean Perhaps the most distinct location in the whole Disney Speedstorm reveal was the swashbuckling Pirates of the Caribbean track. With the unmistakable skull and crossbones logo plastered over the finish line, it’s almost impossible to miss. This circuit looks to place racers right in the middle of the film’s epic battles. Cannonballs fly overhead, while battered ships are littered around the edge of the track. Could we even catch a glimpse of the infamous Black Pearl? Jungle Book If you were worried that Disney Speedstorm was forgetting the old-school animations, then fear not. A luscious, green stage based on the 1967 classic is to be included at launch, in one of the more striking tracks confirmed so far. There are plenty of interesting POIs to break up the shrubbery, including stone ruins and even Mowgli’s village. Not that they’ll look like much more than a blur when you’re shooting past them in a nitro-fulled go-kart. Beauty and the Beast Some locations across Disney’s huge back catalog feel tailor-made for a high octane race track, and Beast’s mansion is certainly one of them. One of the more chaotic levels announced so far, this colorful circuit brings the magic of the 1992 fan-favorite to life. Swirling teacups, swinging pendulums, and even the enchanted rose are all here, lovingly recreated to make for a visual spectacle. Still no sign of Gaston just yet, though. Hercules The final circuit announced so far in Disney Speedstorm promises a race through the clouds. Blink and you’ll miss it in the trailer, but eagle-eyed fans will have been able to spot a quick frame showing Mount Olympus from Hercules. Read More: Best party games to play on Switch, Xbox, PS4 & PS5 in 2022 This shiny speedway is decorated by statues of Greek gods and gold-tinted pantheons. But the best news is that a handy barrier surrounding the track keeps players on course, which means we won’t be subjected to any Rainbow Road-style anger. More and more tracks are set to be revealed ahead of release, and after launch with each new season. We’ll update this hub with every new level that gets announced, so be sure to check back here for all the latest info. For more on the biggest upcoming games, check out these other guides: Hogwarts Legacy | Forspoken | Assassin’s Creed Infinity | Hollow Knight Silksong | Sonic Frontiers | God of War Ragnarok | Gotham Knights | Wolverine | Final Fantasy 16 | BioShock 4 |

Every subclass in D&D’s new 2024 Player’s Handbook Wizards of the Coast/Andrey KuzinskiyA new Player’s Handbook is coming to D&D, with a fresh line-up of subclasses for you to choose from for your next adventurer. In D&D 5E, the subclass system lets you refine your character’s powers, separating them from every other knight and sellsword in the world. A few classes got shafted, as the 2014 Player’s Handbook only had two subclasses each for the Bard, Druid, and Sorcerer, giving them way fewer options. The 2024 D&D Player’s Handbook will feature 48 subclasses, with each class receiving four. This means that some classes got brand new options, while others had some taken away, at least until they appear in a future book. These are every subclass confirmed to appear in the 2024 Player’s Handbook: Barbarian The rage-fuelled nature warrior chooses their subclass at level 3. These subclasses are known as “Path of the…” and they grant the Barbarian a range of new combat abilities or spell-like powers. The Barbarian subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Path of the Berserker: Warriors specializing in using their rage to its fullest power. – Path of the Wild Heart: Nature worshipers who manifest the power of mystical animal spirits. – Path of the World Tree: Yggdrasil’s cosmic magic empowers these warriors, giving mastery over movement. – Path of the Zealot: Users of divine magic, where war gods empower their blows with righteous fury. – Bard D&D’s magical music makers only received two subclasses in the 2014 Player’s Handbook. This time around, Bard players will have two more options for the silliest and accidentally strongest class in the game. The Bard subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: College of Dance: Bards who use movement and magic to encircle their foes in battle. – College of Glamour: Specialists in Enchantment spells, using the power of the Feywild to ensnare the minds of enemies. – College of Lore: Masters of magic, who can steal spells from other class lists and add them to their own. – College of Valour: Warrior poets who fight on the front lines and embolden their allies with rallying cries. – Cleric The most powerful healing class has lost a few Domains in the latest Player’s Handbook, as the Cleric’s Knowledge, Nature, and Tempest subclasses didn’t make the cut. Instead, they have revamped versions of existing Domains. The Cleric subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Life Domain: Unparalleled masters of healing and resurrection magic. – Light Domain: Wielders of holy flame and destroyers of the undead. – Trickery Domain: Masters of deception and skilled at misdirection. – War Domain: Frontline healers who don’t mind getting their hands bloody. – Druid The 2014 Player’s Handbook only included two subclasses for the binders of primal energy. This number has doubled in the new book, with one Druid subclass that has never been printed anywhere before! The Druid subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Circle of the Land: Those who draw their spells from the environment they’re most connected to. – Circle of the Moon: Shapeshifters with the power to transform into mighty animals. – Circle of the Sea: Controllers of the storm and the best ally to have on aquatic adventures. – Circle of the Stars: Cosmic watchers with the ability to summon the power of the stars into their body and unleash it onto the world. – Fighter The D&D Fighter is receiving a ton of new options in the 2014 Player’s Handbook, thanks to the new Weapon Mastery system, which means their regular attacks can do a lot more. They’re also getting a psionic subclass in the new Player’s Handbook. The Fighter subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Battle Master: Skilled fighters who utilize advanced tricks and strategies to overcome foes. – Champion: The best beginner class in the game, with static options that make you stronger without a lot of planning on the part of the player. – Eldritch Knight: Soldiers who add arcane knowledge to their skillset, so they can enchant their gear and throw spells in combat. – Psi Warrior: Natural telepaths with the ability to augment their offense and defense with telekinetic fury. – Monk The Monk might be one of the most fearsome classes in Baldur’s Gate 3, but it’s always had a polarizing response in D&D 5E. To this end, the Monk has received some major buffs in the new Player’s Handbook, along with a new subclass. The Monk subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Warrior of Mercy: Masters of their life force, with the power to heal or harm with a touch. – Warrior of Shadow: Ninjas in all but name, who use shadow magic to evade their foes. – Warrior of The Elements: Mystic warriors who can use their Ki to cast spells. – Warrior of The Open Hand: Unparalleled masters of unarmed combat, who pummel their foes into submission with countless blows. – Paladin Paladins are the knights whose loyalty to a cause is so strong that it actually gives them divine powers. Just don’t expect to see any Oathbreaker Paladins in the 2024 Player’s Handbook, as that’s currently a Baldur’s Gate 3 exclusive thing. The Paladin subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Oath of Devotion: The most Lawful Good character of them all, wielding the might of the heavens to annihilate any fiends who dare approach them. – Oath of Glory: Like the warriors of Greek mythology, these Paladins are peerless athletes and lovers of personal combat. – Oath of The Ancients: Protectors of nature and forgotten ruins, with Primal and Divine magic aiding their blade. – Oath of Vengeance: Paladins who eschew protecting love and choose to destroy evil. Luckily, they have the divine blessing and power to support their mandate. – Ranger Easily the worst class in the 2014 Player’s Handbook, the Ranger has been reworked in the new rulebook, receiving an incredibly positive response from players during the Unearthed Arcana playtest phase. These nature warriors will finally live up to Drizzt Do’Urden’s overpowered example. The Ranger subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Beast Master: Once they form a bond with a primal spirit, these Rangers can unleash its fury in battle. – Fey Wanderer: A connection with the Feywild gives these Rangers the ability to addle the minds of their foes and summon powerful fairies to their side. – Gloom Stalker: The wilderness is at its most dangerous in the dark, but for these Rangers, this is when they’re at their best, using the gloom to their advantage. – Hunter: Masters of two weapons and a bow. This is the peak performance for a Ranger ever since the old days. – Rogue The sneakiest class in the game and one of the deadliest allies to have in a fight, the Rogue is back in business. Like the Fighter, they have a psionic subclass joining their options in the new Player’s Handbook. The Rogue subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Arcane Trickster: Masters of the Mage Hand Cantrip, who utilize spells to improve their sneaking prowess. – Assassin: If they get the drop on the enemy with their poisoned weapons, the battle is as good as won. – Soulknife: Basically Psylocke from the X-Men, using psionic daggers to strike the minds of their opponents. – Thief: The best scouts and treasure hunters in the game, with a knack for avoiding deadly traps. – Sorcerer Each Sorcerer in D&D has a natural affinity for magic, more so than any other class. The 2014 Player’s Handbook only had two subclass options for the Sorcerer, meaning that lots of Wild Magic Surges have happened over the years, but they receive more in the new book. The Sorcerer subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Aberrant Sorcery: Their connection to Lovecraftian horrors not only grants psionic powers, but a few spells from the Warlock list. – Clockwork Sorcery: The law is a magical force utilized by these Sorcerers, who gain Cleric spells and the ability to tilt the odds in their favor. – Draconic Sorcery: Their ancestor is a dragon, which means they gain elemental resilience and gradually unlock the powers of a wyrm. – Wild Magic: Chaos flows through their veins, allowing them to screw with probability. Unfortunately, this means their own spells can be unpredictable. – Warlock Instead of going to magic school, the D&D Warlocks signed on the dotted line and made a deal with a higher power for arcane might. One of these days, their new boss is going to start calling in favors, but until then, the Warlocks are free to use their gifted power as they see fit. The Warlock subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Archfey Patron: If you make a deal with a ruler of the Feywild, you get teleportation and fey spells. – Celestial Patron: If you make a deal with an angel, you receive healing and buffing spells. – Fiend Patron: If you make a deal with a demon or a devil, you can wield the power of the hells to deceive and destroy enemies. – Great Old One Patron: If you make a deal with an unknowable being from the Far Realms, you can use forbidden knowledge to overwhelm your foes with inexplicable magic. – Wizard Those who learn arcane spells and become specialists in one of the eight magical schools. Like the Cleric, the D&D Wizard lost four subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook, as Conjuration, Enchantment, Necromancy, and Transmutation are gone. They’ll likely return in a future book, considering how long they’ve been part of the game. The Wizard subclasses in the 2024 Player’s Handbook are: Abjurer: Those with spells that create barriers and can dispel outsiders back to their home plane. – Diviner: Those who use magic to see things that are far away and gain glimpses of the future. – Evoker: Those who command the elements and use them to destroy monsters. – Illusionist: Those who create realistic fabrications that can fool the senses of others. – To learn more about the new edition of D&D, check out our guide to every new book coming in 2024, our exclusive look at the new Monster Manual’s alternate artwork, and the changes to D&D Beyond ahead of the new books.

Every skin we want to see in Marvel Rivals NetEase / MarvelWith heroes and villains from the original Earth-616 and beyond joining the fray, Marvel Rivals is going to have no shortage of cosmetic options for players to choose from. Although there have only been a few skins rumored for the game so far, there’s plenty of variety and alternate costumes from the 85 years of Marvel comic history. So, we’ve rounded up our favorite possibilities for every character announced in the Marvel Rivals roster. Iron Man Iron Man is undoubtedly one of Marvel’s most iconic heroes. Behind the suit, Tony Stark is head of Stark Industries, a pioneer in innovation, and technically, the leader of the Avengers, too. Iron Man’s abilities are only limited by Stark’s imaginative ideas and his capacity to turn them into reality. Which, considering he’s filthy rich and the head of one of the world’s biggest engineering and tech firms, isn’t that hard for him really. This means the character has appeared in dozens of different suits throughout both the comics and the cinematic universe. Marvel Rivals has gone for what looks like the Mark 85 Iron Man suit from Avengers: Endgame. An earlier version of Stark’s suit, like the Mark V from Iron Man 2 would make a great alternative skin. Bruce Banner/Hulk The other side of mild-mannered scientist Bruce Banner, the Hulk came into being after a bomb field test went awry, Banner was bathed in gamma radiation. Although he survived the explosion, the unintended side-effect is that any time he loses control of his emotions, he becomes a mean, green, muscle machine. Despite his intimidating mood swings, Hulk has served on quite a few superhero organizations in his Marvel Career. Besides the Avengers, he’s also worked with the Defenders and he’s affiliated with Marvel’s Illuminati, too. The classic green Hulk in the shredded denim jeans in the skin the character is launching within Marvel Rivals. But surprisingly, Hulk has had his fair share of costume changes through the years. The one we’d like to see show up as a skin in Rivals the most is definitely his World War Hulk costume. Black Panther The Black Panther is the ultimate warrior, armored in a suit of pure Vibranium, an ore unique to the secret nation of Wakanda that possesses near-magical properties. With his catlike reflexes, superior armor, weapons, and tech, the Black Panther, T’Chala protects his people, and serves as Wakanda’s ruler. Sometimes he even lends the Avengers a hand to protect the rest of Earth too. Marvel Rivals is definitely taking heavy inspiration from Black Panther’s MCU incarnation. But while, T’Challa serves as the Black Panther for most of Marvel’s story arcs, we’d love to see Kasper Cole’s Dark-Knight-esque outfit from Black Panther #50 make it into the game someday. Loki The god of mischief, prince of Asgard, foster-brother of Thor, and burdened with glorious purpose. He’s a master of illusion magic, shapeshifting, and hypnosis, and not too shabby with a pair of daggers. Marvel’s Loki isn’t exactly pure evil. He’s a trickster. And he’s not averse to switching sides, so long as it benefits him, of course. Loki’s Asgardian armor and helm is the look the character will launch within Marvel Rivals. That said, we’re very down to see a casual TVA Loki skin as an option eventually. Spider-Man Everyone’s favorite web-slinging, crime-fighting, photojournalist. Peter Parker’s amazing Spider-Man is one of Marvel’s oldest characters. First appearing in the 1960s, Spider-man has served as part of the Avengers, the Fantastic Four, and of course that’s on top of his normal neighborhood rounds. It looks like we can expect the classic blue and red Spider-Man suit for the character at launch. That said, if we could pick any alternate spider costume for Marvel Rivals, Wolf Spider from Ultimate Spiderman, aka Peter Parker from Earth-16827, would be it. Star Lord Peter Quill, aka Star Lord, half-human, half-alien leader of the Guardians of the Galaxy. Intergalactic rogue and perpetual wise guy. In the comics, Peter Quill joins NASA, but he eventually ditches the astronaut life to take up the mantle of “Star Lord”, even if that wasn’t exactly what NASA had planned for him. In the MCU he ends up in the stars after being abducted by Yondu’s crew. It’s the MCU look that Marvel Rivals has picked for Star Lord at the game’s launch. But, we wouldn’t complain if Quill’s Dirty Dozen costume showed up as a skin one day. Rocket Racoon This trash panda is scathing, and satirical, and he always shoots first. Rocket Racoon is the result of genetic engineering and neglect. He served plenty of time around the solar system before teaming up with Groot and the rest of the Guardians of the Galaxy as their trigger-happy demolitions expert. Like the other Guardians in Marvel Rivals, Rocket is appearing in what looks to be a pretty close approximation of his MCU costume. But if there’s one Rocket Racoon skin we want to see make it into the game, it’s his slick white suit from the 2020 Guardians of the Galaxy reboot. Groot Unlike some of the other heroes on this list, Groot barely needs an introduction thanks to his appearance in the MCU’s Guardians of the Galaxy films. Weighing in at 8,000 pounds at full power, and able to grow to a height of 23 feet tall, the stalwart companion of Rocket Raccoon, all of Groot’s abilities are drawn from his physical body, made of powerful dendronic wood which makes him all but impervious to most physical attacks. Of course, we want what every sane person would want. To beat people up in a baby Groot skin. Mantis One of the Guardian of the Galaxy’s founding members, Mantis was raised by pacifist, alien priestesses and trained in the ways of their otherworldly magic. With both telepathic and empathic abilities, and the power to talk to plants, Mantis serves alongside the other Guardians, protecting Earth from intergalactic threats. It looks like Mantis is donning her Guardians of the Galaxy costume from the MCU in Marvel Rivals, and we’re certainly not complaining! But we’d also love to see the woven leather threads designed for the character Mantis A3 costume in Guardians of the Galaxy 2. A variant on her original costume design would also be nice to see eventually. Dr. Strange From the world’s best surgeon to the world’s best wizard. Dr. Stephen Strange is the Earth’s Sorcerer Supreme, is the world’s primary defense against incursions from malevolent, magical beings. Able to wield the immensely powerful Eye of Agamoto and sporting his trusty cloak of levitation, Strange uses the mystical occult arts to help Earth’s heroes. In Marvel Rivals, Dr. Strange’s classic skin looks to be a clear match for the outfit worn by Benedict Cumberbatch in the MCU. However, we’d love to see Stephen in the villainous vibes of his Midnight Sons outfit too. Scarlet Witch Marvel’s Lady in Red. The Scarlet Witch is undoubtedly one of the most powerful characters in the Marvel Universe. A master of the mystic arts, Wanda Maximoff has played both the hero and the villain in a huge number of storylines. Scarlet Witch’s Marvel Rivals costume looks to be something of an original creation. Sort of like a fusion between her MCU costume and her threads in Wolverine and the X-Men. We’d love to see a version of the medieval Merlin Wanda skin from What If make an appearance eventually. And of course, it’s hard to go past the classic Scarlet Witch look too. Storm Ororo Munroe aka Storm, is one of the veteran X-Men. Appearing in the series and the majority of its spinoffs since 1975. The wise weather-witch has led the X-Men, married Black Panther, she’s even been a vampire for a little while. There’s not many Marvel heroes with as many story arcs under their belt as Storm. Judging from the gameplay footage, Storm is appearing in Marvel Rivals in a fit similar to her 2022 Marauders costume. Which is a nice pick to be sure. Still, we’d love to see a Mohawk Storm skin eventually, and maybe even a classic 90s X-Men style look for her too. Luna Snow Earth-616’s superhuman K-Pop sensation. After a run-in with A.I.M agents during a concert grants her elemental affinity, Luna Snow, wields the powers of ice to keep Earth-616 safe. With the ability to both harm and heal with her dark and light ice manipulation, Luna’s looking like she might be a good fit for support players. The Korean-born member of the Agents of Atlas has plenty of skin potential thanks to her double life on the stage. A skin featuring her denim-cutoff costume from her solo one-shot comic would be a treat. But we wouldn’t go past her kick ass Tiger Division suit either. Peni Parker Earth-14512’s Peni Parker is almost like a meld of Spiderman and Shinji from the cult classic anime, Neon Genesis Evangelion. Although she actually gets into the robot, which is better known as the SP//dr Suit. After losing her father as a young child, Peni takes up his mantle, finishing her father’s work and climbing into her spider robot suit. Her ability to pilot the suit comes from a radioactive spider with whom she shares a genetic bond… we’re sure you see the similarities. We’d love to see a cute version of the scrapped Peni Plug suit and her school uniform and windbreaker concept make their way into the game eventually. Magik Another hero from the original Earth-616, Magik is the mutant Illyana Rasputin, the younger sibling of Colossus. With her superior swordsmanship and ability to teleport. Born into a family of mutants, Illyana has the innate power to teleport herself and allies across interstellar distances. Her powers are corrupted by demonic energy after she’s trapped on Limbo. Eventually, she creates the immensely powerful Soulsword, escapes, and joins her brother alongside the X-Men in the New Mutants arc. We’re expecting to see Magik in all her All New, All Different mutant glory as her classic skin. But we’d absolutely love to see the amazing Phoenix Five-inspired Marvel Snap art made into a custom skin for her. Namor Prince Namor aka the Sub-Mariner, is one of Earth-616’s most interesting anti-heroes. Most recently appearing in the MCU’s Wakanda Forever, Namor’s not quite a villain, but not always the good guy either. The prince’s toolkit comes with telepathic abilities thanks to his half-Atlantean heritage, and the ability to fly. Oh, did we mention he’s the guardian of one if the infinity stones? From what we’ve seen of Namor from the trailer and promo art, it looks like his Marvel Rival appearances is taking some inspiration from his look in Wakanda Forever, as well as a touch of Defenders of the Deep. Still, we’d love to see the prince in one of his hero fits, like the black and white sleeveless suit he sports in Origins of Marvel Comics: X-Men. Magneto Born amid the chaos of World War II and imprisoned in Auschwitz, Max Eisenhardt eventually revolts against his Nazi captors and escapes. A freedom-fighter at heart, he rallies other oppressed mutants to his cause. Subjugating mankind beneath mutant-rule. Still, like many Marvel villains, he doesn’t always play the straight bad guy. Wielding the ability to control magnetic fields, Magneto bends metal as easily as he bends the rules, and that’s why he’s one of Marvel’s most compelling characters. From the gameplay trailer, Magneto’s outfit looks to be taking some inspiration his Uncanny X-Men suit. However, we’re definitely keen to see his Dawn of X suit, or Age of Apocalypse costume as options. The Punisher When it comes to iconic anti-heroes, it’s hard to go past the Punisher. Frank Castle’s charm in the Marvel Universe comes from his lack of super, superpowers. Instead, his superpowers are his wits, his experience as an ex-marine, and a whole lotta guns. Frank Castle plays judge, jury, and executioner against some of Marvel’s baddest crooks, dishing out his unique brand of brutal justice. Marvel Rivals looks like it’s taking some inspiration from War Machine Punisher for the character’s skin at launch. While a classic skull-shirt Punisher skin would be great, the one we’re really hoping for is Franken Castle.

Every Showcase card in Star Wars Unlimited LucasfilmShowcase cards are the most valuable in Star Wars Unlimited thanks to their stunning, original artwork, along with their extraordinary rarity. Here’s the full collection across every set thus far. Opening boosters for any Trading Card Game (TCG) is always a thrill. Not only are you seeking cards to complete your decks, but with every pack comes the chance of pulling something special. Whether it’s Enchanted cards in Disney’s Lorcana, The One Ring in Magic The Gathering, or a 26-year-old Pokemon card, each game has its rarest inclusions, and Star Wars Unlimited is no different. For Star Wars Unlimited, there’s nothing more special than a Showcase card. Although they function no differently from regular Leader cards, their staggering rarity has seen them all fly up the most-expensive cards list in no time at all. On average, the odds are one Showcase card for every 12 Booster Boxes. That’s right, Boxes, not packs. So in total, one Showcase for every 288 Booster packs you open, or a 1 in 4,608 (0.0217%) chance. Naturally, with odds like these, Showcases are the most sought-after in the community. There’s a chance you haven’t even seen some of them, especially with Set 2 only just coming into focus. With 18 brand-new Leaders shaking up the meta, that means 18 brand-new Showcase cards as well. So here’s the full rundown, with a look at every single Showcase card in Star Wars Unlimited today. All Star Wars Unlimited Set 1: Spark of Rebellion Showcase cards All Star Wars Unlimited Set 2: Shadows of the Galaxy Showcase cards With three new Sets releasing every year moving forward, there are plenty more Showcase cards set to shake things up in Star Wars Unlimited. Rest assured, we’ll keep you updated right here with all the latest additions as they emerge.

Every set in the LEGO Winter Village Collection LEGOThe LEGO Winter Village Collection remains a fan favorite. We’ve collated a list of each set currently available and where you can buy them. Since its inception, the LEGO Winter Village Collection has become an annual highlight on many brick builders’ calendars. Each set offers a smile-inducing building experience, which you and your family can immerse yourselves in the festivities of the holiday season. They also make for great display pieces. Whether you stay at home in anticipation of Santa’s visit or head out to the streets to do some shopping and celebrate with others, there is a LEGO Winter Village set for everyone (aged 18 and up, that is). However, no matter which one you choose, you will undoubtedly want to complete your collection. ICONS Holiday Main Street — 10308 The holiday season is a great time to get out and share in the festivities with family, friends, and, yes, even strangers. So grab a Minifigure and head out on Main Street to share the holiday spirit with the other Minifigures included in this festive set. What Minifigures can you expect? The ensemble includes a total of six Minifigures. These include: A pair of shoppers – A duo of store owners – Tram driver – A young child, who can’t wait to mail their letter to Santa Claus (here’s hoping they were good this year) – If you were good this year, this set is a great addition to your LEGO collection, especially if you already own the other two sets in LEGO’s Winter Village collection. Comprising 1514 pieces, the set features a toy shop and a music shop, where you can buy gifts and instruments to accompany carols. Apartments are located at the top of the former and latter shops. The tallest one measures four inches in height, three inches wide, and seven inches deep. To add a dynamic element to the kit, the tram, complete with seating for four and Christmas decorations, can be motorized and run on tracks. All you have to do is add LEGO Powered Up sets and tracks to your basket upon checkout, and, soon, you’ll be making your way home to catch Santa Claus. The tram measures four inches tall, six and a half inches long, and seven inches wide. It’s worth noting that the set, designed for ages 18 and up, features several small pieces. So it’s best to keep the little ones preoccupied with their own LEGO, such as the Duplo Santa’s Gingerbread House, which we included in our best Christmas and holiday sets list. ICONS Santa’s Visit — 10293 This LEGO Icons set is sure to make your Christmas Eve extra special. So plate the cookies and pour a glass of milk, Santa Claus is coming to visit. If you haven’t, no worries — the set includes the former and latter, in addition to myriad other unique elements. A great addition to this set is that the Christmas tree lights up when pressing town on the tree top. But what about a battery? Should you add that to your Christmas list? No, a battery is included. Another neat feature of this set, as ol’ Saint Nick loves to do, is you can recreate the scene of him sliding down the chimney when delivering your eagerly-anticipated presents. Once he has stuffed the stockings, you can invite him to join you next to the fireplace or at the dinner table with the Minifigures of mom, dad, and daughter. Who knows, maybe Santa will bring you this LEGO set (if you are good, that is). However, if you can’t wait to grab this set (or anticipate being on his Naughty List), it’s best to get it sooner rather than later, as this set will soon be retired, along with several others. Designed for ages 18+, this 1445-piece set measures eight inches tall, 11 inches wide, and seven inches in depth. ICONS Alpine Lodge — 10325 Following this year, a holiday away sounds like the best of plans. So, why not take a trip to an Alpine Ski Lodge? Everyone can go. However, designed for builders aged 18 and up, it’s best to keep the kids preoccupied during the building adventure. A LEGO exclusive, this 1517-piece set elicits the feeling of a cozy winter wonderland. The five Minifigures can go for rides on the snowmobile and skate, while the cat chases around the squirrels and birds. Following a day of excitement, everyone can retire to the three-story lodge and sit next to the log fire, which, when pressing down the chimney, illuminates (best not to get it going if you are expecting Santa to come around). In addition, there’s another illuminating log fire for those who called dibs on the guest room located on the second floor of the nine-inch tall, 10-inch wide, and seven-inch deep brick building. If you click on a product link on this page, we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every PS5 launch title confirmed so far: what you can play on day one CD Projekt Red / Insomniac / Bluepoint GamesWith the PlayStation 5 hitting stores on November 12, here are the list of games that consumers will be able to play on the next-gen Sony console on day one. The PS5 hype is real! [jwplayer hRlzg0BA] The next-generation of gaming is finally upon us, as Microsoft and Sony are set to release their newest consoles in November after a lengthy wait full of rumors, teases, and anticipation. The PlayStation 5 drops on November 12 in the USA, and will feature six first-party titles. Here are all the games you can play on PS5 launch day. Everything you can play on PS5 at launch Sony is jumping into the next generation with several releases from their first-party studios. Top of the list is Insomniac Games, who was recently purchased by the Japanese company for $229 million dollars. The newly-acquired studio is kicking things off with the wildly-anticipated Spider-Man sequel Miles Morales. The other marquee title for PlayStation is the remake of FromSoftware’s Demon’s Souls by Bluepoint Games. The iconic title is responsible for starting the iconic Soulsborne franchise, and is being made from the ground up with lush visuals and high framerate. Every PS5 will also come installed with Astro’s Playroom. The fleshed-out tech demo is based on hit 2018 PSVR release Astro Bot Rescue Mission, and will be a showcase for the system’s new DualSense controller. Here all the titles you will be able play at the PlayStation 5’s launch. First-party titles Astro’s Playroom – Demon’s Souls – Destruction All Stars – Marvel’s Spider-Man: Miles Morales – Sackboy: A Big Adventure – Marvel’s Spider-Man Remastered (Only included in Miles Morales Ultimate Edition, or upgrading to Miles Morales PS5 edition) – The PS5 will launch with a wealth of third-party releases too. Almost all of them from Ubisoft’s Assassin’s Creed Valhalla, to Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War will feature next-gen editions with massive upgrades. Third-party releases Assassin’s Creed: Valhalla – Bugsnax – Cyberpunk 2077* (Releases on November 19, which is technically PS5’s worldwide launch) – Call of Duty: Black Ops – Cold War* (Releases one day after PS5 launch on November 13) – Devil May Cry 5: Special Edition – Destiny 2: Beyond Light – Godfall – Fortnite – Maneater – NBA2K21 – Observer: System Redux – The Pathless – Watch Dogs Legion – One of the major announcements during Sony’s September conference is that PS+ subscribers will get the PlayStation Plus Collection on PS5 bundled with their subscription. The massive library of games gives new owners a slice of the PlayStation 4’s greatest games on the new generation. Here’s what’s included: Battlefield 1 – Batman: Arkham Knight – Bloodborne – Days Gone – Detroit: Become Human – Fallout 4 – Final Fantasy 15 – God of War (2018) – Infamous: Second Son – Monster Hunter World – Mortal Kombat 10 – Persona 5 – Ratchet and Clank – Resident Evil 7 – The Last of Us: Remastered – The Last Guardian – Uncharted 4: A Thief’s End – Until Dawn – Whether you love Sony’s first-party titles or not, there are a wealth of major AAA titles to choose from for the PS5’s launch. Cyberpunk alone is set to take up hundreds of hours for most players. While we will have to wait a bit longer for the truly “next-gen” titles, players will get to experience the best performance of these games on their new PlayStation console.

Every PSVR2 game: Full launch lineup, new games in development, PC ports, more SonyWith Sony’s next generational leap in virtual reality hardware now upon us, we’ve put together a complete list of every single game in development for the PS VR2. From all the titles we got on launch day to a range of upcoming projects, here’s what you need to know. With the launch of the PS VR2 comes a new chapter in the realm of VR. Through advanced haptic feedback, improved graphical fidelity, and most importantly, new games now in the works, PS5 owners can now be treated to all-new experiences. While the launch lineup itself was stacked with a few dozen new releases and highly anticipated ports, that’s just the beginning for what PS VR2 has in store. Many more games are currently in development for the months and years ahead, so let’s take a look over every PS VR2 game on the way. Contents PS VR2 launch lineup: Every game that was available on day one For those that cracked open the PS VR2 box on the very first day, a number of new experiences were available right away. The obvious headliner was none other than Horizon Call of the Mountain, a new game in the Horizon universe built from the ground up for PS VR2. If you’re looking for a AAA experience to start with, there’s no looking past Call of the Mountain. Similar can be said for the likes of Gran Turismo 7 and Resident Evil Village, two massive titles that both received the PS VR2 treatment on day one. But if you’d rather jump in with fresh and exciting indies, there was also plenty on offer for you too. Pistol Whip, Cosmonious High, Moss & Moss: Book II, and Demeo were just a handful of projects that arrived on launch day. Below is a full list of every PS VR2 launch title that fans were able to enjoy on day one: After The Fall – Altair Breaker – Cities VR – Cosmonious High – Creed: Rise to Glory – Demeo – Drums Rock – Dyschronia: Chronos Alternate – Fantavision 202X – Gran Turismo 7 – Horizon Call of the Mountain – Job Simulator – Jurassic World Aftermath Collection – Kayak VR: Mirage – Kizuna AI – Touch the Beat! – Moss – Moss Book II – NFL Pro Era – No Man’s Sky – Pavlov VR – Pistol Whip – Puzzling Places – Resident Evil Village – Rez Infinite – Runner – Song in the Smoke: Rekindled – Startenders: Intergalactic Bartending – Star Wars: Tales from the Galaxy’s Edge – Synth Riders: Remastered Edition – Tentacular – Tetris Effect Connected – The Last Clockwinder – The Light Brigade – The Tale of Onogoro – Thumper – Townsmen VR – Vacation Simulator – What the Bat? – Zenith: The Last City – Zombieland: Headshot Fever Reloaded – PS VR2 games released in launch window Next up came the games that weren’t quite ready for launch day, but projects that kept the hype train on its tracks in the weeks and months that followed. Among the launch window slate was the likes of The Walking Dead Saints & Sinners Chapter 2, Resident Evil 4, and plenty of others. Below is the full list of every PS VR2 launch window release: March 10: Before Your Eyes – March 16: The Dark Pictures: Switchback VR – March 16: Gorn – March 21: The Walking Dead: Saints & Sinners Chapters 1 & 2 – March 24: Resident Evil 4 – March 30: The Last Worker – May 11: Walkabout Mini Golf – May 25: Hello Neighbor: Search and Rescue – June 15: Pixel Ripped 1978 – June 21: VR Skater – June 23: C-Smash VRS – July 4: Synapse – Upcoming PS VR 2 games Last but not least, we know of a few particular games in development for the PS VR2, but some that are yet to receive even rough release windows. The likes of Arizona Sunshine 2 and Ghostbusters: Rise of the Ghost Lord fall under this section as while they’re definitely coming, we don’t know when to expect them. Below is a complete look ahead at every upcoming PS VR2 game we know about thus far: August 4: VR Skater – August 15: Green Hell VR – August 24: Firewall Ultra – August 29: Crossfire: Sierra Squad – September 21: Hellsweeper VR – TBA: Aces of Thunder – TBA: Among Us VR – TBA: Another Fisherman’s Tale – TBA: Arizona Sunshine 2 – TBA: Behemoth – TBA: Bulletstorm VR – TBA: Colossal Cave – TBA: Crossfire: Sierra Squad – TBA: Firewall Ultra – TBA: Five Nights at Freddy’s: Help Wanted 2 – TBA: Ghostbusters: Rise of the Ghost Lord – TBA: Journey to Foundation – TBA: Madison – TBA: Phasmophobia – TBA: Sushi Ben – TBA: The Foglands – TBA: Vampire: The Masquerade – Justice – TBA: Wanderer: The Fragments of Fate – TBA: X8 – So that’s all there is to know about every PS VR2 game currently in development. Rest assured, we’ll keep you posted here with any further announcements over the coming weeks.

Every Pokemon confirmed in Pokemon Legends Z-A trailer The Pokemon CompanyPokemon Legends Z-A packed a lot of fan favorites into its reveal trailer. Here’s every Pokemon confirmed to be in the game so far. Pokemon Day 2024 shocked fans with the announcement of Pokemon Legends Z-A. While many expected a new Johto or Unova title, this looks to be a Kalos game in the vein of Pokemon Legends Arceus. While we don’t know too much about Pokemon Legends Z-A just yet – outside of the return of Mega Evolution – the trailer includes quite a few Pokemon that will presumably appear in Lumiose City. Every Pokemon confirmed for Legends Z-A Here is every Pokemon included in Pokemon Legends Z-A’s reveal trailer, organized by region: Generation 1 Arbok – Pikachu – Bellsprout – Onix – Staryu – Pinsir – Gyarados – Eevee – Dragonair – Generation 2 Heracross – Mantine – Generation 4 Hippopotas – Generation 5 Sandile – Krookodile – Emolga – Generation 6 Fletchling – Fletchinder – Talonflame – Litleo – Pyroar – Flabébé – Gogoat – Furfrou – Espurr – Aegislash – Sylveon – Hawlucha – Klefki – Noibat – Noivern – There are also some Pokemon in the background that we couldn’t definitively identify. We’ve described them along with our best guesses below: Red bug on the side of a building (possibly Ariados or Yanma) – Large beige humanoid with darker head (possibly Pangoro) – Red quadruped in front of Prism Tower (possibly Pyroar or Mudsdale – Dark green creature in front of Prism Tower (possibly Tyrannitar) – That’s all of the Pokemon we spotted in the Legends Z-A trailer! While you wait for more info on the upcoming games, check out our Pokemon Scarlet & Violet guides below: Paldea Pokedex | All returning Pokemon in Scarlet & Violet’s DLC: Hidden Treasure of Area Zero | How to start Pokemon Scarlet & Violet: The Indigo Disk DLC | How to get Archaludon in Pokemon Scarlet & Violet DLC | How to get Kubfu and Urshifu in Pokemon Scarlet & Violet | Pokemon Scarlet & Violet: The Indigo Disk – Every legendary Pokemon & how to catch them | Pokemon Scarlet & Violet: How to unlock flying with Koraidon and Miraidon | How to use Synchro Machine in Pokemon Scarlet & Violet: The Indigo Disk | Unlocking 5 & 6-star Tera Raids in Pokemon Scarlet & Violet | Sandwich recipes in Pokemon Scarlet & Violet

All playable characters in Harry Potter: Quidditch Champions & how to unlock them Warner Bros. GamesHarry Potter: Quidditch Champions will allow players to take control of their favorite characters from the franchise. Here is the list of confirmed playable heroes and villains from the series. Following the success of Avalanche Software’s Hogwarts Legacy, Portkey Games is aiming to capitalize on the hype with its own title, Harry Potter: Quidditch Champions, which released on September 3, 2024. Quidditch Champions is a new game focusing solely on the iconic Harry Potter sport, which was notably absent from Hogwarts Legacy. Fans of the franchise have been begging for this experience in recent years and will finally have their prayers answered. While players can customize their own Quidditch teams, they can also choose to play as their favorite characters from the Harry Potter books, films, and more. These are called Hero Skins and override most other customization options. Therefore, fans will be able to attempt to recreate Harry Potter’s iconic Seeker catches while another player uses Draco Malfoy and does all they can to stop the chosen one. Here are all the playable characters in Harry Potter: Quidditch Champions right now, along with their house and position. All Hero Skins & how to unlock There are currently 12 characters from the Harry Potter series included in Quidditch Champions, most of which must be unlocked through gameplay and in-game purchases. Here’s every Hero Skin and how to unlock it: That’s everything to know about Harry Potter: Quidditch Champions’ Hero Skins and how to get them all! For more on the game and all things Wizarding World, check out our guide on all the Easter eggs in the game and our list of the best Harry Potter games of all time.

Every perk in Splitgate 2 1047 GamesFan favorite shooter Splitgate is returning once more with its sequel, bringing new life to the arena shooter all about portals and physics. Here’s what we know about every perk in the game so far. Splitgate is finally making a comeback with its highly anticipated sequel. Splitgate 2 is the second coming of the original arena shooter that arrived five years ago. The title immediately saw success with players loving the idea of playing with portals in a competitive FPS setting. Of course, it wouldn’t be an FPS if there weren’t several perks you can bring to the table, which can shake up various aspects of your gameplay and give you the edge you need to triumph over your opponents. Keen to hop into Splitgate 2 early? We’ve got a list of all the perks available in the game at the moment. Splitgate 2: All perks Perks in Splitgate 2 are separated by faction, meaning that you can’t have your cake and eat it too. However, there are a few perks within each faction, giving you a choice of how you want to customize your playstyle from there. Here’s a list of every perk currently in Splitgate 2, separated by faction and its slot. Aeros Perk 1 Aeros Perk 2 Sabrask Perk 1 Sabrask Perk 2 Meridian Perk 1 Meridian Perk 2 That’s the full list as it stands in the Closed Alpha period. We’ll be sure to update you here with any changes in the leadup to the full 2025 release.

All Non-E3 events in 2023: Summer Game Fest, PlayStation & Xbox Games Showcase, more sony, microsoft, nintendo, canvaSummer Game Fest 2023 and some of the industry’s biggest names will present showcases that are set to headline the summer’s gaming season. Dubbed “Non-E3” events, here’s a handy guide to every major showcase taking place in Summer 2023 that we know of so far. It was regarded as a long time coming, but it looks like we may have seen the last of the E3 era. The iconic, yearly, multi-day game show event has been canceled for 2023. But fear not, if you’re still hungry for your exciting gaming reveals, gameplay fixes, and jaw-dropping surprises, there are still tons of other shows to check out. We understand that there’s a lot of content to keep track of. To try and make things easier, we’ve rounded up all the major Non-E3 event showcases taking place during the Summer of 2023. This includes the likes of Summer Game Fest as well as expected/rumored ones too. So let’s take a look at the times and dates available so far. Contents Summer Game Fest 2023 – PlayStation Showcase 2023 – Xbox Games Showcase 2023 – Starfield Showcase 2023 – PC Gaming Show 2023 – Nintendo Direct 2023 – Ubisoft Forward 2023 – Devolver Digital 2023 – Capcom Showcase 2023 – EA Play 2023 – Summer Game Fest 2023 Arguably the new de-facto Non-E3 event each year, Summer Game Fest is a giant celebration that lasts for several weeks and spans multiple shows and presentations. The show is centered around one main showcase though which takes place on June 8, 2023. Expect game announcements, celebrations of accomplishments, new trailers, and more. For a full walkthrough on how to watch the Summer Game Fest and what we might see, check out our in-depth guide to the event here. PlayStation Showcase 2023 After a nearly 2-year absence, the PlayStation Showcase 2023 saw the return of Sony’s marquee event on May 24, 2023. As with all previous PlayStation Showcase extravaganzas, there was a raft of first-party titles and announcements, and exclusive premieres and content announced for PlayStation users. Xbox Games Showcase 2023 Another annual showcase comes courtesy of Microsoft on June 11, 2023 at 10AM PT. The Xbox Games Showcase 2023 follows in the footsteps of other companies with its expected content. Fans of the green brand will be treated to game news, updates, and future additions to Xbox Game Pass, and so much more! Starfield Showcase 2023 If you’re watching the Xbox presentation on June 11, 2023, then you might want to stay tuned in for the Starfield Showcase 2023. Once the main Xbox Games Showcase has concluded, a special Starfield-only spotlight will keep the momentum going almost immediately as we build toward one of 2023’s biggest releases with a special in-depth look at the game. PC Gaming Show Once a staple of E3, the PC Gaming Show appears again this time following the Starfield showcase on June 11, 2023 at 1PM PT. It will feature 55 games and 15 game reveals including the confirmed appearances of Baldur’s Gate 3, Frostpunk 2, and a new project from Don’t Starve developer Klei Entertainment. Nintendo Direct 2023 Unconfirmed as yet, but we fully expect Nintendo to return with an epic Nintendo Direct Showcase as they do around this time each year as a Non-E3 event. This is always the special one that lasts anywhere between 40 mins and 1 hour. We’ll update you once we have official details regarding its announcement and date. Ubisoft Forward 2023 Another heavy hitter coming this Summer is Ubisoft Forward 2023. The French publisher will host its showcase on June 12, 2023 at 10 AM PT. With Assassin’s Creed Mirage on the horizon, this is looking to be an exciting event. Devolver Digital Showcase 2023 Amongst all the big names that appear each year, Devolver Digital’s Showcase has become a cult favorite due to its long-running storyline, dark humor, and satire toward the games industry. Thankfully for fans, the company will be back once again be hosting a new Showcase event on June 8, 2023 at 3 PM PT. Capcom Showcase 2023 Capcom is confirmed to be joining in on the fun with its Showcase event confirmed for June 12, 2023 at 3 PM PT. Further details on what to expect haven’t been revealed yet but possible game reveals include Monster Hunter, Exoprimal, Dragon’s Dogma 2, and Resident Evil. EA Play 2023 One showcase that might not even happen is EA Play 2023. After hosting an EA Play Live event in 2021, the software giant decided to hang fire on a new presentation in 2022. So, we’ll have to wait and see what Electronic Arts have up its sleeves, but it could still happen – especially with the likes EA Sports FC coming. That wraps up everything you need to know about every Non-E3 event on the way. Stay tuned at Dexerto and check out our gaming page for details on the hottest titles.

Every new Leader coming in Star Wars Unlimited Set 3: Twilight of the Republic LucasfilmA new Set means a fresh batch of Leaders. With Star Wars Unlimited Set 3: Twilight of the Republic next on the calendar, here’s the early rundown on every confirmed Leader we know about thus far. Star Wars Unlimited isn’t slowing down anytime soon. Hot on the heels of Set 2’s release, developers have already begun to spoil Set 3 well ahead of its November launch. From new mechanics to the first batch of cards, there’s already plenty we know about Twilight of the Republic, a Set focused entirely on the Clone Wars era. Though of course, it wouldn’t be a proper reveal without some Leaders topping it off. While only three have been revealed for now, they’re three bangers as our new starter deck Leaders have been thrust into the spotlight, Ahsoka Tano and General Grievous, alongside a Clone Wars-era Obi-Wan. To get you up to speed, here’s a complete look at every new Leader coming to Star Wars Unlimited with Set 3. Every confirmed Leader card in Star Wars Unlimited Set 2: Shadows of the Galaxy Ahsoka Tano – Snips General Grievous – General of the Droid Armies Obi-Wan Kenobi – Patient Mentor With only three Leaders revealed thus far, we’re sure to learn plenty more in the coming weeks. We’ll keep you up to speed right here as the remaining Leaders are revealed in the lead-up to Set 3’s November 2024 release.

All Need for Speed games in order EAAre you curious about the number of games in the Need for Speed series? Here’s everything you need to know about every entry in the beloved racing franchise so far. Need for Speed has always been about intense races filled with an exhilarating rush to finish first place. Ever since it came into existence in the mid-90s, Need for Speed quickly became one of the most popular racing game series. More than 20 installments have been released to date, with NFS Unbound being the latest game that has joined the roster. With this in mind, we’ve listed all the Need for Speed games in their order of release, from the very first installment to the most recent. The Need For Speed (1994) Release date: December 2, 1994 – Developer: EA Canada (originally known as Pioneer Productions) – Platforms: 3DO, MS-DOS, Windows, PlayStation, Saturn – The first-ever NFS game was released in 1994, with the aim to provide a realistic car simulation to all racing game fans out there. It’s far from what the series has to offer at present, but it sure did create a long-standing legacy. Need For Speed II (1997) Release date: March 31, 1997 – Developer: EA Canada (PS), EA Seattle (PC) – Platforms: PC, PlayStation – Need For Speed 2 is the second installment of the series and is a bit different from its predecessor. It featured more open-ended track designs, along with some of the rarest and most exotic vehicles from that time. Need For Speed III: Hot Pursuit (1998) Release date: March 25, 1998 – Developer: EA Canada (PS), EA Seattle (PC) – Platforms: PC, PlayStation – Need For Speed III: Hot Pursuit was a notch above all the previously released titles. The graphics were way more appealing, with improved physics and track designs when compared to the previous installment. It also introduced cops into the game for the first time via the Pursuit system. The AI could track down speeding racers and lay spikes on the road in an attempt to arrest them. It also gave birth to modding opportunities as players could download additional cars from the official website. Need For Speed: High Stakes (1999) Release date: March 24, 1999 – Developer: EA Canada (PS), EA Seattle (PC) – Platforms: PC, PlayStation – Released in 1999, Need For Speed: High Stakes introduced the damage system for the first time in the game. This means your car’s appearance and performance (speed, acceleration, etc) will be impacted if it collided with objects. It introduced new game modes and players could directly buy cars and upgrade them with better gear. Need for Speed: Porsche Unleashed (2000) Release date: March 29, 2000 – Developer: Eden Studios (PS), EA Canada (PC), Pocketeers (GBA) – Platforms: PC, PlayStation, Game Boy Advance – This installment was unique as it only featured cars from one particular brand — Porsche. The game became quite popular in the early 2000s as it featured close-to-realistic car controls and tons of vehicles from the German sports car manufacturer. Need for Speed: Hot Pursuit 2 (2002) Release date: October 2, 2002 – Developer: EA Black Box, EA Seattle – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 2, Xbox, Gamecube – Released in 2002, Need for Speed: Hot Pursuit 2 was the opposite of the former installment. It featured a ton of fast supercars, police chases, and several similar game modes from NFS 3. Need for Speed: Underground (2003) Release date: November 17, 2003 – Developer: EA Black Box, Pocketeers, Global VR – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 2, Xbox, Gamecube – With Underground, NFS shifted from semi-professional racing to street racing. Drag and Drift were the two new modes introduced in the game and they are still prevalent to date. Players could also modify their cars in new ways starting from paint jobs, spoilers, rims, and a lot more. It’s also the first Need For Speed game that featured pre-rendered videos as a part of storytelling. Need for Speed: Underground 2 (2004) Release date: November 9, 2004 – Developer: EA Black Box, Pocketeers, Team Fusion – Platforms: PC, Game Boy Advance, GameCube, PlayStation 2, Xbox, PlayStation Portable, Nintendo DS – The next Need for Speed game in order is the Underground sequel. What the developers did was bring in new events, cars, and customization & made it an open-world game. This was quite a welcome change and the concept is still going strong in current releases. Need for Speed: Most Wanted (2005) Release date: November 11, 2005 – Developer: EA Black Box, EA Canada, Team Fusion, Sensory Sweep Studios, Pocketeers – Platforms: PC, Game Boy Advance, GameCube, PlayStation 2, Xbox, Xbox 360, PlayStation Portable, Nintendo DS – Need for Speed: Most Wanted is one of the most iconic installments and a smashing hit from the franchise. It is still considered one of the best racing games and carried forward the open-world concept from Underground 2, while also maintaining the cop chases from NFS Hot Pursuit. The game’s story was a bit different from others as it featured a Blacklist of 15 racers who need to be beaten to unlock new cars, gear, and more. Need for Speed: Most Carbon (2006) Release date: October 30, 2006 – Developer: EA Black Box, EA Canada, Team Fusion, Exient Entertainment, Pocketeers, Rovio Mobile, Global VR – Platforms: PC, Game Boy Advance, GameCube, PlayStation 2, PlayStation 3, Xbox, Xbox 360, PlayStation Portable, Nintendo DS, Mac OS X – Need for Speed: Most Carbon is the next game in order and almost replicated the success of Most Wanted. It also dealt with the concept of street racing culture combined with certain elements taken from Hot Pursuit and Underground. It was also the first NFS game released for the PS3 and introduced a new feature where players could form a ‘crew’. Need for Speed: ProStreet (2007) Release date: November 14, 2007 – Developer: EA Black Box – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 2, PlayStation 3, Xbox, Xbox 360, PlayStation Portable, Nintendo DS, Wii – ProStreet can be considered a flop for the car racing franchise. Some factors like extremely difficult-to-handle cars and the lack of an open-world environment were responsible for its failure. Need for Speed: Undercover (2008) Release date: November 18, 2008 – Developer: EA Black Box, Exient Entertainment, Piranha Games, Firebrand Games – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 2, PlayStation 3, Xbox, Xbox 360, PlayStation Portable, Nintendo DS, Wii – Undercover was the last game for the PS2 where players had to play as a cop undercover. It tried to restore some of its lost glory and featured more than 50 vehicles, police chases, and more. However, it did not quite manage to make the mark and went on to become one of the least popular NFS games. Need for Speed: Shift (2009) Release date: September 15, 2009 – Developer: EA Bright Light, Slightly Mad Studios – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 3, Xbox 360, PlayStation Portable, Android, iOS – Release date: November 3, 2009 – Developer: EA Montreal, Firebrand Games – Platforms: Nintendo DS, Wii – Release date: July 27, 2010 – Developer: EA Singapore, Quicklime Games – Platforms: PC – Release date: November 16, 2010 – Developer: Criterion Games – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 3, Xbox 360, Android, iOS, Wii – Release date: March 29, 2011 – Developer: Slightly Mad Studios, Straight Right – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 3, Xbox 360, iOS – Release date: November 15, 2011 – Developer: EA Black Box, Firebrand Games – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 3, Xbox 360, Nintendo 3DS, Wii – Release date: October 30, 2012 – Developer: Criterion Games – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 3, PlayStation Vita, Xbox 360, iOS, Android, Wii U – Release date: November 15, 2013 – Developer: Ghost Games – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 4, PlayStation 3, Xbox One, Xbox 360 – Release date: September 30, 2015 – Developer: Firemonkeys Studios – Platforms: iOS, Android – Release date: November 3, 2015 – Developer: Ghost Games – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 4, Xbox One – Release date: November 10, 2017 – Developer: Ghost Games – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 4, Xbox One – Release date: November 8, 2019 – Developer: Ghost Games – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 4, Xbox One – Release date: December 2, 2022 – Developer: Criterion Games – Platforms: PC, PlayStation 5, Xbox Series X|S – Need for Speed: Shift was a hit unlike some of the last releases and specialized in racing simulation instead of arcade racing. More than 60 vehicles and 19 tracks were featured, and the handling was close to perfect in this installment. Need for Speed: Nitro (2009) This NFS title was exclusive to the Nintendo platform. It had a more casual approach by featuring arcade-styled gameplay instead of hardcore racing. Need for Speed: World (2010) Exclusive only to the Windows platform, Need for Speed: World was the first free-to-play title of the franchise. It was an MMO and its gameplay was inspired by the likes of Most Wanted and Carbon. Need for Speed: Hot Pursuit (2010) The next NFS game is Need for Speed: Hot Pursuit. This title was a reboot of 1998’s iteration and was one of the best racing games of the franchise. It focused more on police chases and races than customizations. Need for Speed Shift 2: Unleashed (2011) The next Need For Speed game in order is a sequel to 2009’s iteration. However, it did not live up to its hype. It featured a ton of real-world locations and had a more in-depth career mode. Need for Speed: The Run (2011) Need for Speed: The Run featured coast-to-coast racing, quick-time events, and a ton of real-world cars. However, like Shift 2, it did not perform well for the franchise in terms of sales. Need for Speed: Most Wanted (2012) In 2012, Need for Speed tried to replicate the success of the most popular title of their franchise, the Most Wanted. It featured an open world but lacked several other crucial features like customization and a story. Need for Speed: Rivals (2013) The next Need For Speed game in order is 2013’s Rival. The mechanics of the game were inspired by Hot Pursuit with several other additions like a dynamic weather system, AllDrive system, and more. Need for Speed: No Limits (2015) 2015’s Need for Speed: No Limits was released exclusively for the mobile platform. Most of the elements in the game are adaptations from some of the most popular titles released by the franchise. Need for Speed (2015) Also released in 2015, this Need for Speed title was supposed to serve as a reboot to the franchise but didn’t quite manage to make its mark. The game’s controls were far from what it was in some of the previous titles as they primarily focused on “action driving” this time around. Need for Speed Payback (2017) It seemed like NFS Payback took a lot of inspiration from the Fast and Furious series. This game was one of the underperforming ones in the franchise in terms of sales and featured an offline single-player mode. Need for Speed Heat (2019) As the name suggests, this NFS game featured a ‘Heats’ system where players have to earn a reputation in every race. There are different rewards offered both during the day and the night time, signifying both the day and night lives of the city. Need for Speed Unbound (2022) Need for Speed Unbound is the latest iteration of the franchise that features a realistic look for cars while rocking a cartoon-shaded look for the characters. That’s every Need For Speed game in their correct order of release. You can also take a look at all Call of Duty games in order or every Resident Evil game in order if you’re a fan of these games.

Every confirmed Monster in Monster Hunter Wilds CapcomThe best part about any Monster Hunter game is… well… the Monsters. Here’s a list of all the confirmed Large Monsters for Monster Hunter Wilds so far. Monster Hunter Wilds is on the horizon and we could not be more excited to carve some new creatures and make them into hats. Since its initial reveal at The Game Awards 2023, fans of the franchise have been patiently waiting for more news on the sixth mainline game of the series. Thanks to the May 2024 PlayStation State of Play, we got a whole lot more than just news. Viewers were treated to a brand-new Monster Hunter Wilds trailer showing off new mechanics like weapon-swapping surprised hunters everywhere. The following trailer from Gamescom 2024 showed off new locales and NPC companions. Perhaps more intriguing than all the new mechanics and characters however were the new Monsters. This guide will go over every Large Monster revealed for Monster Hunter Wilds so far. Every confirmed Large Monster in Monster Hunter Wilds At present, this list of Monster Hunter Wilds’ roster of confirmed Monsters is admittedly short. It’s still early days of course but we only have six named Large Monsters which will be the primary focus of hunts. Rest assured, Capcom has a documented history of slowly revealing new hunting targets in the lead-up to a Monster Hunter release. We’ll be sure to update this article as those roll out. Doshaguma This nightmare-inducing fuzzball is Doshaguma and despite being an early-game hunt, it’s no joke. Capcom describes them as “rugged, territorial fanged beasts that exhibit an aggressive disposition”. If the trailer is anything to go by, that’s a little bit of an understatement. These furry behemoths travel around in packs and I’d hate to see how things pan out if you’re assailed by more than one at a time. The core focus of the hunters shown off in the new footage seemed to be separating a larger Doshaguma from its fellows in order to hunt it safely. This might end up being the key to taking them down in-game. They inhabit a region called the Windward Plains which can be a desolate desert or vibrant grassland depending on the weather conditions. In more harsh conditions, Doshaguma grows fiercer and more desperate for the limited resources available. Chatacabra Okay, we know Chatacabra is some sort of giant crocodile-gorilla but is it kind of… cute? We’d die for it to be honest but perhaps we’re in the minority here. Seriously, if we weren’t so sure that the armor you make from them is going to look awesome, we might avoid hunting them altogether. Don’t you just wanna hug one? This amphibious death machine uses its adhesive saliva to “affix stone to their forelimbs in order to power up their attacks”. That’s right, boulder boxing gloves to pummel you with if you’re not careful. Like Doshaguma, Chatacabra also make the Windward Plains their home but given their amphibious nature, they might only show up when water is plentiful. We’re not sure whether to be excited at the site of a stream or terrified. Balahara Balahara marks the return of the incredibly popular Leviathan Monster class and should excite fans of Monster Hunter Tri’s Flagship. This slippery sucker looks like it packs a bit of punch in both large groups and on its own. They are smarter than they look too according to Capcom who has revealed that they use their writhing bodies to create quicksand traps. We’ve already seen them trap poor Doshaguma in one of these in the trailer and it doesn’t look like a great time. Another Monster that makes the Windward Plains its habitat, it’ll be interesting to see if Balahara shows up when things are plentiful, or if it’s restricted to the region’s harsher desert climate. We’re sure Hammer mains are already eying its interesting jaw shape and figuring out how to affix it on a stick. Rey Dau Rey Dau is the terrifying apex predator of the Windward Plains and this powerful foe has perfectly adapted to the area’s harshest weather conditions. When the dreaded sandstorms that plague the region kick up, their intensity is so great that they generate electrical storms. That’s no problem for Rey Dau, however. This fearsome Flying Wyvern harnesses its own bioelectricity and is immune to the lightning surges that seem so dangerous to everything else in the region. That includes hunters. This Monster is at the top of the food chain and that’s largely due to the fact that it can harness its bioelectrical prowess for powerful attacks. Its most threatening method of offense involves its horns folding over its face to create an in-built railgun that fires electricity at unnerving speeds. Seasoned players know that means Rey Dau will be able to stun them with ease thanks to the impact of Thunderblight. If you want to farm this thing for what we’re sure will be a very stylish getup, best stock up on Nullberries. Lala Barina Nope. Nope. A thousand times nope. Lala Barina is a Temnoceran and in Monster Hunter speak, that means it’s a big disgusting bug and we want no part of it. Of course, it has been a while since Temnocerans got any sort of love (Rakna Kadaki aside) and we’re sure some people are wrongfully excited about their return. Lala Barina premiered alongside the Scarlet Forest locale in which this creepy crawly makes its nest. The water that covers the forest floor is suspiciously red and we’re not entirely unconvinced that this thing isn’t somehow responsible for that. It sports an abdominal spike that looks very stabby which would be perfect for bathing the region in the blood of its victims. It moves in a very erratic fashion that appears to be some sort of dance and if you’re not careful, it could be a dance of death. For whatever reason, Capcom seems to have decided that Lala Barina will appear in the main storyline of Monster Hunter Wilds and that means that arachnophobes will have to steel themselves for the hunt. Don’t be fooled when it tries to trick you by imitating a pretty flower, this thing should not be touched. Rathalos It wouldn’t be a Monster Hunter game without some variant of Rathalos showing up. This Wyvern was the flagship Monster of the very first entry in the series and it’s back for Monster Hunter Wilds. We actually caught a glimpse of Rathalos in Monster Hunter Wilds all the way back during the initial reveal in 2023. Unfortunately, it doesn’t have a little informational section on the Monster Hunter Wilds website so we can’t tell you where they’ll pop up. What we can tell you is to prepare some Flash Bombs before you hunt one because, without those to knock it out of the sky, it’ll make hunters using melee weapons lives hard. Seriously, Rathalos loves spending time in the sky. That said, the new weapon-swapping mechanic might mean you can bring a ranged weapon like a Heavy Bowgun along to account for its evasiveness. The Rathalos revenge tour should be legendary. Those are the confirmed Large Monsters in Monster Hunter Wilds so far but you can be sure that more will be revealed in the coming months. The best part is, Capcom tends to use those reveals to show off some of the weapons and armor that can be made from each Monster too. We’ll be following the news surrounding Monster Hunter Wilds closely and gearing up to give you all the info you need to prepare for the biggest hunt of your life.

Every Marvel Rivals skin we know so far NetEase / MarvelMarvel Rivals is including alternate skins for each character. But what sort of variants on the classic hero costumes are available? Here’s every skin rumored to arrive with Marvel Rivals. Marvel Rivals is set to pit a slew of big-name and lesser-known heroes against one another in a 6v6 Overwatch-style shooter. After teasing the trailer, the game’s already generating buzz. With such a smorgasbord of characters included in the launch line up, fans are already speculating about what alternate skins NetEase will include for each. The developers have already confirmed Marvel Rivals will be free-to-play, with additional cosmetic items, like skins, available for purchase from its in-game store eventually. Although there’s been no official confirmation from NetEase Games about what skins fans can expect, there are already a few rumors circling. Here’s every skin rumored to be coming to Marvel Rivals. Marvel Rivals: Rumored Skins There’s no confirmation about alternate skin styles from NetEase yet. Here are all the most credible rumors so far. Spiderman: Spider-Punk skin According to Kurakasis, who also leaked details of the game ahead of its reveal, there will be a Spider-Punk skin coming to Marvel Rivals. Marvel fans will recognize Spider-Punk from the animated movie, Spiderman: Across the Spider-Verse. The spiked-mask, punk rocker riff on the classic character has been a favorite with fans since his first appearance in the film. His iconic look already appeared as a custom skin for the games Spiderman and Spiderman 2. Ironman: Steampunk skin Rumors of the Ironman skin first came from Mo Hosen of thestreamer. He confirmed the inclusion of skins in Marvel Rival on March 25 after a source shared details about the project. “There will indeed be skins but this addition is understood to be purely aesthetic.” He wrote, also going on to say he’d heard one of the available skins for Ironman would be “steampunk”. We’ll add more rumored skins, and any confirmations about skin releases in Marvel Rivals, as they roll out. So be sure to check back soon.

Every Marvel Rivals character and their abilities NetEase GamesMarvel Rivals boasts an expansive character roster of 25 heroes from the beloved franchise, each with their own set of abilities. We’ve got a rundown right here on each of them and their abilities. Marvel Rivals is one of the most highly anticipated games right now. NetEase Games’ superhero team-based PvP shooter has been a fan favorite since it was announced, allowing them to form an all-star Marvel squad with their favorite heroes. Throughout the game, players can invent various strategies by combining talents to create unique Team-Up skills and fighting in destructible, ever-changing battlefields across the constantly evolving Marvel universe. The game has a large character roster that includes legendary Marvel villains and heroes from comics, film, TV, and animation. Each of these characters belongs to a distinct character class and has their own set of unique abilities that they bring to the team. While the game is now set to release on December 6, we’ve got you covered with all the 25 characters and abilities you’ll need to know when Marvel Rivals comes out this year. All characters in Marvel Rivals and their abilities Captain America – Vanguard Hero Captain America is a Vanguard-class hero in Marvel Rivals who bashes through opponents’ defenses with his mighty Vibranium Shield. Since Cap is a Vanguard, his specialty lies in being the team’s frontline, and can deal some melee damage to enemies while taking hits, thanks to his increased health. Here are all of Captain America’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Sentinel Strike – Get up close to strike enemies. Landing the second hit enables a shield throw that can ricochet. Abilities: Freedom Charge (Q) – Shield held high, carve a path forward, granting both himself and allies along the path continuous Bonus Health and Movement Boosts. – Leading Dash (LShift) – Boost speed, enabling Fearless Leap. – Vibranium Energy Saw (E) – Hurl the energy-charged shield to strike enemies in a path. – Liberty Rush (F) – Raise the shield and charge forward. – Super-Soldier Slam (Left Click) – Slam down from the sky onto the targeted area, knocking enemies airborne. – Living Legend (Right Click) – Raise the shield to deflect incoming projectiles, sending them ricocheting in random directions. – Team-Up Abilities (C): Charged Aegis – Thor infuses Thorforce into Storm and Captain America, granting them an electrifying enhancement. With it, Storm can unleash a lightning barrage, and Captain America gains a Movement Boost, and his shield is imbued with thunder power, electrocuting nearby enemies. Captain America is the type of hero who is pure brute strength and you’ll need to close in on your enemies to bash them and deal some heavy damage. However, if you prefer to be in the middle lines along with your Duelists, you can use the shield throws to disrupt enemy attacks. Winter Soldier – Duelist Hero Winter Soldier is a Duelist and is basically a one-man army in the game. His ability to shoot and use his bionic arm at the same time to damage enemies is one of the most unique abilities in Rivals. Here are all of Winter Soldier’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Roterstern – Fire explosive rounds with his blaster, Roterstern, damaging the target hit and enemies behind them. Abilities: Kraken Impact (Q) – Leap high, then dash forward and slam down with the bionic arm, dealing damage to enemies in range, marking them for culling. Marked enemies will perish instantly if their health falls below a certain threshold, recharging the bionic arm for another Kraken Impact within a short period. – Trooper’s Fist (LShift) – Dash forward, seizing enemies along the path, and knock enemies in front airborne at the end of the dash. – Tainted Voltage (E) – Charge up and launch a powerful electrical punch with the bionic arm in the target direction, dealing damage to enemies within range and slowing them. – Bionic Hook (Right Click) – Charge up and launch a hook with his bionic arm, reeling in the first target hit and enemies lurking behind. – Ceaseless Charge (Passive) – Roterstern reloads automatically while the bionic arm is in action, granting the Winter Soldier bonus health. – Team-Up Abilities (Passive): Infinite Grit – Rocket Raccoon throws an Ammo Overload Device in the target direction. Upon entering the device’s range, The Punisher and Winter Soldier receive the buffs of Infinite Ammo and Faster Firing. Mastering the Winter Soldier in Marvel Rivals brings a learning curve as you need to alternate your attacks with his pistol and the bionic arm. But once you master it and land your hits accurately, you can spam the bionic arm ultimate ability frequently and rack up on kills for your team. Thor – Vanguard Hero Thor is a Vanguard-class hero in Marvel Rivals who’s all about dishing damage on enemies with his mighty hammer Mjolnir. He doesn’t shield teammates or tank a bunch of damage like other Vanguards, rather he’s dashing around the battlefield. Here are all of Thor’s abilities: Normal Attack 1 (Left Click): Mjolnir Bash – Wield Mjolnir to strike enemies. When Awakened, Thor can launch lightning arc waves to deal damage. Normal Attack 2 (Right Click): Hammer Throw – Throw Mjolnir forward that then returns. Abilities: God of Thunder (Q): Soar upwards and smite the ground after charging for a duration, inflicting damage upon enemies in range. – Storm Surge (LShift): Hold to spin Mjolnir before dashing forward and knocking back enemies. – Lightning Realm (E): Summon lightning to restore Thorforce based on the number of hit enemies. – Awakening Rune (F): Consume Thorforce to enter the Awakened state, granting bonus Health and enhancing Mjolnir Bash. – Passive: Thorforce – After using any ability, casting Mjolnir Bash grants one point of Thorforce. – Team-Up Abilities (Passive): Passive: Odinson Reborn – When Hela lands a final hit in defeating an enemy, she can instantly resurrect Loki and Thor in the respawn phase, or grant bonus health if still alive. – Passive: Charged Aegis – Thor infuses Thorforce into Storm and Captain America, granting them an electrifying enhancement. With it, Storm can unleash a lightning barrage, and Captain America gains a Movement Boost, and his shield is imbued with thunder power, electrocuting nearby enemies. – Suggested Combo: Use Hammer Throw to deal damage from mid to long range, then seize the opportunity to close in with Storm Surge. Unleash Lightning Realm amidst the enemies to restore energy and activate Awakening Rune to enter an awakened state for a damage burst. Thor’s kit is a bit tricky to master in the game. If you don’t choose the right time to engage, you’re going to immediately die. If you live, you’ll run through the entire enemy team. Jeff The Land Shark – Strategist Hero Jeff The Land Shark is a Strategist class hero in the game and is purely a healer with a few tricks up his sleeve. He’s a simple, easy-to-play Strategist hero who can fit into almost any team composition. The fact that his bubbles amplify healing combined with him having some of the best AoE healing in the game make him invaluable. Here are all of Jeff’s abilities: Normal Attack 1 (Left Click): Joyful Splash – Unleash a healing splash. Normal Attack 2 (Right Click): Aqua Burst – Launch a high-speed water sphere that bursts upon impact, dealing damage to enemies within range. Abilities: Hide and Seek (LShift) – Dive into the ground with only his dorsal fin exposed, granting himself a movement boost and the wall-crawl ability. – Healing Bubble (E) – Spit out a bubble that heals the ally who collects it, boosting all healing for that ally. – It’s Jeff! (Q) – Deep dive into the ground and resurface to swallow both enemies and allies within range, activating Hide and Seek for a brief duration before ejecting the swallowed heroes forward. – Passive: Oblivious Cuteness – Reduce damage taken from critical strikes. – Team-Up Ability 1 (C): Frozen Spitball – Luna Snow infuses ice energy into Jeff the Land Shark, who then can tap into the ice energy to power up their abilities. Team-Up Ability 2 (Z): New Friends – Jeff the Land Shark can ride on Groot’s shoulders, receiving damage reduction. Suggested Combo: Dive into the scene with Hide and Seek, sustain the team with Joyful Splash or Healing Bubble, and deal damage with Aqua Burst. Unleash It’s Jeff! to swallow enemies and allies alike, then strategically spit them out to shift the tides of battle. Although he’s still vulnerable to damage while in Hide and Seek, Jeff is so hard to hit that it doesn’t matter much outside of trying to get away from melee characters. Not to mention that Jeff’s ultimate, when comboed properly, is one of the best in the game. Venom – Vanguard Hero Venom was added to the Marvel Heroes roster with the Closed Beta Test. He’s a Vanguard class hero and possesses the power of Symbiote which can deal some deadly damage and devour whatever comes its way. Since Venom is a Vanguard, his specialty lies in being the team’s frontline that deals the most damage and can take several hits from enemies. Here are all of Venom’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Dark Predation – Unleash tentacles forward to attack enemies Abilities: Feast of the Abyss (Q) – Burrow underground for free movement. After a duration or by pressing Left Click to devour enemies above and generate Bonus Health. – Venom Swing (LShift) – Launch webbing forward, allowing for a singular swing in the desired direction. – Symbiotic Resilience (E) – Generate Bonus Health against damage. The lower Venom’s Health, the greater the Bonus Health generated. – Frenzied Arrival (F) – Dash to the target location from a certain height. Upon landing, damage nearby enemies, knocking them back towards the landing point. – Cellular Corrosion (Right Click) – Unleash tentacles to slow enemies within reach. Enemies unable to break free in time will suffer damage. – Alien Biology (Passive) – Press Space to wall crawl, and while crawling, press Left Click to sprint. – Team-Up Abilities (Passive): Touch of Klyntar – Venom shares a part of his symbiote with Spider-Man and Peni Parker, activating their symbiote abilities. Spider-Man and Peni Parker can convert the symbiote into explosive spikes that inflict harm on nearby enemies and relentlessly drive them back. Suggested Combo: Swiftly maneuver through the battlefield with Venom Swing, then seize the perfect moment to engage with Frenzied Arrival. Use Cellular Corrosion to grab enemies, dealing massive damage over time, then finish them off with Dark Predation. Since most of Venom’s attacks and damage is similar to Hulk where he smashes enemies from close range, his Dark Predation and Cellular Corrosion abilities enable players to deal significant damage to opponents in mid-range as well. Overall, Venom is one of the toughest Vanguards in the game and can be lethal to any opposing team in Marvel Rivals. Adam Warlock – Strategist Hero Adam Warlock is a Strategist class hero who is mainly a healer. He’s a genetically engineered individual who wields Quantum Magic that heals souls and connects with them. His ability to heal teammates around him and resurrect them in the middle of battle helps a team to continue their attack. Here are all of Adam Warlock’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Quantum Magic – Launch quantum energy to deal damage. Abilities: Karmic Revival (Q) – Awaken the karma of allies to revive them. Allies revived have lower health but enjoy a brief period of invincibility. – Soul Bond (LShift) – Unite the souls of allies in a bond, granting them healing over time and distributing damage taken across the bond. – Avatar Life Stream (E) – Target an ally for a bouncing stream of healing energy, which also heals himself upon casting; self-targets if no ally is selected. – Cosmic Cluster (Right Click) – Gather quantum energy into a cluster and then swiftly launch it at the enemy. – Regenerative Cocoon (Passive) – Once his body perishes, Adam can freely move as a soul and reforge his body at a chosen spot. – Team-Up Abilities (Passive): Soul Perseverance – Adam Warlock enhances the rebirth power of Star-Lord and Mantis, granting them the power of cocooned revival. Suggested Combo: After being wiped out, float over as a soul to a safe spot, then cast Karmic Revival to resurrect allies. Link up with Soul Bond, and channel Avatar Life Stream to rapidly restore health, getting the team back in the fight immediately. Adam’s role in a team is mainly as a supporting character who stays behind the attack lines and supports the Duelists and Vanguards by granting them healing over time. He can also help a team in scoring a win at the last minute by resurrecting the most powerful allies so they can land one final blow. Hulk – Vanguard Hero Hulk is a Vanguard-class hero in Marvel Rivals who’s the enforcer of the team. The hero has three variants players can choose to begin with. You can either launch into a match as Bruce Banner and watch him transform into the green monster or make a smash directly as Hero Hulk or Monster Hulk. Here are all the variants of Hulk and their respective abilities: Bruce Banner Normal Attack (Left Click): Gamma Ray Gun – Fire with a Gamma Ray Gun Abilities: Puny Banner (Q) – Transform from Bruce Banner into Hero Hulk. – Gamma Grenade (LShift) – Launch a Gamma Grende to inflict damage and Knock Them Airborne. – Hero Hulk Normal Attack (Left Click): Heavy Blow – Swing fists forward to punch enemies Abilities: Hulk Smash! (Q) – Unleash stored gamma energy, transforming from Hero Hulk into Monster Hulk for a limited period. – Indestructible Guard (LShift) – Generate gamma shields for Hero Hulk and nearby allies, absorbing and converting damage into energy for HULK SMASH! – Radioactive Lockdown (E) – Emit gamma energy to place enemies in quantum void that renders them immobilized and immune to all ability effects. – Incredible Leap (Space) – Hold Space to perform a charged leap that allows Hero Hulk to Knock a flying enemy to the ground. – Gamma Burst (Right Click) – Emit gamma-ray bursts to inflict damage. – Team-Up Abilities (Passive): Gamma Boost – Hulk charges Doctor Strange and Iron Man with gamma radiation. When Doctor Strange uses Maelstrom of Madness, he unleashes excess gamma energy. When Iron Man uses Armor Overdrive, he will initiate a gamma upgrade. Suggested Combo: Burst onto the battlefield with Incredible Leap, unleash Indestructible Guard to take damage, and overpower enemies with Heavy Blow and Gamma Burst before becoming the monster with a devastating HULK SMASH! Monster Hulk Normal Attack (Left Click): Heavy Blow – Swing fists forward to punch and launch frontal enemies upward. Abilities: World Breaker (Q) – Grab and smash the enemy in front. – Radioactive Lockdown (E) – Emit gamma energy to inflict sustained damage and place enemies in quantum void that renders them immobilized and immune to all ability effects. – Incredible Leap (Space) – Hold Space to perform a charged leap that allows Monster Hulk to Knock a flying enemy to the ground. – Gamma Burst (Right Click) – Emit gamma-ray bursts to inflict damage. – Due to Hulk’s superhuman strength and size, he’s a perfect Vanguard hero who blocks incoming damage for the team and is perfect for the frontlines. His abilities can knock back enemies and also cause a heavy impact around a targeted area while dealing some serious damage to the opposing team. Similar to a Tank class hero in Overwatch, Hulk’s Vanguard abilities make him the perfect shield you need while your other heroes strategize an attack to wipe out the enemy team. The Punisher – Duelist Hero The Punisher is one of the most tactical heroes in Marvel Rivals and belongs to the Duelist class. He’s a highly skilled assassin who’s proficient with weapons and has a formidable arsenal. Since Punisher is a Duelist, his specialty lies in being the offense line of the team carrying heavy firepower. Here are all of The Punisher’s abilities: Normal Attack 1 (Left Click): Adjudication – Fire at enemies with Adjudication, his Automatic Rifle Normal Attack 2 (Left Click): Deliverance – Fire at enemies with Deliverance, his Shotgun Abilities: Final Judgement (Q) – Unleash two gatling guns and missiles to attack enemies. – Vantage Connection (LShift) – Launch a hook to generate a cable that enables Punisher to move rapidly by pressing F. – Culling Turret (E) – Deploy a Culling Turret that grounds Punisher while dealing massive damage. – Scourge Grenade (Right Click) – Throw a Smoke Grenade forward to Obscure enemy vision. – Warrior’s Gaze (Passive) – Retain vision of enemies that disappear from view for a short duration. – Team-Up Abilities (Passive): Infinite Punishment – Rocket Raccoon throws an Ammo Overload Device in target direction. Upon entering the device’s range, The Punisher receives the buffs of Infinite Ammo and Faster Firing. Suggested Combo: Utilize Deliverance, Adjudication, and Culling Turret to strike enemies at various ranges. Hold the high ground with Vantage Connection and gain superior vision with Warrior’s Gaze. Since Punisher is the Judge, Jury, and Executioner in the Marvel Universe, he’s the perfect addition to your squad since his guns function similarly to a spray-and-pray meta in shooter games. With his Deliverance shotgun, he can deal lethal damage to close-range enemies and hot-swap weapons to keep the firepower going during battle. Storm – Duelist Hero Storm, a core member of the X-Men is one of the best support heroes that belongs to the Duelist class in Marvel Rivals. Her weather control abilities and powers to summon lightning are extremely useful in causing a storm around a larger area of enemies. Since Storm is always levitating around the area, her powers are perfect to get some long-range and mid-range shots in at the enemy team. Here are all of Storm’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Wind Blade – Launch forward-piercing Wind Blades. Abilities: Omega Hurricane (Q) – Transform into a hurricane to draw in nearby enemies and deal damage. – Weather Control (LShift) – Switch the weather to empower allies: Tornado grants a Movement Boost; Thunder grants a Damage Boost. – Goddess Boost (E) – Channel the power of the weather to empower Storm; Tornado grants a Movement Boost; Thunder grants a Damage Boost and summons lightning to inflict damage. – Bolt Rush (Right Click) – Unleash a lightning bolt forward. – Suggested Combo: Grant the team damage boosts or speed boosts from above, or enhance weather effects with Goddess Boost to restrain nearby foes while piercing distant ones with Wind Blade before sealing the deal with Bolt Rush. Storm’s control over the weather can make a major impact on the team that has her in their squad since she’s an excellent support hero as well as perfectly plays her part in the offense as a fragger. Her abilities to aid teammates with boosts can be a game changer in end games that can result in a clutch. Loki – Strategist Hero The Trickster God Loki is one of the key characters in Marvel Rivals who acts as an ace Strategist on a team. Loki’s abilities are full of magical powers that can leave enemy players bamboozled and act as a key support line to your team. Here are all of Loki’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Mystical Missile – Fire Mystical Missiles to heal allies or deal damage to enemies. Abilities: God of Mischief (Q) – Shapeshift into a targeted ally or enemy hero and use all the hero’s abilities. – Regeneration Domain (LShift) – Use Rune Stones to create a magical field that converts damage taken by allies within its radius into healing energy. – Doppelganger (E) – Project an illusion that can cast some of Loki’s abilities. – Devious Exchange (F) – Swap with the selected illusion. – Backstab (V) – Pull out a dagger to stab enemies, dealing extra damage when attacking an enemy from behind. – Deception (Right Click) – Become invisible and conjure an illusion to deceive enemies. – Team-Up Abilities: Laufeyson Reborn (Passive) – When Hela lands a final hit in defeating an enemy, she can instantly resurrect Loki in the respawn phase. If Loki is alive, a Nastrond Crow will fly to him, granting blue armor. Suggested Combo: Use Deception and Doppelganger to create illusions, boosting his damage and healing, and deploy Regeneration Domain to shield allies and self. God of Mischief can shapeshift into an enemy or ally, instantly unleashing their ultimate abilities, so choose wisely. With Loki’s abilities that allow them to project an illusion or shapeshift into an enemy and use their abilities, the Laufeyson can be a key asset to a team that can change the fate of an ongoing match. While Strategists are mostly rendered as the support line that heals and revives teammates, Loki is best used to distract enemies while other heroes are rescuing your fallen teammates. Doctor Strange – Vanguard Hero Doctor Strange is another Vanguard hero who acts as a key frontline hero in Marvel Rivals, primarily because of his mystical abilities of opening portals for their team and creating protective barriers against enemy duelists. Here are all of Doctor Strange’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Daggers of Denak – Cast Daggers of Denak forward. Abilities: Eye of Agamotto (Q) – Separate nearby enemies’ Souls from their bodies. Damage dealt to these Souls is transferred to their physical bodies. – Cloak of Levitation (LShift) – Ascend and then enter a brief state of sustained flight. – Maelstrom of Madness (E) – Release Dark Magic to deal damage to nearby enemies. – Pentagram of Farallah (F) – Open portals between two locations, enabling all units to travel through them. – Shield of the Seraphim (Right Click) – Create a protective barrier against damage. – Price of Magic (Passive) – Dark Magic accumulates with every hit on an enemy. If Dark Magic is not released, Doctor Strange will enter a state of Anti-Heal. – Team-Up Abilities: Gamma Maelstrom – Hulk charges Doctor Strange and Iron Man with gamma radiation. When Doctor Strange uses Maelstrom of Madness, he unleashes excess gamma energy. When Iron Man uses Armor Overdrive, he will initiate a gamma upgrade. Suggested Combo: Use Shield of the Seraphim to fend off damage or Daggers of Denak to strike while building up Dark Magic. As Dark Magic peaks, swoop in on enemies with the Cloak of Levitation and unleash Maelstrom of Madness. With the Eye of Agamotto in hand, cast Pentagram of Farallah for a surprise attack while using the Eye of Agamotto to control enemies. As Vanguard heroes are known to be the first line of attack in a team, Doctor Strange is an incredible addition since the Shield of Seraphim helps prevent any incoming damage towards your teammates behind you. However, be cautious before using the Pentagram of Farallah as you don’t want to lead your team to a hostile area on the map. Mantis – Strategist Hero Mantis is one of the key healers on any team in Marvel Rivals. Her ability to collect Life Orbs and grant allies with Health and Damage boosts are vital to a team. However, the character comes with their own set of attacks that make them an ace Strategist on any squad. Here are all of Mantis’ abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Life Energy Blast – Fire an energy thorn and regain one Life Orb after a critical hit. Abilities: Soul Resurgence (Q) – Release energy around her while moving, providing Healing Over Time and Movement Boost for surrounding allies. – Spore Slumber (LShift) – Throw a spore to Sedate the nearest enemy. – Allied Inspiration (E) – Consume Life Orbs to grant allies a Damage Boost. – Natural Anger (F) – Consume Life Orbs to grant herself a Damage Boost. – Healing Flower (Right Click) – Consume Life Orbs to grant allies Healing Over Time. – Nature’s Favor (Passive) – Receive a Movement Boost when not injured and Healing Over Time when consuming Life Orbs. – Suggested Combo: Strategically use life energy to unleash Healing Flower to heal allies or unleash Allied Inspiration/Natural Anger to boost allies/self-inflicted damage. Use Spore Slumber to sedate enemies, disrupting their ability casts, and assist team’s focused fire to eliminate them. While Mantis is a hero not meant for imminent attack on the enemy team, their ability and quick movement are key to healing damaged teammates over time. Since the Strategist is known to read thoughts and control minds, her Spore Slumber ability stuns nearby enemies that make way for your other teammates to surprise them with an attack. Rocket Raccoon – Strategist Hero Rocket Raccoon is known to be a cybernetically enhanced hero who loves guns. However, due to his size, he’s perfectly suited as a Strategist hero on any team that provides heroes with damage boosts, unlimited ammo and health while dealing some heavy damage to enemies. Here are all of Rocket Raccoon’s abilities: Normal Attack 1 (Left Click): Bombard Mode – Fire energy projectiles that deal damage. Normal Attack 2 (Right Click): Repair Mode – Shoot bouncing spheres to heal allies. Abilities: C.Y.A. – Cosmic Yarn Amplifier (Q) – Deploy a Cosmic Yarn Amplifier that grants allies a Damage Boost. – Jetpack Dash (LShift) – Dash forward. – B.R.B. – Battle Rebirth Beacon (E) – Deploy a Rebirth Beacon that revives a fallen ally and periodically produces armor packs and rocket jet packs. – Wild Crawl (Passive) – Hold Space to run on a wall. – Flying Ace (Passive) – Hold Space to fall slowly. – Team-Up Ability 1 (C): Old Friends – Rocket Racoon can ride on Groot’s shoulders, receiving Damage Reduction. Team-Up Ability 2 (Z): Ammo Invention – Rocket Raccoon throws an Ammo Overload Device in the target direction. Upon entering the device’s range, The Punisher receives the buffs of Infinite Ammo and Faster Firing. Suggested Combo: Zip around with Jetpack Dash, use Repair Mode to continuously heal your team, and deploy a B.R.B. for swift ally revivals. Since Rocket heavily relies on a team’s Duelists and Vanguard heroes dealing significant damage, his team-up abilities can be crucial to land a final blow to enemies who are low on health. However, he can quickly zip around the map and deal serious damage on the move, given his size and swift movement. Hela – Duelist Hero Hela, the Goddess of Death is one of the deadliest Duelists in Marvel Rivals. Her ability to attack enemies using long-range Nightsword thorns and Nastrond Crows enables her to be a perfect attack hero for any squad. Here are all of Hela’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Nightsword Thorn – Throw Nightsword thorns. Abilities: Goddess of Death (Q) – Soar into the sky and unleash Nastrond Crows from each hand at will. – Astral Flock (LShift) – Transform into a flock of Hel crows to glide forth, press again to undo the transformation. – Soul Drainer (E) – Project an explosive Hel sphere to Stun nearby enemies. – Piercing Night (Right Click) – Fire multiple Nightsword thorns that detonate after a delay. – Nastrond Crowstorm (Passive) – Defeating an enemy will generate a Nastrond Crow, exploding after a duration. – Hel’s Descent (Passive) – Hold Space to fall slowly. – Team-Up Abilities (Passive): Queen of Hel – When Hela lands a final hit in defeating an enemy, she can instantly resurrect Loki in the respawn phase. If Loki is alive, a Nastrond Crow will fly to him, granting blue armor. Suggested Combo: Stun the enemy with Soul Drainer, then unleash a barrage with Nightsword Thorn and Piercing Night. Slip into advantageous positions with Astral Flock, and deliver a devastating aerial assault with Goddess of Death. Hela’s ability to fly around the map and fire multiple shots at the enemy team while maintaining a distance makes her a perfect Marksman Duelist who can damage an enemy team’s line of defense. With her transformation ability, she can also keep track of where the enemies are so other heroes in your team can surprise them with an attack. Black Panther – Duelist Hero Wakanda’s ruler and the mighty Black Panther is another Duelist who is swift and always on the move to attack enemies in Marvel Rivals. The hero’s powers enable him to pounce on enemies with his Vibranium Claws and jump around to bamboozle the opposing team. Here are all of Black Panther’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Vibranium Claws – Slice Vibranium Claws forward. Abilities: Bast’s Descent (Q) – Summon Bast, pouncing forward, dealing damage, and attaching a Vibranium Mark to hit enemies. – Sprint Rend (LShift) – Lunge forward and deal damage to enemies. Hitting an enemy afflicted with a Vibranium Mark produces bonus Health and refreshes the ability. – Spinning Kick (E) – Spiral forward and attach a Vibranium Mark to hit enemies. – Subtle Step (Space) – Hold Space to run on a wall; perform a jump after detaching from the wall. – Spear Toss (Right Click) – Toss a Vibranium energy spear forward, creating a Vibranium Force Field and attaching a Vibranium Mark to enemies in its radius. – Panther’s Cunning (Passive) – Deal higher damage when at low Health. – Team-Up Abilities (C): Djalia Disc – Magik opens a portal. Black Panther can use the portal. Suggested Combo: Unleash Spear Toss and Spinning Kick to attach Vibranium Marks to enemies, then strike them with Sprint Rend to reset ability cooldowns. Leverage Subtle Step to swiftly engage or disengage from battles with ease. Since Black Panther’s abilities work best in close range, the Panther’s Cunning ability can be a game changer since his Vibranium suit absorbs and releases Kinetic Energy, thus dealing heavy damage to enemies at low health. However, we recommend using a hero with long to mid-range abilities as being too close to an enemy can result in defeat against other heroes on the roster. Groot – Vanguard Hero Groot, one of the Guardians of the Galaxy members is known to be a key line of attack and defense for any team in Marvel Rivals. His role as a Vanguard enables him to take down large waves of enemies and create barriers around your teammates, giving them an opening to launch an attack. Here are all of Groot’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Vine Strike – Launch vines to attack enemies. Abilities: Strangling Prison (Q) – Fire a massive vine cluster that pulls nearby enemies to its center and Imprisons them. – Thornlash Wall (LShift) – Target a location and grow a Thornlash Wall. When Awakened, it strikes nearby enemies attacked by Groot and his allies. – Ironwood Wall (E) – Target a location and grow an Ironwood Wall. When Awakened, it grants Bonus Health to Groot when nearby enemies take damage. – Spore Bomb (Right Click) – Throw an explosive Spore Bomb that splits into multiple small explosive spores. – Flora Colossus (Passive) – Wooden walls near Groot will Awaken, activating an extra effect. – Team-Up Abilities (Passive): Friendly Shoulder – Rocket Raccoon can ride on Groot’s shoulders, receiving Damage Reduction. Suggested Combo: Use Wooden Walls to split the battlefield and shield damage, and deploy Thornlash Wall to tactically reshape the terrain. Trap enemies with Strangling Prison, then wipe them out with a devastating combo of Spore Bomb and Vine Strike. Groot’s abilities enable him to throw bombs, fire vines, and even aid Rocket Raccoon to launch an attack on an enemy from the start of a Rivals match. You can also trap enemies using the Strangling Prison ability and call upon another hero to eliminate them while they’re trapped. Magik – Duelist Hero Magik is another Duelist on Marvel Rivals, that works best when closer to an enemy on the map. Their quick attacks with a Soulsword and ability to jump across the map on Stepping Discs enable them to be a deadly force on any team. However, Magik can transform herself to be a Darkchild variant that enhances all her abilities and deals heavier damage on enemies. Here are all of Magik’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Soulsword – Slash forward with the Soulsword. Abilities: Darkchild (Q) – Transform into Darkchild, gaining enhancements to all her abilities. – Stepping Discs (LShift) – Jump through a Stepping Disc, teleporting a short distance in the direction of movement. – Umbral Incursion (E) – Dash forward and launch an enemy upward. – Eloritch Whirl (Left Click) – Spin while swinging the Soulsword after exiting a Stepping Disc. – Magik Slash (Right Click) – Strike forward an air slash. – Demon’s Rage (Right Click) – Summon a Limbo demon that attacks enemies after exiting a Stepping Disc. – Limbo’s Might (Passive) – Convert damage inflicted on enemies into Bonus Health to herself. – Team-Up Abilities (C): Disc Master – Magik opens a portal. Black Panther can use the portal. Suggested Combo: Unleash Stepping Discs for a swift dash, followed by a whirl slash as a combo with Umbral Incursion to launch the target into the air. Then use Soulsword and melee attacks as a combo to take them down before casting Stepping Discs once again to make a stylish exit from the fray. With Magik’s dual nature, her abilities are best put to use to slash across enemy teams quickly since her melee attacks drain some serious health from enemies. However, her Darkchild persona is deadlier than her base character, simply because you can inflict some extra damage during a tricky situation. Luna Snow – Strategist Hero Luna Snow’s ice shots are deadlier than any weapon in Marvel Rivals. Even though she’s a Strategist hero in the game and supports allies, her abilities enable her to be an independent hero that damages the enemy team significantly. Here are all of Luna’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Light & Dark Ice – Fire ice shots that damage enemies or heal allies. Abilities: Fate of Both Worlds (Q) – Take center stage and start dancing! Toggle between two performances: Heal allies or grant them Damage Boost. – Ice Arts (LShift) – Fire ice shards for a short duration, damaging enemies or healing allies while restoring her own Health. – Share the Stage (E) – Attach Idol Aura to an ally. Allies with Idol Aura also restore Health when Luna Snow is healing others. – Absolute Zero (Right Click) – Cast a clump of ice to freeze the hit enemy and restore health. – Cryo Heart (Passive) – Automatically restore Health when casting Ice Arts or Absolute Zero. – Smooth Skate (Passive) – Keep moving to start ice skating. – Team-Up Abilities (Passive): Icy Disco – Luna Snow infuses ice energy into Namor, who then can tap into the ice energy to power up abilities at will. Suggested Combo: Unleash Light & Dark Ice to damage enemies or heal allies and guard a vital ally with Share the Stage. Boost healing or damage with Ice Arts and freeze enemies with Absolute Zero. Luna’s swift abilities enable her to aid allies on the move as she skates across the map while restoring health and firing ice shards at enemies. Her quick speed enables her to be hard to track down by enemies and can aid other heroes enhance their powers as well. Iron Man – Duelist Hero The tech marvel in the game, Iron Man’s arc reactor powers his mighty suit in which he can fly around the map, firing beams at enemies on the move. Although his abilities are limited to his suit, his ability to use his armor to blast waves of enemy teams away from your team enables him as an ace Duelist. Here are all of Iron Man’s abilities: Normal Attack 1 (Left Click): Repulsor Blast – Fire nano pulse cannons forward. Normal Attack 2 (Right Click): Unibeam – Fire a unibeam forward. Abilities: Invincible Pulse Cannon (Q) – Fire a devastating pulse cannon in the targeted direction, delivering catastrophic damage to the targeted area upon impact. – Hyper-Velocity (LShift) – Activate Hyper-Velocity state for swift forward flight. – Armor Overdrive (E) – Activate Armor Overdrive state, enhancing damage of Repulsor Blast and Unibeam. – Micro-Missile Barrage (F) – When Hyper-Velocity or Armor Overdrive is used, Iron Man can launch a missile bombardment. – Team-Up Abilities (E): Gamma Overdrive – Hulk charges Doctor Strange and Iron Man with gamma radiation. When Doctor Strange uses Maelstrom of Madness, he unleashes excess gamma energy. When Iron Man uses Armor Overdrive, he will initiate a gamma upgrade. Suggested Combo: Fire Repulsor Blasts to strike at enemies or unleash the Unibeam to deal massive damage. Use Hyper-Velocity to gain vision and terrain advantage and cran up damage with Armor Overdrive. Since Duelists are quicker than other characters in a team, Iron Man is one of the best ones in Rivals. He can easily fly around the map and deal damage to enemies from a distance. Since he can put his suit on overdrive, you can also increase the damage inflicted by his repulsors mid-match to send the enemy team back to the lobby. Spider-Man – Duelist Hero Spider-Man does whatever a Spider can, even in Marvel Rivals. His role as a Duelist enables him to use his quick abilities to swing around the map and web enemies with large web clusters. Since he’s full of tricks, his abilities are best used when he’s constantly on the move. Here are all of Spider-Man’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Spider-Power – Swing fists forward to strike, dealing extra damage to the enemy with a Spider-Tracer. Abilities: Spectacular Spin (Q) – Launch Web-Clusters all around to damage and Stun enemies. – Web-Swing (LShift) – Shoot a strand of webbing to swing. – Get Over Here! (E) – Shoot webbing to reel in the hit enemy. If the enemy is tagged with a Spider-Tracer, Spider-Man will get pulled to them instead. – Amazing Combo (F) – Launch an enemy upward, dealing extra damage to the enemy with a Spider-Tracer. – Thwip and Flip (Space) – Perform a double jump. – Web-Cluster (Right Click) – Shoot a Web-Cluster that deals damage and attaches a Spider-Tracer to the hit enemy. – Spider-Sense (Passive) – Give a warning of enemies that have been around. – Wall Crawl (Passive) – Press Space to crawl on vertical surfaces, and Press Left Click to run on them. – Suggested Combo: Use Web-Swing to flank, then shoot a Web-Cluster to deal damage and attach a Spider-Tracer to the hit enemy. Close in with Get Over Here! Follow up with an Amazing Combo to detonate the Spider-Tracer and unleash Spectacular Spin to stun and decimate all enemies. Spider-Man can be best used as a duelist only if you plan to use the character as he’s meant to be on a team – support your allies by webbing up enemies and closing in to land the final blow. Be mindful of your surroundings while swinging around the map and mark enemies for your allies using your Spider-Sense to lead your team to victory. Scarlet Witch – Duelist Hero Scarlet Witch is by far the most powerful hero across the entire Marvel Rivals roster. Her chaos magic enables her to wipe out all of reality and use it to eliminate enemies while soaring in the sky in a single blow. Here are all of Scarlet Witch’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Chaos Control – Use Chaos Magic to attack enemies and restore Chaos Energy. Abilities: Reality Erasure (Q) – Engage in free-flight while charging energy, then unleash it to deal massive damage. – Mystic Projection (LShift) – Enter the Projection state for free-flight. Press again to exit early. – Dark Seal (E) – Land a hit on a target or the scene, or press again to generate a Force Field that periodically Stuns enemies within range. – Telekinesis (Space) – Space Hold Space to fall slowly. – Chthonian Burst (Right Click) – Consume Chaos Energy to fire explosive magic missiles, damaging enemies. – Team-Up Abilities (Passive): Chaotic Bond – Scarlet Witch can infuse Chaos Energy into Magneto to enchant his greatsword. Upon receiving the Chaos Energy, Magneto can unleash its full force, striking down enemies with his enchanted greatsword. Suggested Combo: Use Dark Swal to stun enemies, Chaos Control for energy restoration, and Chthonian Burst to strike at enemies. Leverage Reality Erasure to deal massive damage. Scarlet Witch’s dark magic enables her to be a perfect duelist on any Marvel Rivals team. Even though her role as a Duelist limits her from being a frontline hero, her abilities make up for it by eliminating an entire team using Reality Erasure or consuming chaos energy to fire deadly missiles at enemies. Magneto – Vanguard Hero Magneto’s mutant abilities are perfect for wiping out a large gathering of enemies since he can alter magnetic fields and fire projectiles at enemies at a ludicrous rate. Even though he’s larger in size in Marvel Rivals, he can float around and block incoming damage from the enemy team to support other heroes to launch an attack. Here are all of Magneto’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Iron Volley – Fire a volley of magnetic orbs forward. Abilities: Meteor M (Q) – Alter the magnetic field to draw in matter and projectiles and forge a massive iron meteor, delivering catastrophic damage to the targeted area upon impact. – Metallic Curtain (LShift) – Change the magnetic field around to form a metallic curtain, blocking all flying projectiles. – Metal Bulwark (E) – Conjure a metal shield around a chosen ally. Damage taken will transform into rings on Magneto’s back. – Mag-Cannon (Right Click) – Convert the iron rings on Magneto’s back into a Mag-Cannon and launch a metallic mass forward. Higher stacks of rings increase damage, and full stacks Knock Back enemies. – Magnetic Descent (Passive) – Hold Space to fall slowly. – Team-Up Abilities (C): Metallic Fusion – Scarlet Witch can infuse Chaos Energy into Magneto to enchant his greatsword. Upon receiving the Chaos Energy, Magneto can unleash its full force, striking down enemies with his enchanted greatsword. Suggested Combo: Unleash Iron Volley to deal damage, accumulate iron rings over time or through Metal Bulwark, and then use Mag-Cannon to finish off the enemy. Use Metallic Curtain to ward off damage or Meteor M to wreak massive destruction. Magneto is best used in Rivals only if you plan to act as a shield for your team. While his attack abilities aren’t as effective as his support and defense abilities are, you should primarily use him to deal first damage to the enemy team or even protect another hero while they are on the move to launch an attack. Peni Parker – Vanguard Hero Peni Parker’s enhanced SP//DR suit is one of the best-armored heroes you’ll use in Marvel Rivals. Her ability to use tech weapons such as mines, drones, or even cyber webs can make way for your team to eliminate enemies by launching a successful attack. Here are all of Peni Parker’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Cyber-Web Cluster – Launch forward a Cyber-Web Cluster. Abilities: Spider-Sweeper (Q) – Enhance the SP//dr suit, Knocking Back enemies in its path and deploying Arachno-Mines, Spider-Drones, and Cyber-Webs repeatedly. – Bionic Spider-Nest (LShift) – Generate a Spider-Nest at a targeted area, periodically spawning Spider-Drones and creating Cyber-Webs. – Arachno-Mine (E) – Deploy Arachno-Mines that can be concealed within the confines of a Cyber-Web. – Cyber-Bond (F) – Shoot a web strand that links to the targeted area or Cyber-Web. If stretched too far, it will trigger a pullback. – Wall Crawl (Space) – Hols Space to crawl vertical surfaces. – Cyber-Web Snare (Right Click) – Cast futuristic webbing that immobilizes enemies upon impact and creates a Cyber-Web upon hitting the scene. – Suggested Combo: Set up defenses with Bionic Spider-Nest and Cyber-Web Snare. While laying Arachno-Mines within the webs, strike enemies with Cyber-Web Cluster. Peni Parker is best used as a Vanguard to set defenses for your team while the opposing team launches an attack. Since her abilities limit her to only create a web cluster around enemies and deploy mines as they approach your teammates, she’s best used as a line of defense in any game. Star-Lord – Duelist Hero Star-Lord is one of the deadliest assault heroes in Marvel Rivals and is a force to be reckoned with. His jetpack and element guns enable him to fly across the map and lock on enemies to launch a pray and spray attack. Here are all of Star-Lord’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Element Guns – Shoot enemies with dual Element Guns. Abilities: Galactic Legend (Q) – Engage in free-flight and lock onto enemies in sight. – Rocket Propulsion (LShift) – Boost and soar forward. – Blaster Barrage (E) – Fire a frenzy of shots, causing damage to enemies within range. – Stellar Shift (Right Click) – Dodge in the direction of movement and swiftly reload. – Suggested Combo: Wield the Element Guns to deal damage, nimbly dodge attacks and swiftly reposition with Stellar Shift, and take down the enemy with a lethal combo of Blaster Barrahe and Rocket Propulsion. Since Star-Lord’s guns are the only weapons he uses in the game, his work as a Duelist is limited to mid-range attacks as he stays closer to the team. However, watch out for other soaring heroes on the enemy team who might inflict some damage and are resistant to Star-Lord’s elemental fire. Namor – Duelist Hero Namor, the god of the seas is another Duelist who works effectively in mid-range for any Marvel Rivals team. However, his abilities to summon sea creatures prevent him from closing in on enemies and can deal a number of enemies some serious damage collectively. Here are all of Namor’s abilities: Normal Attack (Left Click): Trident of Neptune – Toss the trident forward, reducing Aquatic Dominion’s cooldown upon enemy impact. Abilities: Horn of Proteus (Q) – Summon Giganto to leap atop enemies within range. – Blessing of the Deep (LShift) – Summon a protective barrier while flying upwards, shielding Namor while disabling movement and skills use during its duration. – Aquatic Dominion (E) – Summon a Monstro Spawn that can autonomously attack enemies. – Wrath of the Seven Seas (Right Click) – Launch the trident forward to damage nearby enemies, then direct all Monstro Spawn to perform an enhanced attack on the nearest hit enemy. – Team-Up Abilities (C): Frozen Spawn – Luna Snow infuses ice energy into Namor, who can then tap into the ice energy to power up abilities at will. Suggested Combo: Use Aquatic Dominion to summon a Monstro Spawn to strike at enemies, then use the Trident of Neptune to reduce the cooldown of Aquatic Dominion. Hit an enemy with Wrath of the Seven Seas to command all Monstro Spawns to launch enhanced attacks. While using Namor, you ought to focus on summoning creatures like Giganto or Monstro rather than relying on your trident to deal damage to enemies. Since Duelists are best suited to a team if they’re quick, Namor functions more like a Strategist since he can use his abilities to support allies. That’s everything you need to know about Marvel Rivals characters and their abilities in the game. If you’re waiting for it to come out, check out our tier list, minimum PC specs, and how to fix Network Errors.

Every LEGO Super Mario Expansion set coming next year Fans of the LEGO Super Mario Interactive sets will be happy to know even more expansions are coming soon next year. LEGO are loving video game crossovers lately. From the new Sonic the Hedgehog sets and soon-to-come Animal Crossing sets to the upcoming in-game LEGO x Fortnite event collaboration, they’re covering many bases from all corners of gaming genres. When it comes to the iconic plumber, they have created a line of interactive LEGO Super Mario sets where you can create your own levels, and a battery-powered Mario will interact with the enemies and environment. New LEGO Super Mario Expansion Sets Available Now Here are the new LEGO Super Mario Expansion Sets available to buy right now. LEGO Super Mario Nabbit at Toad’s Shop Expansion Set – 71429 The LEGO Super Mario Nabbit at Toad’s Shop contains 230 pieces, making up Toad’s Shop, a variety of knicknacks, as well as a Yellow Toad and the thieving Nabbit, who will probably leave without paying. This set is available to order now for $19.99. LEGO Super Mario Penguin Family Snow Adventure Expansion Set – 71430 Coming straight out of Super Mario 64 is the LEGO Super Mario Penguin Family Snow Adventure expansion set. This set contains 228 pieces making up the snowy playset, ice slide, a festive Goomba, and the parent and baby penguins. This expansion set is available now for $19.99. Whatever you do, don’t drop the baby off of a cliff. LEGO Super Mario Expansion sets coming next year We’ll now be delving into the future with the new LEGO Super Mario Expansion sets that are on their way next year. LEGO Super Mario Bowser’s Muscle Car Expansion Set – 71431 The LEGO Super Mario Bowser’s Muscle Car Expansion Set contains 458 pieces that make up The King of the Koopas, his furious muscle car, and a pair of bombs to throw at those pesky plumbers. Bowser will storm onto shelves for $29.99 on January 1, 2024. LEGO Super Mario Yoshis’ Egg-cellent Forest Expansion Set – 71428 The new LEGO Super Mario Yoshis’ Egg-cellent Forest Expansion Set contains 107 pieces making up the fruitful tree and a Yellow and Pink Yoshi guarding a precious egg. You can explore this small forest for $9.99 on January 1, 2024. LEGO Super Mario Dorrie’s Sunken Shipwreck Adventure Expansion Set – The upcoming LEGO Super Mario Dorrie’s Sunken Shipwreck Adventure Expansion Set contains 500 pieces making up the shipwreck and its inhabitants: a Blooper, a Cheep-Cheep, a Cheep Chomp, and the adventurous Dorrie. Not to be confused with a forgetful blue fish, Dorrie will swim onto shelves for $44.99 on January 1, 2024. Those are all of the LEGO Super Mario Interactive Expansion Sets announced for release next year so far. These sets will make the perfect gift for any young LEGO fan as we head into 2024. If you click on a product link on this page, we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every LEGO Star Wars set retiring in 2023: Razor Crest, AT-AT & more We’ve compiled a comprehensive list of every Star Wars set LEGO is retiring in 2023 and where you can buy each of them. With 2024 fast approaching, we’ll soon have to wave goodbye to the year that was, and, unfortunately, some much-loved LEGO Star Wars sets. We’ve compiled a list of every LEGO Star Wars set that will soon be retiring to a galaxy far, far away. So, with still a month of 2023 left, it’s best to get your hands on these Star Wars sets now if you don’t want to miss out. Which set will you miss most? 1. The Razor Crest – 75292 On our list of the best sets in LEGO’s Star Wars Ultimate Collector’s Series, The Razor Crest is featured first for a reason. It’s billed as the ultimate build for fans of The Mandalorian. This highly detailed, 6187-piece set measures 10 inches tall, 20 inches wide, and 29 inches in depth. Indeed, it is the largest The Razor Crest set ever produced by LEGO. Five minifigures — The Mandalorian, The Mythrol, Kuiil, Grogu, and a Blurrg — are included. 2. Republic Gunship – 75309 Another set we regard as one of the best in LEGO’s Star Wars Ultimate Collector’s Series, the Republic Gunship is one of the must-have Star Wars-inspired LEGO sets. Also known as “Low Altitude Assualt Transport”, this ship features in the Battle of Geonosis in the Clone Wars. Comprising 3292 pieces, the finished build measures 13 inches tall, 30 inches wide, and 27 inches in depth, making it a display piece next to other ships from the “Galaxy far, far away”. The set includes a redesigned Minifigure of Jedi Master Mace Windu and a Clone Trooper Commander Minifigure. 3. AT-AT – 75288 When released, the AT-AT set marked the 40th anniversary of Star Wars: The Empire Strikes Back. The 1267-piece set features spring-loaded shooters, a Speeder bike, and six minifigures. These include Luke Skywalker and General Veers, to help you recreate the Battle of Hoth. 4. The Justifier – 75323 With features such as flight and landing modes, spring-loaded shooters, and a ‘laser’ jail cell, the LEGO-reimagined The Justifier set is for play and display. The complete 1022-piece set measures 5 inches tall, 15 inches long, and 19.5 inches wide. The set ships with four Minifigures and a droid. 5. Inquisitor Transport Scythe – 75336 Comprising 924 pieces, this set, for ages 9+, features foldable wings to recreate flying and landing scenes, a fold-down ramp, a detailed interior, and two spring-loaded shooters. The set, which features four Minifigures, measures 5.5 inches tall, 14.5 inches long, and 9.5 inches wide. 6. Luke Skywalker’s X-Wing Fighter – 75301 Although it may not have the most number of pieces (474, to be precise), this LEGO interpretation of Luke Skywalker’s X-Wing Fighter features several authentic details — the wings can be adjusted via a touch of a button, the landing gear is retractable and there’s even space for much-loved droid R2-D2. In addition to the latter, Luke Skywalker, Princess Leia, and General Dodonna Minifigures are included. The set measures 3 inches tall, 12.5 inches long, and 11 inches wide. 7. Imperial TIE Fighter – 75300 This LEGO reimagining of the iconic Imperial TIE Fighter might be on the smaller side, yet it’s sure to provide tonnes of fun for ages 8+. The 432-piece set includes minifigures of a TIE Fighter Pilot, replete with a blaster pistol, a Stormtrooper, and a NI-L8 Protocol Droid. The set measures 6.5 inches tall, 5.5 inches long, and 6 inches wide. 8. Hoth AT-ST – 75322 When revealed, this was the first-ever LEGO model of the AT-ST. This set is undoubtedly a neat addition to a collection that already includes the AT-AT. The 586-piece set — measuring 10.5 inches tall, 6 inches long, and 5 inches wide — features functionalities such as a rotating head and a duo of spring-loaded shooters. Four minifigures, including Chewbacca, are included. However, this is not the only LEGO Star Wars AT-ST retiring. A smaller version, the 87-piece AT-ST is also scheduled to go into retirement. 9. Ambush on Ferrix – 75338 Featuring a Mobile Tac-Pod, replete with a rotating double stud shooter, and a Speeder bike, this set allows you hours of fun, recreating classic and creating newly imagined Star Wars scenes. The 679-piece set includes minifigures of Cassian Andor, Luthen Rael, and Syril Karn. 10. Boba Fett’s Starship – 75312 Comprising 593 pieces, this LEGO’s reimagining of Boba Fett’s Starship allows The Mandalorian fans to recreate missions of the bounty hunter. A neat addition, this set includes a transporter vehicle to not only move the ship but to serve as a stand when you want to display it in its “flying” position. The set measures 3.5 inches tall, with the width and length coming in at 8 inches. Two Minifigures — Boba Fett and The Mandalorian — are included. 11. Republic Fighter Tank – 75342 Featuring Minifigures of iconic Star Wars: The Clone Wars characters and two Battle Droids, this 262-piece LEGO-reimagined Republic Fighter Tank is designed for ages 7+. The completed set measures 4 inches tall, 8 inches long, and 6 inches wide. 12. The Child – 75318 Endearingly known as “Baby Yoda”, this the Child set makes for a great display piece for all Mandalorian fans. Comprising 1075 pieces, the finished build, which can be posed, stands 7.5 inches tall. The Child Minifigure is also included. 13. BD-1 – 75335 Comprising 1062 pieces, this set, inspired by the exploration drone from Star Wars Jedi: Fallen Order, makes for a great display piece, thanks to functions such as a tilting head. When complete, the BD-1 measures 12.5 inches tall. 14. The Mandalorian & the Child – 75317 Designed for display, this 295-piece LEGO BrickHeadz set features The Mandalorian and the Child, replete with weapons and a hoverpram, respectively. Both figures measure 8 inches tall (when the Child is in the hoverpram). 15. Boba Fett’s Throne Room – 75326 This 732-piece LEGO recreation of Boba Fett’s throne room features a throne room, kitchen, and a barbeque area. However, there’s more to what meets the eye — the set includes secret compartments, tilting steps, and, for the throne, an eject function to send Bib Fortuna flying. In addition, seven Minifigures are included. The set measures 6.5 inches tall, 12.5 inches wide, and 8 inches in depth. 16. Snowtrooper Battle Pack – 75320 Supplement your 75288 AT-AT and 75322 Hoth AT-ST sets with the 105-piece 75320 Snowtrooper Battle Pack to further recreate the Battle of Hoth in Star Wars: The Empire Strikes Back. The set features an Imperial Hoth speeder bike, an E-Web heavy repeating blaster, and a snow trench. A quartet of Minifigures — three Snowtroopers and a Hoth Scout Trooper — is included. 17. Dark Trooper Attack – 75324 Designed for ages 8+, this set, comprising 166 pieces, features a revolving elevator and a rotating battle platform for you to recreate the scene where Luke Skywalker makes his dramatic return in Star Wars: The Mandalorian Season 2. Four Minifigures, including that of the latter Jedi, are included. 18. Obi-Wan Kenobi vs. Darth Vader – 75334 Featuring two rotating platforms, this set allows you to create your own battle sequences between Obi-Wan Kenobi and Darth Vader as they wield their lightsabers. In addition to Minifigures of the former and latter, the set includes Minifigures of Tala Durith droid NED-B. 19. LEGO Star Wars Helmet Collection At the end of 2023, LEGO will discontinue two of its Star Wars Helmet pieces, the Luke Skywalker (Red Five) Helmet and the Dark Trooper Helmet. The former comprises 675 pieces and measures 7.5 inches tall. You’ll find the latter, a 693-piece set measuring 7 inches tall, making both of these excellent display pieces. Best to grab onto your helmets and get them now. 20. LEGO Star Wars Diorama Collection LEGO is cleaning out its diorama closet, retiring a total of four Star Wars-inspired diorama sets, the Millenium Falcon Holiday Diorama, Death Star Trench Run Diorama, Dagobah Jedi Training Diorama and Death Star Trash Compactor Diorama. All of these sets, replete with their Minifigures, will make for exciting display pieces. Buy the Millenium Falcon Holiday diorama – Buy the Death Star trench run diorama – Buy the Dagobah Jedi training diorama – Buy the Death Star trash compactor diorama – 21. Star Wars Advent Calendar 2023 – 75366 No surprise here! However, a fair bet would be that LEGO will introduce a Star Wars Advent Calendar for 2024 (here’s hoping!). If you’re looking to get your hands on one before the end of the year, we compiled a list of where you can buy all the LEGO Advent Calendars currently on offer, including this one. If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every LEGO Speed Champions set retiring in 2023 LEGOWe’ve rounded up all the LEGO Speed Champions sets retiring in 2023 and where you can buy each of them. Drivers, start your engines. It’s almost time to drive into a new year. However, if you were planning on doing so in one of these LEGO Speed Champions cars, you’ll have to put the pedal to the metal. You don’t want to be the person standing outside, waving goodbye as they drive away. Each of these sets offers oodles of enjoyment for most ages. In addition, they make for great display pieces. You can also immersive yourself in the playing experience, of course. Who wouldn’t want to drive James Bond’s Aston Martin? What’s more, some of the sets here have been discounted. In addition, if you don’t want to miss out on the retiring LEGO Star Wars and Harry Potter sets, we have you covered. We compiled a list of each: “Every Retiring LEGO Star Wars set” and “Every retiring LEGO Harry Potter set”. LEGO Speed Champions Fast & Furious 1970 Dodge Charger R/T — 76912 A muscle car for the ages. The LEGO-reimagined Dodge Charger R/T is the perfect gift for fans of Fast & Furious. You’ll want to get this set soon, though. This model is going furiously fast into retirement. There’s less than a month left. So, it’s best to get the keys to this set sooner rather than later. What’s more, at the moment, Walmart has dropped its price by $4 to $15.99. This LEGO replica of Dominic Toretto’s beloved Dodge features several nods to the original movie car. No batteries are required. All you need is your imagination. Soon, you’ll be racing off the starting line like Dominic Toretto. Yes, a minifigure of Dom himself is included. The Dodge Charger R/T-inspired brick model measures two inches tall, two-and-a-half inches wide, and six-and-a-half inches long. It comprises of 345 pieces. LEGO Speed Champions Toyota GR Supra — 76901 Not old enough to get your driver’s license? No worries. The LEGO Speed Champions GR Supra only requires you to be aged seven and up. The GR Supra is an iconic vehicle. So what’s stopping you from getting into this brick-built version? It costs much less than the original. Plus, you can display it with your Speed Champions collection on your shelf. Its yellow bodywork will undoubtedly add an eye-catching touch to your display. With the Supra nameplate carrying loads of history, this kit is perfect for fans of iconic sports cars. The wide-body replica comprises 299 bricks. It measures one-and-half inches tall, two-and-half inches wide, and six inches long. LEGO Speed Champions 007 Aston Martin DB5 — 76911 If you like classic cars and your Martini shaken and not stirred (if you’re old enough, that is), this is the LEGO Speed Champions set for you. It’s also a great gift for lovers of classic cars. As long as you’re aged eight and up. The LEGO replica of the 1964 DB5 looks brilliant. In addition, a minifigure of 007 himself is included. The set comprises 298 bricks. It measures two inches tall, two-and-a-half inches wide, and six-and-a-half inches long. In addition, Walmart has discounted this classic LEGO Aston Martin by $4 to $15.99. LEGO Speed Champions Koenigsegg Jesko — 76900 If you love speed, this LEGO Speed Champions set is for you (if you’re aged seven and up). However, you will have to act fast, as it will be retiring soon. The LEGO-reimagined Jesko features authentic details, most notably the large rear spoiler. A minifigure of a Koenigsegg racing driver is included. This LEGO model comprises 280 pieces. It measures one-and-a-half inches tall (for aerodynamics, of course), two-and-a-half inches wide, and six inches long. LEGO Speed Champions Aston Martin Valkyrie AMR Pro and Aston Martin Vantage GT3 — 76910 This set is the perfect gift for fans of hypercars and motor racing. This kit includes two LEGO-reimagined Aston Martins, a Valkyrie AMR Pro, and a Vantage GT3 race car. In addition, with two models to build, this 592-piece set allows you to share in the building experience. You can also race each other. Just strap in your minifigure (two are included), and start racing. If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every LEGO Ideas set retiring: Fender Stratocaster, Football Table & more LEGOWe have rounded up all of the LEGO Ideas sets retiring in 2023 and where to buy each of them. Several LEGO sets will be discontinued at the end of 2023, including a quartet of LEGO Ideas kits. Designed for those aged 18 and up, the following kits are perfect for adult LEGO enthusiasts. Each of these provides an immersive building experience and make for great display pieces. In addition, if you don’t want to miss out on other retiring LEGO sets, such as LEGO Art and LEGO Harry Potter, we have you covered. We have rounded up a list of each: Every LEGO Art set retiring in 2023 – Every LEGO Harry Potter set retiring in 2023 – Every LEGO Star Wars set retiring in 2023 – Every LEGO Speed Champions set retiring in 2023 – 1. LEGO Ideas Medieval Blacksmith — 21325 Ever wanted to escape from modern life? Well, put down your smartphone and turn off the television — it’s time to go pick up your bricks (2164, to be precise) and go back to Medieval times with this LEGO Ideas set. The LEGO-reimagined, three-level building is brimming with authentic Medieval details. In addition, the roof and top two levels can be removed to reveal the rooms. These include a fully furnished bedroom, kitchen, and, of course, a blacksmith’s workshop, replete with LEGO light brick. A garden, comprising of an apple tree and a well, is also present. This set allows you to immerse yourself into Medieval times. It includes a quartet of minifigures, each with accessories to recreate your desired scenes to a T. There are a blacksmith, archer, and two Black Falcon Knights. A horse figure and a cart are also included. The set measures 10.5 inches tall and wide, and eight inches deep. A battery is included. 2. LEGO Ideas Winnie the Pooh — 21326 Inspired by one of the most iconic Disney stories, this LEGO Ideas set will rekindle any adult’s childhood memories of Winnie the Pooh and friends. Indeed, minifigures of the former, Piglet, Tigger and Rabbit are included. But what about Eeyore? Yup, a LEGO figure of Pooh Bear’s pessimistic donkey is there as well. In addition, the 1265-piece LEGO recreation of Pooh Bear’s house features an array of authentic elements. Opening up the house reveals a buildable arm chair, Pooh-coo clock, a fire place and more. A buildable brick-version of Pooh Bear’s red balloon is also included. The kit measures nine inches tall, seven inches wide, and eight inches deep. 3. LEGO Ideas Fender Stratocaster — 21329 The Fender Stratocaster is an iconic guitar. This axe has been by legendary musicians, such as Jimi Hendrix, Eric Clapton, Mark Knopfler and many more icons. If you have ever wanted to get on the stage and showcase your shredding (and LEGO-building) skills, now is the time. The LEGO Ideas Fender Stratocaster set will retire at the end of 2023. The LEGO-reimagined 1970s Stratocaster makes for a great display piece. The body can be built with red or black bricks. It measures 14 inches tall, four inches wide, and one inch deep. In addition, the 1074-piece set includes a detailed brick version of a 65 Princeton Reverb amplifier. However, that is not all. A Fender logo, fashioned from LEGO bricks, is included for you to attach to your real-life Strat or amplifier. 4. LEGO Ideas Table Football — 21337 Not enough space for a full-on Foosball table? Well, look no further. The LEGO Ideas Table Football set provides an immersive building and playing experience. In addition, it measures only six inches tall, 17 inches wide, and 12 inches deep. So, you are sure to find a place for it in your home or office (who says you can’t play a game of Foosball at work?). The 2339-piece kit includes a total of 22 (yes, you read that right) minifigures. In addition, there are a whopping 44 different heads and 43 hairstyles. The game table includes two rods for each team, one for the duo of defenders and goalkeeper, and one for the strikers. There’s also color-coded sliding knobs to allow you to keep score. What’s more, LEGO has discounted the price by 40%. If you ever had the idea to grab one of these LEGO Ideas sets, it’s best to turn that idea into a reality. They will be retire soon. If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every LEGO Icons set retiring in 2023: Bird of Paradise, Pickup Truck & more LEGOWe’ve rounded up every LEGO Icons set retiring at the end of 2023 and where you can buy each of them. This year, LEGO is retiring myriad sets from several themes. We have listed each of these at the bottom of the following list. But wait. Don’t scroll to the end now. There are also a host of LEGO Icons kits that will be discontinued before the end of 2023. Have you missed out on grabbing any of these sets? If so, don’t worry: we have you covered. We’ve rounded up every one of the LEGO Icons set that will go into retirement before the start of the new year and where you can buy them. 1. LEGO Icons Colosseum — 10276 When released in November, 2022, the LEGO Icons Colosseum set featured the most bricks of any LEGO kit at the time. However, with a whopping 11695 pieces, it has been dethroned by the LEGO Art World Map, another set that will be discontinued at the end of 2023. However, that doesn’t mean that the LEGO recreation of this iconic building won’t provide an immersive building experience. To quote general-turned-gladiator Maximus Decimus Meridius, “Are you not entertained?” Well, you will be. This set will keep you entertained for hours on end. If you adore architecture and history, this is the set for you. The extremely-detailed kit. The three-story LEGO brick building features authentic elements, such as columns of the Doric, Ionic, and Corinthian orders. The attic is decorated with Corinthian pilasters. The LEGO brick-built Colosseum will make for a majestic display piece. It measures 10.5 inches tall, 20.5 inches wide, and 23.5 inches deep. The set is designed for adults aged 18 and up. So, while you immerse yourself into constructing this awe-inspiring building, we suggest keeping the little ones preoccupied with one of our picks of best LEGO sets for kids. 2. LEGO Icons Real Madrid — Santiago Bernabéu Stadium — 10299 The Santiago Bernabéu Stadium has hosted many iconic soccer games. However, if you never had the opportunity to visit the home ground of Real Madrid, why not build your own? The 5876-piece kit is endowed with a host of details resembling the life-sized home of Los Blancos. With this brick-built scale model you can collect your tickets from the ticket office, take a seat on the bleachers, and watch as the players take to the pitch through the tunnel. No minifigures are included, though. Measuring six inches tall, 18 inches wide, and 15 inches deep, this kit will look marvelous next to your Real Madrid memorabilia. The set was designed for adults aged 18 and up. 3. LEGO Icons Haunted House — 10273 If you “ain’t afraid of no ghost,” this is the set for you. Anyone aged 18 and up are invited to enter (if they dare, that is, because this set can provide oodles of scares). The brick-built Manor von Barron is equipped with a range of thrilling functions. To give it a spooky effect, you can control the haunted house’s lights and motion via your smartphone. There is also a glowing portrait of Von Barron himself. In addition, you can add LEGO Powered Up components (sold separately) to control the elevator. So, will you drop in? The 3231-piece set includes nine minifigures, two of which are ghosts. It measures 27 inches tall, 10 inches wide, and 10 inches deep. 4. LEGO Icons Police Station — 10278 Ever thought a police station can be a fun place? Probably not. However, this LEGO-reimagined police headquarters will provide true-crime fans with loads of excitement. Amusingly, a donut shop is located next door. You can’t fight crime on an empty stomach, right? There’s also a newspaper kiosk, so you can read the latest news of how you caught a criminal. However, you will have to keep your wits about you. The set features several plots where the prisoners try to escape the cells. The latter includes a secret hatch, located below the prison cell’s bed. The kit includes five minifigures. Several neat elements and accessories are also included. The three-floor LEGO Icons Police Station measures 15 inches tall, 10 inches wide, and 10 inches deep. Designed for LEGO builders aged 18 and up, the kit comprises of 2923 bricks. 5. LEGO Icons The Friends Apartments — 10292 This LEGO Icons set allows you to relive much-loved (and laughed about) moments from the sitcom Friends. The kit also contains authentic furniture from each apartment. Even Joey and Chandler’s reclining chairs are included. Do you remember that fun-filled episode? Well, now you can recreate it with the seven minifigures included in the set. The whole gang is there, including Janice. Designed for Friends fans aged 18 and up, the set comprises of 2048 bricks. It measures four inches tall, 26 inches wide, and 13 inches deep. 6. LEGO Icons Pickup Truck — 10290 Transport back to the 1950s with this LEGO Icons set. The brick-built pickup truck encapsulates the originality of the old-school pickup. The LEGO-reimagined pickup truck measures five-and-a-half inches tall, five-and-half inches wide, and 13 inches long. It features several authentic details, such as removable wooden side railings. Opening the doors reveals the detailed interior. Want to see the engine? Just pop the hood. The set also includes several accessories. There are a wheelbarrow, a crate with pumpkins, vegetables, and a milk pail. In addition, a festive wreath and a gift are also present. So, why not grab this set for a loved one for Christmas? The pickup truck may be a humble vehicle. However, you can display this 1677-piece set with pride. It will look great in your home, office, or barnyard. The kit is designed for ages 18 and up. 7. LEGO Icons Santa’s Visit — 10293 It’s the holidays, and Santa Clause is coming to town. But have you been good? Well, if not, you can always grab this LEGO Icons set as a gift for yourself. The 1445-piece LEGO Icons Santa’s Visit set allows you to immerse yourself into the festive season. The kit includes an array of neat details. You can recreate Saint Nick sliding down the chimney, and invite him to join you for a glass of milk and plate of cookies next to the fire place. There are minifigures of mom and dad, their daughter, and, of course, Santa. In addition, you can light up the buildable Christmas tree by pressing the star. Designed for adults aged 18 and up, the set measures seven-and-a-half inches tall, 10.5 inches wide, and six-and-a-half inches deep. It comprises of 1445 bricks. 8. LEGO Icons Galaxy Explorer — 10497 Ever wanted to become an astronaut, but not sure if you want to settle on Mars? Not to worry. You can stay right here on the beautiful planet of ours. Created to celebrate the Classic 497 LEGO Galaxy set from 1979, this kit allows you to immerse yourself into space exploration from your own home. You have to be aged 18 and up, though. The set includes a quartet of astronauts and their robot helper. It also features an array of accessories, such as a surface rover. There are also loads of neat design elements. Measuring five inches tall, 12.5 inches wide, and 20.5 inches long, this set will make for a great display piece. It comprises of 1254 pieces. 9. LEGO Icons Horizon Forbidden West: Tallneck — 76989 Recreate this iconic machine from Horizon Forbidden West. The LEGO-reimagined Tallneck remains true to the original. It features a disc-shaped head, antennae protruding from its neck, and long legs. In addition, the set contains a minifigure of Aloy, replete with a bow and brick-built spear. A Watcher figure is also included. There is also a buildable birch tree, tall grass, and a rusty stoplight. This 1222-piece kit will look great when displayed in your home or office. It measures 13.5 inches tall, nine inches wide, and six-and-a-half inches deep. The set is designed for ages 18 and up. 10. LEGO Icons Bird of Paradise — 10289 A beautiful brick recreation of the Bird of Paradise plant, this set will look great when displayed in your home or office. In addition, you can show it off next to your other botanical-inspired LEGO models, such as the soon-to-arrive LEGO Icons Bouquet of Roses, or the new Tiny Plants set. Comprising of 1173 pieces, the LEGO-reimagined Bird of Paradise stands 18 inches tall. In addition, you don’t need a pot to plant it in. The set comes with the latter. The kit is designed for adults aged 18 and up. Each of these kits will provide tonnes of fun for you and fellow LEGO builders aged 18 and up. They are also great gift ideas. So don’t miss out on these sets while they are still available. In addition, if you have missed out on other LEGO sets that are soon to be retired, don’t fret. We have you covered. We have compiled comprehensive lists of each (listed below). Every LEGO Ideas set retiring in 2023 – Every LEGO Star Wars set retiring in 2023 – Every LEGO Harry Potter set retiring in 2023 – Every LEGO Speed Champions set retiring in 2023 – Every LEGO BrickHeadz set retiring in 2023 – If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every LEGO Harry Potter set retiring in 2023: Hedwig, 12 Grimmauld Place & more LEGOWe’ve compiled a comprehensive list of every LEGO Harry Potter set retiring in 2023 and where you can buy each of them. The new year is right around the corner. Will you receive a letter from Hogwarts for the new school year? Even if you don’t, don’t let that stop you from grabbing these soon-to-be-retired LEGO Harry Potter sets. Indeed, come the end of 2023, they will be discontinued. You have one month left, so don’t miss out. In addition, we’ve also compiled a comprehensive list of all the retiring LEGO Star Wars sets. 1. LEGO Harry Potter 12 Grimmauld Place — 76408 Want to join up with the Order of the Phoenix? Why not meet up with them at their hidden headquarters? This LEGO recreation of 12 Grimmauld Place remains true to the Order’s HQ. So don’t let your eyes deceive you. It’s no run-of-the-mill townhouse. The LEGO model transforms to reveal the HQ. With nine minifigures, including Harry, nearly the whole Weasley clan, Sirius Black, and Kreacher, this set will provide an immersive playing experience for those aged eight and up. Even Hermione’s cat is present. Neat accessories, such as the Extendable Ear, are included. Comprising of 1083 bricks, the set measures 11 inches tall, nine inches wide, and four inches deep. 2. LEGO Harry Potter The Ministry of Magic — 76403 If you’ve ever wanted to visit the Ministry of Magic, now is the time. This 990-piece set promises a fun-filled playing experience for those aged nine and up. Nine minifigures of fan-favorite and infamous characters, such as Dolores Umbridge, are included. Even a Dementor is present. A bit hesitant to enter through the phone booth? Don’t be. You can always use Polyjuice Potion to change how Harry, Ron, and Hermione look. When you’ve arrived, you can start searching for the Slytherin locket Horcrux. This modular set measures 12 inches tall, eight-and-a-half inches wide, and eight inches deep. 3. LEGO Harry Potter 4 Privet Drive — 75968 4 Privet Drive is the location of myriad iconic scenes in Harry Potter. Several jumps to mind. However, the most notable has to be the getaway car scene from Chamber of Secrets. Indeed, a LEGO version of the Weasleys’ flying Ford Anglia is included in the kit. So you can recreate Harry’s exciting escape. In addition, you can relive the classic scene where mail flies through the chimney. All you have to do is slot in the mail and turn a knob. This 797-piece set will provide a fun-filled experience for all aged eight and up. The house features many rooms, including Harry’s cupboard. There are also hidden features. The house measures six inches tall and wide, and four inches deep. The kit includes six minifigures. Harry, Ron, Dobby, and, of course, the Dursleys are present. 4. LEGO Harry Potter Hungarian Horntail Dragon — 76406 Ever wanted to prove yourself against one of the most dangerous dragons in the Wizarding World? Well, grab your broom — now is your time. The LEGO-reimagined Hungarian Horntail is exceptionally detailed. This makes it a great display piece. But don’t fool yourself — this dragon doesn’t remain idle. Turn the handle and its wings start moving. Best to grab onto your Firebolt broom and make your escape. Don’t have the latter broom? Not to worry — it is included. A Harry Potter minifigure is also present. The brick-built dragon measures 18 inches long, with a wingspan coming in at 15 inches. Designed for ages 10 and up, this set comprises 671 pieces. 5. LEGO Harry Potter Hedwig — 75979 If you want to avoid using the postal service, it’s best you grab this set now. There’s a better way to receive letters than from Harry Potter’s famous owl. The LEGO-reimagined Hedwig makes for a great display piece. It measures seven-and-eight-tenths from beak to tail, and six-and-seven-tenths tall. The wingspan measures 13 inches. However, you would be mistaken if you thought it only sits still. Indeed, with the turn of the handle, you can make the wings move. No batteries are necessary. The kit comprises 630 bricks. A Harry Potter minifigure and a small Hedwig figure are included. The set is designed for ages 10 and up. 6. LEGO Harry Potter Hogwarts Magical Trunk — 76399 Don’t wait to unlock this magical LEGO Harry Potter trunk. The 603-piece set is packed with features. These include five customizable minifigures and authentic accessories. The latter includes the Sorting Hat, Bertie Bott’s Every Flavor Beans, The Quibbler, and many more. This set will provide an immersive building and playing experience for those aged eight and up. You can recreate a trio of popular movie scenes. Done playing? Close and lock it, and store it. Going on holiday? Take it with you. The set measures two-and-a-half inches tall and deep, and six-and-a-half inches wide. 7. LEGO Harry Potter Hogwarts Hospital Wing — 76398 Feeling heartsick that this and so many other LEGO Harry Potter sets are retiring? Best book yourself into the Hogwarts Hospital Wing. This 510-brick kit allows you to relive iconic moments, such as the time-traveling scene from Prisoner of Azkaban, from Harry Potter. Minifigures of Harry, Ron, Hermione, and Madam Pomfrey are included. This set, designed for ages eight and up, is a perfect addition to Hogwarts-inspired sets like Dumbledore’s Office. The set measures 10 inches tall, seven-and-a-half inches wide, and four inches deep. 8. LEGO Harry Potter Hogwarts: Polyjuice Potion Mistake — 76386 With this set, you can further expand your Hogwarts-inspired collection. You best to do it now, though, as it will be retiring at the end of the year. This 217-piece set recreates a scene filled with nervous laughter. It was Harry, Ron, and Hermione’s first time trying Polyjuice Potion. Of course, as we know, it didn’t go all too well for Hermione. With this kit, you can relive the moment. Three configurable minifigures are included. You can transform Harry and Ron into Crabbe and Goyle while handing Hermione the face of a cat. In addition, the set features an exclusive golden Harry Potter minifigure. Set in Moaning Myrtle’s bathroom, the set also features a secret passage below the sink. Several accessories are included. Designed for ages seven and up, this 217-piece set measures four inches tall, five inches wide, and three inches deep. 9. LEGO Harry Potter Hogwarts Carriage and Thestrals — 76400 If you always wanted to go for a Thestral-drawn carriage ride, now is the time. This magical set will be retiring soon. The set includes minifigures of Harry and Luna Lovegood. A small Thestral is also present. The kit, designed for ages seven and up, comprises 121 pieces. 10. LEGO Harry Potter House Banners retiring in 2023 Want to show your allegiance to your favorite House in Harry Potter? It’s best to grab these retiring House banners now. All four Houses’ LEGO-reimagined banners will soon be discontinued. But why not collect them all? In addition, you don’t only have to display it. With each set featuring minifigures and accessories, you can immerse yourself in the playing experience. Buy the Gryffindor House Banner at Walmart – Buy the Slytherin House Banner at Walmart – Buy the Ravenclaw House Banner at Walmart – Buy the Hufflepuff House Banner at Walmart – If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every LEGO BrickHeadz set retiring in 2023: Star Wars, Harry Potter & more LEGOWe have rounded up every LEGO Brickheadz set retiring in 2023 and where you can buy each of them. You might struggle to get your head around it, but it’s true — several LEGO BrickHeadz sets will, along with myriad other much-loved kits, be retired soon. How soon? Before the end of 2023. But don’t fret, we have you covered. We’ve listed all of the retiring LEGO BrickHeadz sets and where you can buy each of them. Indeed, if you missed out on these kits, it’s best to grab them now, and add them to your collection. 1. LEGO BrickHeadz Star Wars sets retiring in 2023 This year, LEGO is retiring myriad Star Wars-inspired sets, including LEGO BrickHeadz models of Ahsoka Tano and the heroes from the Battle of Endor. A colorful display piece, the LEGO BrickHeadz Ahsoka Tano comprises of 164 pieces. The model of this brave Jedi measures three-and-a-half inches tall. In addition, it features several neat elements, such as two blue lightsabers. Celebrating the 40th anniversary of Star Wars: Return of the Jedi, the LEGO BrickHeadz Battle of Endor Heroes kit is a must-have LEGO set for Star Wars fans. The 549-piece kit features Luke Skywalker, Princess Leia, Lando Calrissian, R2-D2, and Wicket. The set also includes Luke Skywalker’s lightsaber and Wicket’s spear. Buy the LEGO BrickHeadz Ahsoka Tano direct from LEGO – Buy the LEGO BrickHeadz Battle of Endor Heroes direct from LEGO – 2. LEGO BrickHeadz Harry Potter sets retiring in 2023 In addition to the several LEGO Harry Potter sets retiring in 2023, LEGO is discontinuing a duo of Harry Potter-inspired BrickHeadz kits. Each of these sets comprises a quartet of characters from the Wizarding World, with the first featuring Harry, Hermione, Ron, and Hagrid. This 466-piece kit allows you to recreate iconic scenes, or display it in your LEGO Harry Potter collection for all to see. The trio of students and Hagrid measure one-inch and three inches tall, respectively. But who will teach the young wizards and witch? The professors, of course. Featuring Professors Snape, McGonagall, Moody, and Trelawney, the LEGO BrickHeadz Professors of Hogwarts set comprises of 601 bricks. Each of the characters measures three inches tall. Buy the LEGO BrickHeadz Harry, Hermione, Ron & Hagrid direct from LEGO – Buy the LEGO BrickHeadz Professors of Hogwarts direct from LEGO – 3. LEGO BrickHeadz Disney sets retiring in 2023 A whopping seven Disney-inspired LEGO BrickHeadz sets are retiring at the end of 2023. There are characters from Mickey Mouse & Friends, DuckTales, Toy Story, and Chip ’n Dale. Even the Disney 100th Celebration set is going to be discontinued. Each of these sets will rekindle joyous memories of the much-loved Disney characters. If you love Disney (and is aged 10 and up), it’s best you add these sets to your collection now. Comprising of 90 bricks and standing three inches tall, the first set highlighted here comes in the shape of Donald Duck. Of course, Donald Duck needs a companion. So why not also get the LEGO BrickHeadz-reimagined, 110-piece Daisy Duck set. The latter kit measures four inches tall. In addition, you can complete your Mickey Mouse & Friends-inspired LEGO Brickheadz collection by grabbing the 214-piece Goofy & Pluto set. The former and latter measure three inches and one inch tall, respectively. Indeed, it’s time to get the friends together before they retire. Another LEGO BrickHeadz set that’s going to be discontinued is that of Scrooge McDuck, Huey, Dewey, and Louie. The kit comprises of 340 pieces, with Scrooge measuring four inches tall, and his great-nephews each standing two-and-a-half inches tall. In addition, LEGO has discounted this set by 40%. Celebrating a century of Disney, the LEGO BrickHeadz Disney 100th Celebration set features Micky, Oswald the lucky rabbit, Snow White, and Tinkerbell. This 501-piece kit is perfect for Disney fans, young and old. What’s more, LEGO is offering this set at a discount of 40%. Taking inspiration from two characters from Disney and Pixar’s Toy Story, this set featuring Woody and Bo Beep makes for a great gift. Comprising of 296 pieces, the kit also features neat elements, including Bo Beep’s shepherd’s crook. The final LEGO BrickHeadz set retiring at the end of 2023 comes in the shape of Chip & Dale. The duo of adorable, LEGO-reimagined chip munks comprises a total of 226 pieces. The models measure three-and-a-half inches tall. Buy LEGO BrickHeadz Donald Duck from Amazon – Buy LEGO BrickHeadz Daisy Duck direct from LEGO – Buy LEGO BrickHeadz Goofy & Pluto direct from LEGO – Buy LEGO BrickHeadz Scrooge McDuck, Huey, Dewey & Louie direct from LEGO – Buy LEGO BrickHeadz Disney 100th Celebration direct from LEGO – Buy LEGO BrickHeadz Woody & Bo Beep from Amazon – Buy LEGO BrickHeadz Chip & Dale from Amazon – 4. LEGO BrickHeadz Minecraft sets retiring in 2023 A trio of Minecraft-inspired LEGO BrickHeadz sets will soon be shelves. So it’s best to grab them while they are still on the shelves (the online ones, that is). Designed for Minecraft fanatics aged 10 and up, the retiring models are Alex, Llama, and Zombie. Each set measures three inches tall. However, the brick count differs. Alex, Llama, and Zombie are made up of 86, 100, and 81 pieces, respectively. These sets are perfect additions to any LEGO BrickHeadz fan’s collection. They make for great display pieces, especially when placed next to one another. So why not grab them all before it’s too late? Buy LEGO BrickHeadz Alex from Walmart – Buy LEGO BrickHeadz Llama from Amazon – Buy LEGO BrickHeadz Zombie from Amazon – 5. LEGO BrickHeadz Avatar sets retiring in 2023 This LEGO BrickHeadz is retiring, just like several other Avatar-inspired kits LEGO is discontinuing in 2023. The 246-piece set features two brick-built models of Jake Sully, depicted in human and Avatar form. The latter and former measure three and four-and-a-half inches tall, respectively. An attachable wheelchair is also present, and a Na’vi spear is included. This set makes for a great gift for Avatar fans aged 10 and up. In addition, with two buildable figures included, you can share the joy of building with a loved one or sibling. 6. LEGO BrickHeadz Manchester United Go Brick Me retiring in 2023 Mad about Man Utd? This set is for you (if you’re aged 10 and up, that is). Immerse yourself into the Premier League outfit by customizing your model to resemble you. The 530-brick kit features a trio of skin tones, four hair colors, and several styles for the latter. Of course, the Red Devils’ crest is sited on the front of the model’s jersey. In addition, you can stick your favorite number on the back. 7. LEGO BrickHeadz FC Barcelona Go Brick Me retiring in 2023 Fancy yourself playing for FC Barcelona? Comprising of 530 pieces, this three-inches-tall BrickHeadz kit will allow you to imagine playing for one of the best soccer clubs in the world. Indeed, you can build a model that (nearly, at least) resembles yourself. Brick builders aged 10 and up can choose from three different skin tones and the hue and style of their model’s hair. A sticker sheet is also included. So you can choose the number you want on the back of your jersey. 8. LEGO BrickHeadz Lion Dance Guy set retiring in 2023 A LEGO-exclusive, this Brickheadz set will soon dance its way into retirement. So it’s best to grab it sooner, rather than later. Taking inspiration from the traditional Chinese Lion Dance, the 239-brick kit features several authentic details. A couple of drums and a lantern are included. In addition, the LEGO-reimagined Lion Dance Guy’s mouth is adjustable, allowing you to change the model’s expressions. With its vibrant hues, this four-and-a-half-inches tall set will look great when displayed in your home or office. It’s also the perfect gift for anyone aged 10 and up. With these sets retiring soon, you best grab them sooner, rather than later. No matter the theme, each of these kits will be a great addition to any LEGO builder’s LEGO BrickHeadz collection. If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every LEGO Avatar set retiring in 2023: Floating Mountains, Mako Submarine & more LEGOWe’ve rounded up all the LEGO Avatar sets retiring in 2023 and where you can buy each of them. With the coming of a new year comes the release of myriad new LEGO sets. However, unfortunately, this also means that several current kits will be retired. LEGO Avatar is no exception. LEGO will be retiring four Avatar-inspired sets before the end of 2023. So, if you haven’t grabbed the following sets, it’s best to do it sooner, rather than later. What’s more, these sets are all designed for any LEGO and Avatar enthusiast aged nine and up, making them great gifts for children. In addition, it also allows kids and their parents to share in the immersive building experience provided by each set. 1. LEGO Avatar Floating Mountains: Site 26 & RDA Samson — 75573 Recreate iconic moments from Avatar with this LEGO Avatar set. However, don’t let anybody inhibit your imagination. With this 887-piece kit, you can immersive yourself into Pandora by creating your own adventure-filled scenes. The set features an SA-2 Samson helicopter, replete with moving rotors, and a Site 26 mobile link station. The former measures four-and-a-half inches tall, nine-and-a-half inches wide, and 10.5 inches long. The laboratory measures six inches tall and eight inches wide. Five minifigures, including Jake Sully (in both human and Na’vi forms), are included. A Direhorse figure is also present. A neat addition, the set also features glow-in-the-dark elements. LEGO has reduced this set’s price by 40%. So it is best to get your hands on it now. 2. LEGO Avatar Neytiri & Thanator vs. AMP Suit Quaritch — 75571 With a duo of two buildable figures, this 560-piece set allows the younger ones to share in the building and playing experience. It also makes for a great display piece next to their existing LEGO Avatar sets. The action-packed kit features a buildable AMP suit, Thanator figure, and minifigures of Neytiri and Colonel Miles Quaritch. There’s also a buildable rainforest with glow-in-the-dark elements. That’s cool. The AMP suit measures five inches tall, two-and-a-half inches wide, and four inches deep. Thanks to the suit’s size, you can easily fit in Colonel Miles Quaritch. 3. LEGO Avatar Mako Submarine — 75577 Submerge into the oceans of Pandora with the LEGO-reimagined Mako Submarine, and once you’re below the surface, immerse yourself in the playing experience. This set is a perfect gift for those wanting to explore their imaginations. The 553-piece kit comprises a LEGO Mako Submarine and a trio of coral settings. One of the latter even features a cave. The brick-built submarine features several neat functions, such as a duo of opening cockpits and movable propellers. It measures three inches tall, five-and-a-half inches wide, and 11 inches long. In addition, the set includes minifigures of Neteyam, Ao’nung, Spider, and RDA Quaritch. 4. LEGO Avatar Metkayina Reef Home — 75578 Before submerging into the Pandoran Ocean, why not visit the Metkayina clan? This set will be a great addition to your LEGO Avatar collection. In addition, when you’ve said your goodbyes, you can dive below the surface to discover the cave below. A neat feature, is the pieces of flora found in the latter glow in the dark. Comprising of 528 bricks, this kit features several authentic Avatar items. These include the Metkayina village home, which measures seven-and-a-half inches tall, 16 inches wide, and nine-and-a-half inches deep. There is also a Pandoran reef setting, a canoe, and minifigures of Neytiri, Kiri, Ronal, and Tonowari. Keen on completing your LEGO Star Wars and LEGO Harry Potter collections with soon-to-be-retired sets? We have you covered. We’ve compiled comprehensive lists of each: If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every LEGO Art set retiring in 2023: Batman, The Rolling Stones & more LEGO/CANVAWe’ve rounded up every LEGO Art set retiring in 2023 and where you can buy each of them. Art is forever. However, the following LEGO Art sets won’t be available for much longer. Consider yourself an artist? These are sets you don’t want to miss. It’s time to start painting (with bricks, that is). In addition, if you don’t want to miss out on grabbing the retiring LEGO Star Wars, LEGO Harry Potter, or LEGO Speed Champions sets, we have you covered. We compiled comprehensive lists of each: Every LEGO Star Wars set retiring in 2023 – Every LEGO Harry Potter set retiring in 2023 – Every LEGO Speed Champions set retiring in 2023 – 1. LEGO Art World Map — 31203 Seen the world? Not like this, you haven’t. A world map in LEGO format will look great as a backdrop to the LEGO Architecture sets of destinations you’ve visited or want to travel to (the largest LEGO store in the world, maybe?). A neat feature, you can also mark the former with the LEGO push pins included in the set. Designed for travelers aged 18 and up, this set has to be included as one of the best LEGO sets for adults in 2023. Unfortunately, this is also the year in which it will be retired. Best not to wait for retirement to go travel. However, you might not want to go on this building adventure alone. The LEGO-reimagined world map has the most pieces of any LEGO set ever created. Comprising a whopping 11695 pieces, the completed build measures 26 inches tall and 41 inches wide. A neat feature offers the choice of three build combinations. However, if you prefer to follow your own itinerary, you can customize it to your heart’s extent. You can truly make it a one-of-a-kind display piece. LEGO Art Jim Lee Batman Collection — 31205 Designed for DC Universe fans aged 18 and up, this LEGO Art set makes a statement. Comprising 4167 pieces, the set offers you the option to build a 15.5 by 15.5-inch portrait of Batman, The Joker, or Harley Quinn. But why not own three examples of this set? You will undoubtedly want to showcase all the characters next to each other. In addition, you can combine two sets to create epic artwork of Batman and Catwoman, or all three for a spectacular Batman piece. LEGO Art Floral Art — 31207 Add a pop of color to your home or office wall with this LEGO Art set. Comprising of 2870 pieces, this set offers a trio of existing floral designs to choose from. In addition, builders aged 18 and up can immerse themselves in the experience with five distinct color combinations for each. However, you are more than welcome to mix and match to suit your home’s style. Imagine just how good a gallery of these sets will look. When you are done building, place your piece in the brick-built frame, and display it on your wall. Two hanger elements are included. LEGO Art The Rolling Stones — 31206 If you thought you can’t get no satisfaction, think again. This LEGO Art set will provide hours upon hours of satisfaction every time you see it against your wall. Designed for ages 18 and up, this set was created to pay tribute to The Rolling Stones’ 60th anniversary. In addition, this 3D LEGO interpretation of The Rolling Stones’ iconic logo features a The Rolling Stones signature tile. The set comprises 1998 pieces. It measures 22 inches tall and 18.5 inches wide. All of these LEGO Art sets promise an immersive building experience, best shared with loved ones. Each set is great for adults looking to relax and discover their inner artist. If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Here’s every LEGO Animal Crossing set revealed in detail so far LEGOLEGO Animal Crossing sets have been confirmed and we’re bringing you all the details and release dates for the anticipated collaboration. The LEGO Animal Crossing collaboration was announced earlier in the month, but now we know the first few sets of the line that are releasing, and when. There are a total of five sets with pretty humble price tags aimed at younger gamers to consider. Here is everything you need to know about the LEGO Animal Crossing sets below. Clear inspiration for this new partnership has been taken from the Animal Crossing: New Horizons Nintendo Switch game which debuted around three years ago. That means everything you see should be familiar to you if you played the most recent entry in the franchise. Time will tell if these sets can be considered some of the best LEGO gaming sets, or the best LEGO sets, overall. LEGO Animal Crossing release dates Every LEGO Animal Crossing set announced to date is scheduled to launch on March 1, 2024, in territories such as the US and the UK. That means there are still around four months until you can get your hands on everything. No pre-orders are available from LEGO itself at the time of writing. Kapp’n’s Island Boat Tour A mid-range offering in the LEGO Animal Crossing collection, the Kapp’n’s Island Boat Tour is made up of a total of 233 pieces and is rated for ages 6+. You’ll be getting two minifigs in the set, with this model instantly recognizable from the introduction of Animal Crossing: New Horizons as you are ferried away to an island to start life anew. All told it’s quite a fetching set with its bright color palette and detailing, and it doesn’t cost too much either, retailing for $29.99. It’s currently unknown whether the Animal Crossing sets will fit together the way that the LEGO Super Mario construction kits do, or whether they are purely standalone, but this one could be incredibly popular on release. Nook’s Cranny & Rosie’s House The largest and most expensive of the LEGO Animal Crossing sets to be unveiled, Nook’s Cranny & Rosie’s House is a double set that includes recreations of Tom’s infamous storefront and the disorganized pastel mess of Rosie’s house, too. You’ll also get minifigs of both the raccoon loanshark and the sweater-wearing scatterbrain as well. The set is comprised of a total of 535 pieces and is for ages 7+ and up. It will retail for $74.99. Isabelle’s House Visit Interestingly, instead of being a recreation of Isabelle’s home from Animal Crossing, this set actually sees the yellow dog take a trip out to Fauna’s autumnal cottage for tea. The exterior is beautifully detailed with its brown-and-white color scheme and red accents, and this extends to the apples on the tree and the letter box. The full package includes an interior for both the Isabelle and Fauna and is made up of 289 pieces. The set will retail for $39.99, pricing it firmly in the mid-range. Julian’s Birthday Party The cheapest and smallest of the currently announced LEGO Animal Crossing sets, Julian’s Birthday Party features the titular blue horse surrounded by a wealth of presents at his birthday party. Perhaps fittingly for the smug character, he’s the only one in attendance. He’s decked out in a purple jacket and present boxes are all around, including a wrapped-up skateboard and boom box. It is just 140 pieces and sells for $14.99. You could populate it with other minifigs in the set, or, you know, leave him to it. Bunnie’s Outdoor Activities Another cheaper offering in the LEGO Animal Crossing lineup, Bunnie’s Outdoor Activities sees the peppy rabbit villager engage in fun in the great outdoors. This includes camping out under the stars with a campfire and a tent and going butterfly catching, too. It’s quite the detailed little set with a lot of foliage and accessories alongside the minifig. It will sell for $19.99 and is constructed of 164 pieces. Is there Animal Crossing LEGO? Yes, Nintendo recently announced that LEGO Animal Crossing sets would be coming out in early 2024. Now, we have our first proper look at which villagers and locations from the iconic Nintendo franchise will be represented, with likely more to come on the horizon. If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every new Legendary card in Star Wars Unlimited Set 2: Shadows of the Galaxy LucasfilmWith Star Wars Unlimited Set 2: Shadows of the Galaxy now in focus, so too are brand new Legendary cards. Here’s the full list of every confirmed Legendary in the game’s second Set. There’s no better feeling than opening a booster pack and seeing a rare card among your batch. When it comes to Star Wars Unlimited, outside of the exceptionally hard-to-find Showcase cards, Legendary cards are the best bet to elicit that feeling. With only 16 featured in Set 1: Spark of Rebellion, these incredibly rare yet incredibly powerful Legendary cards are highly sought after. Now with Set 2 in focus for its July 12 release, everyone is looking to the next set of Legendary cards shaking up the meta. Here’s the full list of all the new Legendary cards made available with Star Wars Unlimited Set 2. Every confirmed Legendary card in Star Wars Unlimited Set 2: Shadows of the Galaxy All 16 Legendary cards have been announced for Set 2. The first showcase came during an April 3 reveal stream, and in the months that followed, every single card for the second Set was gradually revealed. The Mandalorian (Unit card) Supreme Leader Snoke Rey (Unit card) Second Chance Finalizer Rule with Respect Endless Legions The Darksaber Kylo’s TIE Silencer Kylo Ren (Unit card) Poe Dameron Krayt Dragon Dryden Vos Final Showdown DJ Evacuate If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every new Leader coming in Star Wars Unlimited Set 2: Shadows of the Galaxy LucasfilmLike Luke Skywalker and Darth Vader in Set 1, new Leaders are on the way to lead new decks in Star Wars Unlimited Set 2: Shadows of the Galaxy. From The Mandalorian to Moff Gideon, here’s the full rundown. Before any deckbuilding begins in Star Wars Unlimited, you first have to pick your Leader and Base. These are the foundational elements, contributing your Aspects to build around, and deciding the style of play you’re set to engage with. 18 Leaders exist already thanks to Set 1, though another batch is on the way to shake things up in Set 2. And while we’re still a ways out from the July 12 release, we do already have the full rundown on every new Leader card coming in Shadows of the Galaxy. So without further ado, here’s the full list of new Leader cards on the way in Star Wars Unlimited Set 2. Every confirmed Leader card in Star Wars Unlimited Set 2: Shadows of the Galaxy The Mandalorian Lando Calrissian Cad Bane Fennec Shand Doctor Aphra Moff Gideon Hunter Boba Fett Hondo Ohnaka Jabba The Hutt Bo-Katan Kryze Bossk Kylo Ren Han Solo Qi’ra Rey Finn Gar Saxon With all 18 Leaders now revealed, it’s only a matter of time before we see who emerges as a newly dominant force in Set 2. We’ll be sure to update you on their strength in the coming weeks through our full tier list following Set 2’s release on July 12. If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Every Keepsake in Hades 2 and how to get them Supergiant GamesKeepsakes can make or break your Hades 2 run by adding game-changing passive buffs. We’ve compiled info on every Keepsake in the game and how to acquire them. Hades 2 has arrived in early access but its feature completion sees it rivaling other full releases. The care and polish Supergiant has put into the game has made it their most successful title already. Of course, if you want to be successful in your own Hades 2 run, you’ll need to pilot new protagonist Merinoe to perfection. The game offers fantastic build diversity so there are numerous ways to get it right. One of the most important facets of your playstyle will of course be Hades 2’s Keepsakes which see their return from the first game. This guide should help you get familiar with them. How to get Keepsakes in Hades 2 The most important thing to do in order to get Keepsakes in Hades 2 is to acquire Nectar. It’s a semiprecious resource that you can gather by passing through doors that feature its symbol. Nectar can also be purchased once per cycle from the Wretched Broker. Once acquired, Keepsakes can be obtained by gifting a Nectar to the various Characters found throughout the Underworld and Beyond. Nectar can also be given to gods by interacting with their insignias. To offer someone a Nectar, simply interact with the character or insignia and select the ‘Gift’ option. A Keepsake will be the first item you receive for gifting someone a Nectar in Hades 2. All Keepsakes in Hades 2 Hades 2 has a total of 27 Keepsakes that you can acquire, each with impactful passive buffs that can change the way you play. Keepsakes can be ranked up as you progress through your run. Ranking up a Keepsake requires having the item equipped for 25 encounters to achieve rank two and 50 encounters for rank 3 three. Below is a list of every Keepsake in Hades 2 with their rankable attributes outlined in bold. And as an Early Access title, it’s worth noting that more can certainly be added in the months to come. With access to these Keepsakes in Hades 2, your adventure through the Underworld and beyond will be all the easier. Of course, if you want to improve your chances even further, maybe you should check out God Mode.

Every Karakuri in Wild Hearts to know: All abilities explained & how to unlock them Koei TecmoIn Wild Hearts, its building mechanics are based on your Karakuri abilities, and this is your guide on what each of them does, and how to unlock them all. Wild Hearts is unique in the monster-hunting genre of games in that it allows the players to build structures to either aid them in battle against Kemonos or traverse the map more efficiently. There are a total of three types of Karakuri to unlock: Basic, fusion, and dragon, and we will explain the uses for each of them and a guide to all the Karakuri you can build, what they do, and how to unlock them. Basic Karakuri Basic Karakuri’s are abilities that let you build structures that grants you either access to hard-to-reach places in maps or an advantage for fights. It tends to be destroyed after construction or one hit from Kemonos. It costs Karakuri Thread to build. To obtain Thread, it can be mined across the map. You can find thread rocks by enabling Hunters Vision. Crate This is the first, and most basic Karakuri you will use throughout your playthrough. The crates are stackable, with a mac stack of three. It can be either used to climb up a wall or to get a height advantage for an air attack against a Kemono. It costs one Karakuri Thread to create, and can be destroyed in one hit from a Kemono. It is unlocked in the tutorial. Bounce Pad The bounce pad gives you an instant horizontal bounce. It can be used to lunge at a Kemono for an attack, or to traverse the map. It costs two Karakuri Thread to create, and it can be destroyed in one hit from a Kemono. It is unlocked when you defeat a Ragetail in the story. Torch The torch can either be used to light up dark areas of the map, or to temporarily put the player’s weapon on fire to add extra damage to any attack. It costs one Karakuri Thread to create, and it can be destroyed in one hit from a Kemono. It is unlocked by defeating A Kingtusk in the story. Glider This is a handheld glider that lifts the player a little before a fully granting a controlled descent. It is recommended to jump off a high point on the map, like a cliff, when using the glider as it can take you very far. It costs three Karakuri Thread to create, and it destroys itself upon landing if not picked up again. It is unlocked after defeating a Spineglider in the story. Stake A platform that fires a grapple hook in front of it, sticking into whatever it is facing. It will provide a platform to grab on either the side of a wall or a monster. It costs two Karakuri Thread to create, and can be destroyed in one hit from a Kemono. It can be unlocked by purchasing it with Kemono Orbs from the Karakuri Menu. Celestial Anchor This is an anchor which is stuck on the ground which allows you to tether onto it and swing around it to close the gap between you and a Kemono, and allows you to perform aerial attacks. It costs three Karakuri Thread to create, and is destroyed either in one hit from a Kemono or after four redirects on the anchor. It can be unlocked by purchasing it with Kemono Orbs from the Karakuri Menu. Dragon Karakuri Dragon Karakuri are abilities that allow you to either traverse the land in a more efficient manner or help you in your Kemono hunts by finding monsters or learning new attack moves. They are generally rarely used in combat. This includes camps, fireplaces, forges, training dummies, drying racks for meat, etc. It can automatically rebuild itself with no extra costs, but it will take Dragon Pit Resources to create them. Dragon Pits are generally strewn across the world, marked on the map by an icon. You can unblock the pits with different materials you can get in the world, with in turn gives the player resources which they can put into gaining Dragon Karakuris. The five resources are Leaf – Fire – Water – Wind – Earth – Each Pit has different stages which need to be unlocked, and each stage will give you resources you can gain. But not every Pit is made equally, as Pits in different regions may only give a certain resource type. There are almost too many variants of different Dragon Karakuris to list in the guide, so instead of listing almost all 30 of them, we will list the most important ones you should unlock. Flying Vine The Flying Vine is a zipline you can summon to help you traverse the map. It allows you to shoot a zipline across a great distance, allowing you to traverse a great distance in a quick fashion. It can be unlocked by purchasing it with resources at a Dragon Pit. Roller A roller is a vehicle that allows you to travel through the map in a large distance on the ground. It is essentially an oddly futuristic motorcycle out of a sci-fi film made out of wood. It is the best way to traverse through the land if you aren’t on a cliff to zipline from place to place. It can be unlocked by purchasing it with resources at a Dragon Pit. Hunting Tower This is the most important Karakuri to build when hunting. The Hunting Tower allows you to scout out specific Kemonos you are hunting on your map. Easily guiding you to your prey without the hassle of playing hide and seek with it. It can be unlocked by purchasing it with resources at a Dragon Pit. Paddle Scoop A Paddle Scoop is a scoop that can be placed in a body of water to automatically catch fish while you are away. Gathering fish is useful as it is one of the best foods to eat before a hunt, giving extra damage and health. But it has a max storage capacity, so make sure you empty it out regularly. It can be unlocked by purchasing it with resources at a Dragon Pit. Campfire Upon landing in a new area, it is wise to build a campfire as it allows you to start hunts in the area when outside of the story or to join open hunt sessions with other online players. Generally, it is already built when you enter a new area in the story, but if it isn’t you should build one. It can be unlocked by purchasing it with resources at a Dragon Pit. Fusion Karakuri Fusion Karakuri’s are abilities that actively aids you in your hunts against Kemonos. It is essentially a more complex version of Basic Karakuris which helps either damage monsters. It costs Karakuri Thread to build. To unlock it, it requires a “Flash of Inspiration” during a fight. It can be triggered if you meet the following requirements: Have the right Basic Karakuri equipped to build the new Fusion – On a hunt of a specific Kemono – The Kemono uses a specific move – The player has enough Thread to build the Fusion. – When a Flash of Inspiration triggers, there will be a button prompt to enable it, and time will slow in the game where you have to build Basic Karakuri using button prompts that appear on screen. The end result is a fusion of the Basic structures which forms something more complex that actively aids you in hunts. In the Karakuri menu, there is a Fusions tab where you can see all the different Karakuris you can unlock. It shows you what Basic Karakuri you need to bring along and what Kemono you need to hunt to trigger inspiration. But if it does not show what Kemono to hunt, it means you have not encountered it just yet. Unfortunately, there are too many different Fusion Karakuri to list in the guide, but these are the most useful ones you can unlock. Bulwark The Bulwark is a defensive structure that can be used to counter charge attacks or to block a Kemono attack. When a Kemono is struck by the Bulwark, it damages and incapacitates it for a few seconds, enough time to land some damage into it. A Bulwark can be unlocked during your first fight against a Kingtusk and you will need crates equipped. Pounder The Pounder that deals a large amount of damage and stun if a Kemono is struck by it. It can be destroyed in one hit by a Kemono. The Pounder can be unlocked during your first fight against a Spineglider and you will need bounce pads equipped. Star Bomb A Star Bomb is a big bomb which deals a large amount of AOE attack to any Kemono in its vicinity. When triggered, it will take some time to explode, but if attacked it will explode immediately. But if you or your fellow hunters are standing too close to it, you can be sent flying. The Star Bomb can be unlocked during your first fight against a Kemono much later into the game, and you will need Bounce Pads and a Torch equipped.

Every new & returning god & mythological character in Hades 2 Supergiant GamesHades 2 adds even more Greek gods and myths for players to encounter during Melinoe’s journey. Here’s what to know about each of them. Supergiant Games is giving fans the first taste of Hades 2 and its new gods thanks to an ongoing Technical Test taking place ahead of the game’s Early Access release later this year. In addition to bringing back characters like Zeus, Posideon, and (of course) Hades himself, Hades 2 draws from even more Greek mythology. This means there are even more gods from the Greek Pantheon, as well as other important figures from Greek myths for players to meet. Here’s what to know about these characters from the protagonist Melinoe to the titan Chronos. Contents New characters – Returning characters – Melinoe – Princess of the Underworld Hades 2’s protagonist is Melinoe, Princess of the Underworld. The daughter of Hades and Persephone, born after the events of the first game, Melinoe is Zagreus’ younger sister. She even has red and green eyes like her brother, though her eye colors are reversed. This time, rather than trying to escape, players will be helping Melinoe as she journeys deeper into the Underworld to defeat the titan Chronos. In Greek mythology, Melinoe the daughter of Persephone and Zeus, who fathered her while disguised as Hades. However, some, like the Orphics, believed Zeus and Hades were one and the same, complicating things a bit. The Hades games have previously toned down the more questionable elements of Greek mythology in the past, such as having Persephone’s father be a mortal farmer rather than Zeus. It’s not clear if this will factor into Hades 2, but it’s an interesting context all the same. Melinoe is sometimes thought to be another name for Hecate, though the two appear as separate characters in Hades 2. Among other things, she is the goddess of ghosts, nightmares, madness and offerings to the dead. She’s also heavily associated with magic and divination, something that’s reflected in Hades 2’s combat. Chronos – Titan of Time The titan Chronos is the primary antagonist of Hades 2. After escaping his imprisonment in the Underworld, Chronos wages war against the Olympian gods and captures his son, Hades, among others. Hades 2’s Chronos combines aspects of the Greek gods Chronos and Cronus, who are often associated (or confused) with one another due to their names. Even the Greeks connected the two, with some believing they were one and the same. In Greek mythology, Chronos is the personification of time, while Cronus is a titan and god of the harvest. Cronus is also the leader of the Titans, who overthrew his father only to be overthrown by his own son, Zeus. He’s best known for devouring his children – including Hades, Demeter and Hestia – who were eventually freed by Zeus. Hades 2 makes Chronos the Titan of Time and father to many of the Olympian gods, blending major aspects of both Chronos and Cronus. Apollo – God of Light Apollo is one of the Olympian gods who will help Melinoe on her journey through the Underworld by offering her Boons. Many of his abilities inflict the new Daze status, which sometimes causes enemy attacks to deal no damage. In Greek mythology, Apollo is mainly the god of the Sun and light, though he’s also associated with archery, healing, music and the arts, and knowledge. He’s also the twin brother of Artemis, the goddess of the hunt who appears in both games. Arachne – Silk Weaver Like in the first game, Hades 2 will draw from more than just the Greek Pantheon. One of these non-god characters is Arachne, Silk Weaver, who gives Melinoe armor to help her survive in the Underworld. Arachne is the central figure of a Greek myth about the dangers of hubris. In the story, Arachne was an incredibly talented weaver who claimed to exceed Athena in skill and challenged the goddess to a weaving competition. When Arachne won, Athena became furious, beating Arachne with her weaving shuttle and destroying her work. This led to Arachne hanging herself in shame. However, Athena took pity on her and turned Arachne into the first spider. In addition to warning mortals about the dangers of challenging gods, Arachne’s story also explains the origin of spiders and their web-spinning abilities. Dora – Listless Shade Dora is a shade who appears in Hades 2. Beyond being a character players can interact with between runs, Dora shares quite a few similarities with the first game’s Dusa. Just as Dusa took inspiration from Medusa, it’s likely Dora is actually Pandora. In Greek mythology, Pandora is the first human woman, created by Hephaestus at Zeus’ instruction after Prometheus stole fire from the gods and gave it to humanity. She was also given a jar (now widely depicted as a box due to a translation error) that she opened out of curiosity. Opening “Pandora’s box” caused evil to fly out and be unleashed onto the Earth. However, hope remained in the box, giving humanity a way to cope. The story is meant to explain the origin of evil, though it’s also been used to justify misogyny by blaming the first woman for all of the world’s ills. Hecate – Witch of the Crossroads Hecate is an important figure in Hades 2, serving as Melinoe’s mentor and the one who saved her from being captured along with her family. After taking in the infant Melinoe, Hecate trained her to eventually take on the Titan. If she sounds familiar to Baldur’s Gate 3 players, that’s because she’s voiced by that game’s narrator, Amelia Tyler. In Greek mythology, Hecate is the goddess of witchcraft, necromancy, crossroads, and the moon. She’s often depicted as being comprised of three women, sometimes with three bodies or just three heads. This is reflected in her Hades 2 design by her armor’s pauldrons, which appear to be heads. Hephaestus – God of the Forge Hephaestus is another Olympian god who grants Melinoe useful Boons, with his abilities adding a Vent status that deals damage after 5 seconds. In Greek mythology, Hephaestus is the god of the forge, volcanoes, and fire. He’s associated with various artisan trades and crafts like blacksmithing, metallurgy, and sculpting. Hephaestus is also the husband of Aphrodite, though their marriage is messy, to say the least. Hades 2’s Hephaestus design has already been praised for its inclusivity, depicting the god as an amputee who uses a wheelchair. This actually comes from mythology in which Hephaestus is said to have curved feet either from birth or as a result of his fall from Olympus. Some myths even say he built himself a wheeled or winged chair for mobility. Hestia – Goddess of Flame Another goddess who helps Melinoe on her quest, Hestia’s fiery Boons often inflict Scorch on enemies to deal additional damage. Hestia is the goddess of the hearth and the home, as well as virginity and family. Like Athena and Artemis, Hestia never married, opting to remain an eternal virgin goddess. She’s also the goddess of sacred and sacrificial fire, hence her Scorch abilities. Moros – Doom Incarnate In Hades 2, Moros seems to serve a similar role as his brother Thanatos did in Hades. Both as sons of Nyx who serve as the personification of some dark concept, with Moros representing doom, ill fate, and inevitability. In Greek mythology, Moros is said to drive people towards deadly fates, reinforcing the inevitability of suffering and death. In some stories, Moros gives mortals the ability to foresee their own deaths. Nemesis – Retribution Incarnate Another daughter of Nyx, Nemesis is an ally on Melinoe’s quest. She is a fellow student of Hecate who expresses disappointment at not being selected to face Chronos, adding a competitive element to her relationship with the Underworld princess. Nemesis is the goddess of retribution and revenge, specifically punishing those who commit the sin of hubris. She is essentially a bringer of divine justice, with her name coming from the Greek word “némein,” meaning “to give what is due.” Odysseus – Veteran Tactician The legendary Odysseus is another figure who will help Melinoe in Hades 2. Odysseus is a major figure in Homer’s Illiad and the protagonist of the Odyssey. The king of Ithaca, Odysseus is known for his creativity and cunning. He’s the mastermind behind the Trojan Horse, a scheme that helped the Greeks win the Trojan War, and he overcomes a decade of obstacles on his quest to return home in the Odyssey. Selene – Moon Incarnate Selene is another new goddess in Hades 2 who grants Melinoe helpful Boons. Her signature status effect is Morph, which makes enemies temporarily harmless. While Artemis and Hecate are also considered goddesses of the moon, Selene is considered the personification of the moon. She’s often depicted driving a lunar chariot across the sky, making her a counterpart to her brother Helios and his sun chariot. Hades – God of the Underworld After serving as the main antagonist of Zagreus’ story in the first game, Hades is the one who needs saving this time. In Hades 2, the eponymous God of the Underworld has been captured by his father Chronos, leaving his daughter Melinoe to rescue him. In Greek mythology, Hades is King of the Underworld and god of the dead. Born the eldest child of Cronus and Rhea, he was the first to be consumed and last to be regurgitated by his father. The most famous Hades myth, and the one most important to the games, is his relationship with his wife. Hades abducted Persephone, causing her mother Demeter to curse the land. He allowed his new wife to see her mother, though not before giving Persephone pomegranate seeds. By eating the seeds, Persephone was bound to the Underworld, though Zeus proposed a compromise: Persephone would spend part of the year with Hades and the rest with the other gods on Olympus. This myth explained the origin of the seasons, as the months when Persephone was with Hades became the winter. Demeter – Goddess of the Seasons Demeter doesn’t appear until pretty late in the first game, meaning many players have missed her. However, she seems to play a larger role in Hades 2, helping Melinoe in her quest to save her family from Chronos. Goddess of the harvest, agriculture, and fertility, Demeter plays a major role in the Hades and Persephone myth. She is the one who stops plants from growing when her daughter is gone, creating a deadly famine and, later, winter. In Hades 2, Demeter doubles down on the winter association. Her Boons can grant Freeze, which causes enemies to stop for 2 seconds. That’s an upgrade from her Chill ability from the previous game, which merely slows enemies. Aphrodite – Goddess of Love Another returning goddess, Aphrodite’s Boons can grant Weak, reducing how much damage enemies deal. Aphrodite is the goddess of love, lust, beauty, and passion in both Hades and Greek mythology. She’s also associated with the ocean due to her unusual birth; Aphrodite is said to have been born from sea foam after Cronus castrated his father, Uranus. In most myths, Aphrodite is married to Hephaestus, with some stories saying Zeus married her off to keep the other gods from fighting over her. However, she’s also romantically linked with Ares, sometimes cheating on Hephaestus with the god of war. Ares is not yet confirmed for Hades 2, though he appeared in the previous game. Aphrodite’s new design does show her with more prominent weaponry and warpaint around her eyes resembling Ares’ look from the last game, so it’s possible the developers are hinting towards their relationship. Artemis – Goddess of the Hunt Artemis is back for Hades 2, now joined by her twin brother Apollo. Her Boons can inflict Marked, which increases your chances of getting a crit on a Marked enemy. While the games focus on her association with hunting, archery, and nature, Artemis is also the goddess of young women, childbirth, and virginity. Like Athena and Hestia, Artemis is a virgin goddess, opting never to marry. She’s also the daughter of Zeus and Leto, the product of one of the Olympian king’s many affairs. Charon – Stygian Boatman The ferryman of the River Styx is back for Hades 2, selling Boons, power-ups, and healing items to Melinoe through her roguelike journey just as he did for her brother. Charon’s job in Greek mythology is bringing departed souls to the Underworld. However, his services aren’t free; ancient Greek funeral rites often included placing coins (known as Charon’s obols) in or near the deceased’s mouth. Those who could not pay or were not given funeral rites had to wander for 100 years before they could cross the river. That theme of payment ties into Charon’s role in the Hades games, as he charges gold (Obols in the first game) for his wares. Hypnos – Sleep Incarnate The fan-favorite Hypnos is back for Hades 2, though this time, players can’t really interact with him – at least not yet. Though he escaped the Underworld between the events of the two games, Hypnos is locked in a seemingly endless slumber. While players will likely be able to wake Hypnos as the game goes on, this is a fitting fate for the personification of sleep. Hypnos is also the son of Nyx and twin brother of Thanatos, two characters from the first game who have yet to be seen in Hades 2. Poseidon – God of the Sea Another major Greek god returning in Hades 2, Poseidon’s Boons have a new status effect to inflict in Slip. This causes increases both the damage enemies take and knockback distance. Poseidon is King of the Sea and presides over storms, earthquakes, and horses. As one of the gods who helped overthrow his father in both Greek mythology, Poseidon seems especially keen to help Melinoe save her family. Schelemeus – Training Master While his name may be different, Schelemeus is Skelly from the first game. He’s unique among Hades’ characters in that he doesn’t seem to have a direct inspiration from Greek mythology. Fans long theorized he was Odysseus, but the reveal of the Homeric hero as a separate character in Hades 2 has debunked that claim. Zeus – King of the Olympians Last but certainly not least, the King of the Greek gods himself is back for Hades 2. Like many of the returning gods, Zeus’ Boons inflict a new condition; this is Blitz, which hits enemies with lightning after they take some damage. As the leader of the Olympians, Zeus is a major player in plenty of Greek myths. Many involve his philandering, as the god of thunder and lightning had many, many affairs and fathered plenty of children. This includes major gods like Athena, Dionysus, Hephaestus, and (in some tellings) Zagreus and Melinoe.